AWS Welding Inspection Handbook

--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International

Provided by IHS under license with ASME Licensee=Fluor Corp no FPPPV per administrator /2110503106, User=Mendez, Fernan
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 01/24/2008 16:12:15 MST
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Date of Issuance: July 1, 2007
(Includes all Addenda dated July 2006 and earlier)
This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National
Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved the code or standard was balanced
to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed code
or standard was made available for public review and comment that provides an opportunity for additional public input from
industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-at-large.
ASME does not “approve,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any items
mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for infringement of
any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly advised that determination
of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as government
or industry endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established ASME
procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
The footnotes in this document are part of this American National Standard.
ASME collective membership mark
The above ASME symbols are registered in the U.S. Patent Office.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
“ASME” is the trademark of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval system or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934

Printed in the United States of America
Adopted by the Council of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914.

Revised 1940, 1941, 1943, 1946, 1949, 1952, 1953, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, 1968, 1971, 1974, 1977, 1980, 1983, 1986,
1989, 1992, 1995, 1998, 2001, 2004, 2007
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright © 2007 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All Rights Reserved

2007 ASME
BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
SECTIONS
I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers
II Materials
Part A — Ferrous Material Specifications
Part B — Nonferrous Material Specifications
Part C — Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
Part D — Properties (Customary)
Part D — Properties (Metric)
III Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2

Division 1
Subsection NB — Class 1 Components
Subsection NC — Class 2 Components
Subsection ND — Class 3 Components
Subsection NE — Class MC Components
Subsection NF — Supports
Subsection NG — Core Support Structures
Subsection NH — Class 1 Components in Elevated Temperature Service
Appendices
Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments
Division 3 — Containments for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel
and High Level Radioactive Material and Waste
IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers
V Nondestructive Examination
VI Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers
VII Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers
VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
Division 1
Division 2 — Alternative Rules
Division 3 — Alternative Rules for Construction of High Pressure Vessels
IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
XI Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components
XII Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks
iii
ADDENDA Interpretations of the Code are distributed annually in
July with the issuance of the edition and subse-
Colored-sheet Addenda, which include additions and
quent addenda. Interpretations posted in January at
revisions to individual Sections of the Code, are published
www.cstools.asme.org/interpretations are included in the
annually and will be sent automatically to purchasers of
July distribution.
the applicable Sections up to the publication of the 2010
Code. The 2007 Code is available only in the loose-leaf
format; accordingly, the Addenda will be issued in the CODE CASES
loose-leaf, replacement-page format.
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee meets regu-
larly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the
INTERPRETATIONS Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of existing
ASME issues written replies to inquiries concerning requirements or provide, when the need is urgent, rules
interpretation of technical aspects of the Code. The Inter- for materials or constructions not covered by existing Code
pretations for each individual Section will be published rules. Those Cases that have been adopted will appear
separately and will be included as part of the update service in the appropriate 2007 Code Cases book: “Boilers and
to that Section. Interpretations of Section III, Divisions 1 Pressure Vessels” and “Nuclear Components.” Supple-
and 2, will be included with the update service to Subsec- ments will be sent automatically to the purchasers of the
tion NCA. Code Cases books up to the publication of the 2010 Code.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
iv
CONTENTS
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Statements of Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Organization of Section III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix
List of Changes in BC Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
Article NF-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

NF-1100 Scope and General Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1110 Aspects of Construction Covered by These Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1120 Rules for Supports and Their Classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
NF-1130 Boundaries of Jurisdiction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1200 Types of Supports and Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1210 Types of Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
NF-1230 Welding Between Types of Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Figures
NF-1132-1 Typical Examples of Jurisdictional Boundaries Between Piping Supports
and the Building Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
NF-1132-2 Typical Example of Jurisdictional Boundary Between Component
Support and the Building Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
NF-1214-1 Typical Standard Support Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Article NF-2000 Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

NF-2100 General Requirements for Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2110 Scope of Principal Terms Employed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2120 Support Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
NF-2130 Certification of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2140 Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2150 Material Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2160 Deterioration of Material in Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2170 Heat Treatment to Enhance Impact Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2180 Procedures for Heat Treatment of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2200 Material Test Coupons and Specimens for Ferritic Steel Material . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2210 Heat Treatment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
NF-2220 Procedure for Obtaining Test Coupons and Specimens for Quenched and
Tempered Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
NF-2300 Fracture Toughness Requirements for Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
NF-2310 Material to Be Impact Tested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
NF-2320 Impact Test Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
NF-2330 Test Requirements and Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
NF-2340 Number of Impact Tests Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NF-2350 Retests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
NF-2360 Calibration of Instruments and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NF-2400 Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NF-2410 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
v
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

NF-2420 Required Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NF-2430 Weld Metal Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
NF-2440 Storage and Handling of Welding Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2500 Examination and Repair of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2510 Examination and Repair of Material Other Than Bolting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2520 Required Examination and Acceptance Standards for Class 1 Springs . . . . . . . 26
NF-2530 Required Examination and Acceptance Standards for Coiled Wire Rope
Used as a Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2580 Examination of Bolting Material and Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
NF-2600 Material Manufacturer’s Quality System Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
NF-2610 Documentation and Maintenance of Quality System Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figures
NF-2311(b)-1 Impact Test Exemption Curves for Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
NF-2331(a)-1 Required Cv Energy Values for Class 2 and MC Support Material Other
Than Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
NF-2331(a)-2 Required Cv Energy Values for Class 3 Support Material Other Than
Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NF-2433.1-1 Delta Ferrite Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tables
NF-2121(a)-1 Material Tables Required for Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
NF-2311(b)-1 Exemptions From Impact Testing Under NF-2311(b)(9) and (10) for
Material Thickness to 2½ in. (64 mm), Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
NF-2331(a)-1 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 1 Support Material Other
Than Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NF-2331(a)-2 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 2 and MC Support
Material Other Than Bolting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NF-2331(a)-3 Required Cv Lateral Expansion Values for Class 3 Support Material Other
Than Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NF-2331(a)-4 Required Cv Energy Values for Class 1 Support Material Other Than
Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
NF-2333-1 Required Cv Values for Bolting Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
NF-2432.1-1 Sampling of Welding Materials for Chemical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
NF-2432.2(a)-1 Welding Material Chemical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Article NF-3000 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

NF-3100 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NF-3110 Loading Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NF-3120 Design Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NF-3130 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
NF-3140 General Design Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
NF-3200 Design Rules for Plate- and Shell-Type Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
NF-3220 Design by Analysis for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
NF-3250 Design by Analysis for Class 2 and MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
NF-3270 Experimental Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
NF-3280 Design by Load Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
NF-3300 Design Rules for Linear-Type Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
NF-3320 Design by Linear Elastic Analysis for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
NF-3330 High Cycle Fatigue Design for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
vi
NF-3340 Limit Analysis Design for Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
NF-3350 Design by Analysis for Class 2 and MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
NF-3400 Design Rules for Standard Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
NF-3470 Design by Experimental Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NF-3480 Procedure for Load Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NF-3500 Design Rules for Component Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NF-3550 Design by Analysis for Class 2, 3, and MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
NF-3600 Design Rules for Piping Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
NF-3650 Design by Analysis for Class 2 and 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figures
NF-3226.1-1 Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Plate- and Shell-Type Supports . . . . . . 37
NF-3226.1(a)-1 Typical Weld Details Referenced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
NF-3226.1(a)-2 Butt Welding of Plates of Unequal Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
NF-3256.1-1 Permissible Welded Joints for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate- and Shell-Type
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
NF-3324.1(a)(1) Typical Friction-Type Connections Using High Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NF-3332.3-1 Illustrative Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
NF-3426.1-1 Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Standard Supports . . . . . . . . 80
NF-3626(a)-1 Additional Permissible Welded Joints for Class 1 Piping Supports . . . . . . . . . . 87
Tables
NF-3131(a)-1 Reference Paragraphs for Procedures for Design of Component
Supports,Piping Supports, and Standard Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
NF-3132-1 Dimensional Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
NF-3225.2-1 Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC Bolt Design by Analysis . . . . 36
NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1 Limiting Proportions for Channels and Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
NF-3324.5(a)-1 Allowable Stress Limits for Class 1 Linear-Type Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1 Effective Slip Coefficient Versus Surface Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
NF-3324.6(b)(1)-1 Minimum Edge Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NF-3332.2-1 Classification of Loading Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
NF-3332.3-1 Stress Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NF-3332.4-1 Allowable Stress Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
NF-3522(b)-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1
Plate- and Shell-Type Supports Designed by Analysis — Component
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
NF-3523(b)-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2, 3,
and MC Linear-Type Supports Designed by Analysis — Component
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
vii
NF-3552(b)-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 2, 3,
and MC Plate- and Shell-Type Supports Designed by Analysis —
Component Supports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NF-3611-1 Suggested Piping Support Spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
NF-3622(b)-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1
Plate- and Shell-Type Supports Designed by Analysis — Piping
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NF-3623(b)-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 1, 2,
and 3 Linear-Type Supports Designed by Analysis — Piping
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
NF-3652(b)-1 Elastic Analysis Stress Categories and Stress Limit Factors for Class 2 and
3 Plate- and Shell-Type Supports Designed by Analysis — Piping
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Article NF-4000 Fabrication and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

NF-4110 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NF-4120 Certification of Materials and Fabrication by Support Certificate Holder. . . . . 89
NF-4130 Repair of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NF-4200 Forming, Fitting, and Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
NF-4210 Cutting, Forming, and Bending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
NF-4220 Support Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NF-4230 Fitting and Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
NF-4240 Requirements for Welded Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NF-4300 Welding Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NF-4320 Welding Qualifications and Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-4330 General Requirements for Welding Procedure Qualification Tests. . . . . . . . . . . 93

NF-4400 Rules Governing Making and Repairing Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NF-4410 Precautions to Be Taken Before Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
NF-4420 Rules for Making Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
NF-4430 Welding of Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
NF-4440 Special Requirements for Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
NF-4450 Repair of Weld Metal Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
NF-4500 Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4510 Rules for Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4600 Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4610 Welding Preheat and Interpass Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
NF-4620 Postweld Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
NF-4660 Heat Treatment of Electroslag Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NF-4700 Requirements for Bolted Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NF-4710 Bolting and Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NF-4720 Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figures
NF-4427-1 Fillet Weld Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
NF-4441-1 Weld Joint Producing Through-Thickness Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Tables
NF-4232-1 Maximum Allowable Offset in Final Butt Welded Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
NF-4622.1-1 Mandatory Requirements for Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT) of
Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NF-4622.4(c)-1 Alternative Holding Temperatures and Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
NF-4622.7(b)-1 Exemptions to Mandatory PWHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
viii
NF-4721(a)-1 Bolt Hole Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
NF-4721(b)-1 Tolerances on Oversized Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Article NF-5000 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

NF-5100 General Requirements for Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NF-5110 Procedures, Qualifications, and Evaluations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NF-5120 Time of Examination of Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NF-5200 Required Examination of Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NF-5210 Examination of Class 1 Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NF-5220 Examination of Class 2 and MC Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NF-5230 Examination of Class 3 Support Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NF-5240 Inertia and Continuous Drive Friction Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NF-5300 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NF-5320 Radiographic Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NF-5330 Ultrasonic Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NF-5340 Magnetic Particle Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NF-5350 Liquid Penetrant Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
NF-5360 Visual Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
NF-5500 Qualifications and Certification of Nondestructive Examination
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
NF-5520 Personnel Qualification, Certification, and Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
NF-5530 Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Article NF-8000 Certificates of Accreditation and Certification Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

MANDATORY APPENDICES
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-I (In Preparation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF-II Design of Single Angle Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NF-III Energy Absorbing Support Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
NONMANDATORY APPENDICES
NF-A Structural Bolt Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
NF-B Design Allowable Stresses for Plate and Shell and Linear Type
Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
NF-C Design Basis for Linear-Type Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
NF-D Tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
ix
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

FOREWORD
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers set up a with Code equations when such equations are mandatory.
committee in 1911 for the purpose of formulating standard The Code neither requires nor prohibits the use of comput-
rules for the construction of steam boilers and other pres- ers for the design or analysis of components constructed
sure vessels. This committee is now called the Boiler and to the requirements of the Code. However, designers and
Pressure Vessel Committee. engineers using computer programs for design or analysis
The Committee’s function is to establish rules of safety, are cautioned that they are responsible for all technical
relating only to pressure integrity, governing the construc- assumptions inherent in the programs they use and they
tion 1 of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks and are responsible for the application of these programs to
nuclear components, and inservice inspection for pressure their design.
integrity of nuclear components and transport tanks, and The Code does not fully address tolerances. When
to interpret these rules when questions arise regarding their dimensions, sizes, or other parameters are not specified
intent. This Code does not address other safety issues relat- with tolerances, the values of these parameters are consid-
ing to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, transport ered nominal and allowable tolerances or local variances
tanks and nuclear components, and the inservice inspection may be considered acceptable when based on engineering
of nuclear components and transport tanks. The user of judgment and standard practice as determined by the
the Code should refer to other pertinent codes, standards, engineer.
laws, regulations, or other relevant documents. In formulat- The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee deals with
ing the rules, the Committee considers the needs of users, the care and inspection of boilers and pressure vessels in
manufacturers, and inspectors of pressure vessels. The service only to the extent of providing suggested rules of
objective of the rules is to afford reasonably certain protec- good practice as an aid to owners and their inspectors.
tion of life and property and to provide a margin for deterio- The rules established by the Committee are not to be
ration in service so as to give a reasonably long, safe period interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any
of usefulness. Advancements in design and material and proprietary or specific design or as limiting in any way the
the evidence of experience have been recognized. manufacturer’s freedom to choose any method of design
This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific or any form of construction that conforms to the Code rules.
prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction, The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee meets regu-
and inservice inspection and testing activities. The Code larly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as dictated
does not address all aspects of these activities and those by technological development, Code Cases, and requests
aspects which are not specifically addressed should not be for interpretations. Only the Boiler and Pressure Vessel
considered prohibited. The Code is not a handbook and Committee has the authority to provide official interpreta-
cannot replace education, experience, and the use of engi- tions of this Code. Requests for revisions, new rules, Code
neering judgment. The phrase engineering judgment refers Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed to the Secretary
to technical judgments made by knowledgeable engineers in writing and shall give full particulars in order to receive
experienced in the application of the Code. Engineering consideration and action (see Mandatory Appendix cov- --``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
judgments must be consistent with Code philosophy and ering preparation of technical inquiries). Proposed revi-
such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory sions to the Code resulting from inquiries will be presented
requirements or specific prohibitions of the Code. to the Main Committee for appropriate action. The action
The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques of the Main Committee becomes effective only after con-
used for design and analysis change as technology prog- firmation by letter ballot of the Committee and approval
resses and expects engineers to use good judgment in the by ASME.
application of these tools. The designer is responsible for Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Commit-
complying with Code rules and demonstrating compliance tee are submitted to the American National Standards Insti-
tute and published at http://cstools.asme.org/csconnect/
1 public/index.cfm?PublicReviewpRevisions to invite com-
Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term com-
prising materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing, ments from all interested persons. After the allotted time
certification, and pressure relief. for public review and final approval by ASME, revisions
xi
are published annually in Addenda to the Code. ASME is to be notified should questions arise concerning
Code Cases may be used in the construction of compo- improper use of an ASME Code symbol.
nents to be stamped with the ASME Code symbol begin- The specifications for materials given in Section II are
ning with the date of their approval by ASME. identical with or similar to those of specifications published
by ASTM, AWS, and other recognized national or interna-
Code Editions may be used on or after the date of issue tional organizations. When reference is made in an ASME
shown in the Edition. After Code revisions are approved material specification to a non-ASME specification for
by ASME, they may be used beginning with the date which a companion ASME specification exists, the refer-
of issue shown on the Addenda. Revisions to material ence shall be interpreted as applying to the ASME material
specifications are originated by the American Society for specification. Not all materials included in the material
Testing and Materials (ASTM) and other recognized specifications in Section II have been adopted for use in
national or international organizations, and are usually this Section. Usage is limited to those materials and grades
adopted by ASME. However, those revisions may or may listed in at least one of the tables of Section II, Part D,
not have any effect on the suitability of material, produced Subpart 1, identified as applicable to this Section. All mate-
to earlier editions of specifications, for use in ASME con- rials allowed by this Section and used for construction
struction. ASME material specifications approved for use within the scope of these rules shall be furnished in accor-
in each construction Code are listed in the Appendices of dance with material specifications contained in Section II
Section II, Parts A and B. These Appendices list, for each or referenced in Appendices A of Section II, Parts A and
specification, the latest edition adopted by ASME, and B except where otherwise provided in Code Cases or in
earlier and later editions considered by ASME to be identi- this Section of the Code. Materials covered by these speci-
fications are acceptable for use in items covered by the
cal for ASME construction.
Code Sections only to the degree indicated in the applicable
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee in the formu- Section. Materials for Code use should preferably be
lation of its rules and in the establishment of maximum ordered, produced, and documented on this basis. Material
design and operating pressures considers materials, con- produced to an acceptable specification with requirements
struction, method of fabrication, inspection, and safety different from the requirements of the corresponding speci-
devices. fication listed in Appendix A of Part A or Part B may also
The Code Committee does not rule on whether a compo- be used in accordance with the above, provided the material
nent shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions of manufacturer or vessel manufacturer certifies with evi-
the Code. The Scope of each Section has been established dence acceptable to the Authorized Inspector that the cor-
to identify the components and parameters considered by responding ASME specification requirements of
specifications listed in Appendix A of Part A or Part B
the Committee in formulating the Code rules.
have been met. Material produced to an acceptable material
Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific specification is not limited as to country of origin.
component with the Code rules are to be directed to the When required by context in this Section, the singular
ASME Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries con- shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice-versa, and the
cerning the interpretation of the Code are to be directed feminine, masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as
to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee. such other gender as appropriate.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
xii
STATEMENT OF POLICY
ON THE USE OF CODE SYMBOLS AND
CODE AUTHORIZATION IN ADVERTISING
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified “endorse” any item, construction, or activity and there shall
organizations to perform various activities in accordance be no statements or implications that might so indicate. An
with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure organization holding a Code Symbol and /or a Certificate of
Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to provide recogni- Authorization may state in advertising literature that items,
tion of organizations so authorized. An organization hold- constructions, or activities “are built (produced or per-
ing authorization to perform various activities in formed) or activities conducted in accordance with the
accordance with the requirements of the Code may state requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
this capability in its advertising literature. Code,” or “meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and
Organizations that are authorized to use Code Symbols Pressure Vessel Code.”
for marking items or constructions that have been con- The ASME Symbol shall be used only for stamping and
structed and inspected in compliance with the ASME Boiler nameplates as specifically provided in the Code. However,
and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates of Autho- facsimiles may be used for the purpose of fostering the
rization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain the standing use of such construction. Such usage may be by an associa-
of the Code Symbols for the benefit of the users, the tion or a society, or by a holder of a Code Symbol who
enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of the symbols may also use the facsimile in advertising to show that
who comply with all requirements. clearly specified items will carry the symbol. General usage
Based on these objectives, the following policy has been is permitted only when all of a manufacturer’s items are
established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles of the constructed under the rules.
symbols, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to The ASME logo, which is the cloverleaf with the letters
Code construction. The American Society of Mechanical ASME within, shall not be used by any organization other
Engineers does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or than ASME.
STATEMENT OF POLICY
ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING
TO IDENTIFY MANUFACTURED ITEMS
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides Symbols shall not be used on any item that is not con-
rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and structed in accordance with all of the applicable require-
nuclear components. This includes requirements for mate- ments of the Code.
rials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, and Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report
stamping. Items constructed in accordance with all of the Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend
applicable rules of the Code are identified with the official to imply that all Code requirements have been met when,
Code Symbol Stamp described in the governing Section in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering
of the Code. items not fully complying with ASME requirements should
Markings such as “ASME,” “ASME Standard,” or any not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify all excep-
other marking including “ASME” or the various Code tions to the ASME requirements.
xiii
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
xiv

PERSONNEL
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Subcommittees, Subgroups, and Working Groups
As of January 1, 2007
MAIN COMMITTEE HONORS AND AWARDS COMMITTEE
G. G. Karcher, Chair U. R. Miller J. R. MacKay, Chair W. L. Haag, Jr.

J. G. Feldstein, Vice Chair P. A. Molvie M. Gold, Vice Chair S. F. Harrison, Jr.
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Secretary C. C. Neely G. Moino, Secretary R. M. Jessee
R. W. Barnes W. E. Norris R. J. Basile W. C. Larochelle
R. J. Basile G. C. Park J. E. Batey T. P. Pastor
J. E. Batey T. P. Pastor D. L. Berger A. Selz
D. L. Berger M. D. Rana J. G. Feldstein R. R. Stevenson
M. N. Bressler B. W. Roberts F. E. Gregor
D. A. Canonico F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. P. Deubler A. Selz
D. A. Douin R. W. Swayne MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP
R. E. Gimple D. E. Tanner
M. Gold S. V. Voorhees
H. N. Patel, Chair R. J. Petow
T. E. Hansen F. B. Kovacs, Alternate
C. L. Hoffmann R. A. Moen, Honorary L. W. Douthwaite
D. F. Landers Member
W. M. Lundy T. Tahara, Delegate
J. R. MacKay CONFERENCE COMMITTEE
D. A. Douin — Illinois (Chair) D. C. Cook — California

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE (MAIN COMMITTEE) R. D. Reetz — North Dakota R. A. Coomes — Kentucky
(Vice Chair) D. Eastman — Newfoundland
J. G. Feldstein, Chair T. P. Pastor D. E. Tanner — Ohio and Labrador, Canada
(Secretary) G. L. Ebeyer — Louisiana
G. G. Karcher, Vice Chair A. Selz
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Secretary D. E. Tanner R. J. Aben, Jr. — Michigan E. Everett — Georgia
R. W. Barnes D. A. Canonico, Ex-Officio J. S. Aclaro — California J. M. Given, Jr. — North
A. E. Adkins — West Virginia Carolina
D. L. Berger Member
M. Gold M. Kotb, Ex-Officio Member J. T. Amato — Minnesota P. Hackford — Utah
G. C. Park E. A. Anderson — Illinois R. J. Handy — Kentucky
F. R. Andrus — Oregon J. B. Harlan — Delaware
B. P. Anthony — Rhode Island M. L. Holloway — Oklahoma
R. D. Austin — Colorado K. Hynes — Prince Edward
HONORARY MEMBERS (MAIN COMMITTEE) E. W. Bachellier — Nunavut, Island, Canada
Canada D. T. Jagger — Ohio
F. P. Barton M. H. Jawad M. M. Barber — Michigan D. J. Jenkins — Kansas
R. D. Bonner A. J. Justin R. W. Bartlett — Arizona S. Katz — British Columbia,
R. J. Bosnak E. L. Kemmler F. P. Barton — Virginia Canada
R. J. Cepluch W. G. Knecht M. Bishop — British M. Kotb — Quebec, Canada
L. J. Chockie J. LeCoff Columbia, Canada K. T. Lau — Alberta, Canada
T. M. Cullen T. G. McCarty W. K. Brigham — New M. A. Malek — Florida
W. D. Doty G. C. Millman Hampshire G. F. Mankel — Nevada
J. R. Farr R. F. Reedy D. E. Burns — Nebraska R. D. Marvin II — Washington
G. E. Feigel W. E. Somers J. H. Burpee — Maine I. W. Mault — Manitoba,
R. C. Griffin K. K. Tam C. J. Castle — Nova Scotia, Canada
O. F. Hedden L. P. Zick, Jr. Canada H. T. McEwen — Mississippi
E. J. Hemzy P. A. Conklin — New York
xv
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

CONFERENCE COMMITTEE (CONT’D) Subgroup on Design (SC I)
R. D. Mile — Ontario, Canada R. S. Pucek — Wisconsin

P. A. Molvie, Chair J. P. Libbrecht
M. F. Mooney — D. E. Ross — New Brunswick,
G. L. Hiler, Secretary J. C. Light
Massachusetts Canada
M. L. Coats B. W. Moore
G. R. Myrick — Arkansas N. Surtees — Saskatchewan,
J. D. Fishburn R. D. Schueler, Jr.
Y. Nagpaul — Hawaii Canada
J. P. Glaspie J. L. Seigle
W. R. Owens — Louisiana M. R. Toth — Tennessee
C. F. Jeerings J. P. Swezy, Jr.
T. M. Parks — Texas M. J. Verhagen — Wisconsin
G. B. Komora S. V. Torkildson
R. P. Pate — Alabama M. Washington — New Jersey
J. D. Payton — Pennsylvania R. B. West — Iowa
M. R. Peterson — Alaska M. J. Wheel — Vermont
H. D. Pfaff — South Dakota D. J. Willis — Indiana Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (SC I)
J. L. Pratt — Missouri E. Zarate — Arizona
D. C. Price — Yukon J. T. Pillow, Chair T. E. Hansen
Territory, Canada J. L. Arnold T. C. McGough
D. L. Berger R. E. McLaughlin
BPV PROJECT TEAM ON HYDROGEN TANKS S. W. Cameron Y. Oishi
G. W. Galanes R. V. Wielgoszinski
M. D. Rana, Chair R. C. Biel, Corresponding J. Hainsworth
G. M. Eisenberg, Secretary Member
F. L. Brown J. Cameron, Corresponding
D. A. Canonico Member
D. C. Cook M. Duncan, Corresponding Subgroup on General Requirements (SC I)
J. W. Felbaum Member
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
T. Joseph D. R. Frikken, Corresponding R. E. McLaughlin, Chair T. C. McGough

J. M. Lacy Member J. Hainsworth, Secretary J. T. Pillow
N. L. Newhouse L. E. Hayden, Jr., G. Cook D. Tompkins
G. B. Rawls, Jr. Corresponding Member P. D. Edwards S. V. Torkildson
J. R. Sims, Jr. K. T. Lau, Corresponding T. E. Hansen R. V. Wielgoszinski
N. Sirosh Member W. L. Lowry D. J. Willis
J. H. Smith K. Oyamada, Corresponding F. Massi
S. Staniszewski Member
T. Tahara C. H. Rivkin, Corresponding
D. W. Treadwell Member Subgroup on Materials (SC I)
E. Upitis C. San Marchi, Corresponding
C. T. L. Webster Member
B. W. Roberts, Chair J. F. Henry
H. Barthelemy, Corresponding B. Somerday, Corresponding
J. S. Hunter, Secretary J. P. Libbrecht
Member Member
D. A. Canonico J. R. MacKay
K. K. Coleman F. Masuyama
INTERNATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP G. W. Galanes J. M. Tanzosh
K. L. Hayes
V. Felix Y. Park
S. H. Leong P. Williamson
W. Lin Y. Kim, Delegate
C. Minu Subgroup on Piping (SC I)
SUBCOMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (SC I) T. E. Hansen, Chair F. Massi

D. L. Berger T. C. McGough
D. L. Berger, Chair W. L. Lowry P. D. Edwards D. Tompkins
B. W. Roberts, Vice Chair J. R. MacKay G. W. Galanes E. A. Whittle
U. D’Urso, Secretary T. C. McGough W. L. Lowry
D. A. Canonico R. E. McLaughlin
K. K. Coleman P. A. Molvie
P. D. Edwards Y. Oishi
J. G. Feldstein J. T. Pillow Heat Recovery Steam Generators Task Group (SC I)
J. Hainsworth R. D. Schueler, Jr.
T. E. Hansen J. P. Swezy, Jr. T. E. Hansen, Chair B. W. Moore
J. S. Hunter J. M. Tanzosh E. M. Ortman, Secretary A. L. Plumley
C. F. Jeerings R. V. Wielgoszinski R. W. Anderson R. D. Schueler, Jr.
J. P. Libbrecht D. J. Willis J. P. Bell J. C. Steverman, Jr.
L. R. Douglas S. R. Timko
Honorary Members (SC I) J. D. Fishburn D. Tompkins
G. B. Komora S. V. Torkildson
D. N. French R. L. Williams J. P. Libbrecht B. C. Turczynski
W. E. Somers D. L. Marriott E. A. Turhan
xvi
SUBCOMMITTEE ON MATERIALS (SC II) Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (SC II)
J. F. Henry, Chair C. L. Hoffmann C. L. Hoffmann, Chair F. Masuyama
M. Gold, Vice Chair P. A. Larkin J. M. Tanzosh, Secretary H. Matsuo
N. Lobo, Secretary F. Masuyama F. Abe H. Murakami
F. Abe R. K. Nanstad W. R. Apblett, Jr. D. W. Rahoi
D. C. Agarwal M. L. Nayyar D. A. Canonico B. W. Roberts
W. R. Apblett, Jr. E. G. Nisbett K. K. Coleman M. S. Shelton
A. Appleton D. W. Rahoi P. Fallouey R. W. Swindeman
M. N. Bressler B. W. Roberts M. Gold B. E. Thurgood
H. D. Bushfield E. Shapiro J. F. Henry T. P. Vassallo, Jr.
J. Cameron R. C. Sutherlin E. L. Hibner
D. A. Canonico R. W. Swindeman
A. Chaudouet J. M. Tanzosh
P. Fallouey B. E. Thurgood Subgroup on Physical Properties (SC II)
D. W. Gandy R. A. Moen, Honorary
J. F. Grubb, Chair P. Fallouey
M. H. Gilkey Member
D. C. Agarwal E. Shapiro
J. F. Grubb D. Kwon, Delegate
H. D. Bushfield
Honorary Members (SC II)
A. P. Ahrendt J. J. Heger Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (SC II & SC IX)
T. M. Cullen G. C. Hsu J. M. Tanzosh, Chair J. F. Henry
R. Dirscherl R. A. Moen W. F. Newell, Jr., Secretary D. W. Rahoi
W. D. Doty C. E. Spaeder, Jr. K. K. Coleman B. W. Roberts
W. D. Edsall A. W. Zeuthen P. D. Flenner W. J. Sperko
D. W. Gandy B. E. Thurgood
Subgroup on External Pressure (SC II & SC-D)
K. L. Hayes
R. W. Mikitka, Chair M. Katcher
J. A. A. Morrow, Secretary D. L. Kurle
Subgroup on Toughness (SC II & SC VIII)
L. F. Campbell E. Michalopoulos
D. S. Griffin D. Nadel W. S. Jacobs, Chair K. Mokhtarian
J. F. Grubb C. H. Sturgeon J. L. Arnold C. C. Neely
R. J. Basile T. T. Phillips
Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (SC II)
J. Cameron M. D. Rana
E. G. Nisbett, Chair D. C. Krouse H. E. Gordon D. A. Swanson
A. Appleton, Vice Chair L. J. Lavezzi D. C. Lamb E. Upitis
R. M. Davison W. C. Mack
B. M. Dingman J. K. Mahaney
Special Working Group on Nonmetallic Materials (SC II)
M. J. Dosdourian A. S. Melilli
T. Graham K. E. Orie C. W. Rowley, Chair M. R. Kessler
J. F. Grubb E. Upitis F. L. Brown R. H. Walker
K. M. Hottle R. Zawierucha S. R. Frost J. W. Wegner
D. S. Janikowski A. W. Zeuthen P. S. Hill F. Worth
Subgroup on International Material Specifications (SC II)

SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR POWER (SC III)
W. M. Lundy, Chair D. O. Henry
A. Chaudouet, Vice Chair M. Higuchi R. W. Barnes, Chair V. Kostarev
J. P. Glaspie, Secretary H. Lorenz R. M. Jessee, Vice Chair D. F. Landers
D. C. Agarwal A. R. Nywening C. A. Sanna, Secretary W. C. LaRochelle
H. D. Bushfield R. D. Schueler, Jr. W. H. Borter K. A. Manoly
D. A. Canonico E. A. Steen M. N. Bressler E. A. Mayhew
P. Fallouey E. Upitis J. R. Cole W. N. McLean
A. F. Garbolevsky D. Kwon, Delegate R. E. Cornman, Jr. D. K. Morton
R. P. Deubler O. O. Oyamada
Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (SC II) B. A. Erler R. F. Reedy
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
D. W. Rahoi, Chair A. G. Kireta, Jr. G. M. Foster B. B. Scott

M. Katcher, Secretary J. Kissell R. S. Hill III J. D. Stevenson
D. C. Agarwal P. A. Larkin C. L. Hoffmann K. R. Wichman
W. R. Apblett, Jr. H. Matsuo C. C. Kim Y. H. Choi, Delegate
H. D. Bushfield J. A. McMaster
L. G. Coffee D. T. Peters Honorary Members (SC III)
M. H. Gilkey E. Shapiro
J. F. Grubb R. C. Sutherlin R. J. Bosnak F. R. Drahos
E. L. Hibner R. Zawierucha E. B. Branch R. A. Moen
G. C. Hsu W. D. Doty C. J. Pieper
xvii
Subgroup on Containment Systems for Spent Fuel Working Group on Piping (SG-D) (SC III)
and High-Level Waste Transport Packagings (SC III)
P. Hirschberg, Chair D. F. Landers
G. M. Foster, Chair A. B. Meichler R. C. Fung, Secretary J. F. McCabe
G. J. Solovey, Vice Chair R. E. Nickell T. M. Adams J. C. Minichiello
D. K. Morton, Secretary E. L. Pleins C. Basavaraju A. N. Nguyen
W. H. Borter T. Saegusa J. Catalano O. O. Oyamada
G. R. Cannell H. P. Shrivastava J. R. Cole R. D. Patel
E. L. Farrow N. M. Simpson R. J. Gurdal E. C. Rodabaugh
R. S. Hill III R. H. Smith R. W. Haupt M. S. Sills
D. W. Lewis J. D. Stevenson J. Kawahata G. C. Slagis
C. G. May C. J. Temus R. B. Keating E. A. Wais
P. E. McConnell P. Turula V. Kostarev C.-I. Wu
I. D. McInnes A. D. Watkins
Working Group on Probabilistic Methods in Design
Subgroup on Design (SC III) (SG-D) (SC III)
R. P. Deubler, Chair D. F. Landers R. S. Hill III, Chair S. D. Kulat
R. S. Hill III, Vice Chair K. A. Manoly T. M. Adams A. McNeill III
A. N. Nguyen, Secretary R. J. Masterson T. Asayama P. J. O’Regan
T. M. Adams W. N. McLean B. M. Ayyub N. A. Palm
M. N. Bressler J. C. Minichiello T. A. Bacon I. Saito
C. W. Bruny M. Morishita A. A. Dermenjian M. E. Schmidt
D. L. Caldwell F. F. Naguib M. R. Graybeal J. P. Tucker
J. R. Cole T. Nakamura D. O. Henry R. M. Wilson
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R. E. Cornman, Jr. W. Z. Novak E. V. Imbro
A. A. Dermenjian E. L. Pleins
P. Hirschberg I. Saito Working Group on Pumps (SG-D) (SC III)
R. I. Jetter G. C. Slagis
R. B. Keating J. D. Stevenson R. E. Cornman, Jr., Chair J. W. Leavitt
J. F. Kielb J. P. Tucker M. D. Eftychiou J. E. Livingston
H. Kobayashi K. R. Wichman A. A. Fraser J. R. Rajan
M. Higuchi A. G. Washburn
Working Group on Supports (SG-D) (SC III) G. R. Jones
R. J. Masterson, Chair I. Saito Working Group on Valves (SG-D) (SC III)

F. J. Birch, Secretary J. R. Stinson
U. S. Bandyopadhyay T. G. Terryah J. P. Tucker, Chair J. D. Page
R. P. Deubler D. V. Walshe R. R. Brodin S. N. Shields
W. P. Golini C.-I. Wu G. A. Jolly H. R. Sonderegger
A. N. Nguyen W. N. McLean J. C. Tsacoyeanes
T. A. McMahon R. G. Visalli
Working Group on Core Support Structures (SG-D) (SC III)
Working Group on Vessels (SG-D) (SC III)
J. F. Kielb, Chair J. F. Mullooly
J. T. Land F. F. Naguib, Chair A. Kalnins
G. K. Miller, Secretary R. B. Keating
Working Group on Design Methodology (SG-D) C. W. Bruny K. Matsunaga
G. D. Cooper D. E. Matthews
R. B. Keating, Chair D. F. Landers M. Hartzman M. Nakahira
P. L. Anderson, Secretary W. S. Lapay W. J. Heilker R. M. Wilson
T. M. Adams H. Lockert
M. K. Au-Yang J. F. McCabe Special Working Group on Environmental Effects (SG-D) (SC III)
R. D. Blevins P. R. Olson
D. L. Caldwell J. D. Stevenson W. Z. Novak, Chair S. Yukawa
M. Hartzman J. Yang R. S. Hill III Y. H. Choi, Delegate
H. Kobayashi C. L. Hoffmann
Working Group on Design of Division 3 Containments Subgroup on General Requirements (SC III & SC 3C)
(SG-D) (SC III)
W. C. LaRochelle, Chair R. D. Mile
E. L. Pleins, Chair D. K. Morton C. A. Lizotte, Secretary M. R. Minick
T. M. Adams R. E. Nickell A. Appleton B. B. Scott
G. Bjorkman H. P. Shrivastava J. R. Berry H. K. Sharma
D. W. Lewis C. J. Temus W. P. Golini W. K. Sowder
I. D. McInnes P. Turula E. A. Mayhew D. M. Vickery
J. C. Minichiello R. P. McIntyre D. V. Walshe
xviii
Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (SC III) SUBCOMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (SC IV)
P. A. Molvie, Chair K. M. McTague

C. L. Hoffmann, Chair H. Murakami
S. V. Voorhees, Vice Chair B. W. Moore
G. P. Milley, Secretary M. Nakahira
G. Moino, Secretary E. A. Nordstrom
W. H. Borter C. J. Pieper
T. L. Bedeaux T. M. Parks
D. M. Doyle N. M. Simpson
D. C. Bixby J. L. Seigle
G. M. Foster W. J. Sperko
G. Bynog R. V. Wielgoszinski
G. B. Georgiev J. R. Stinson
J. Calland F. P. Barton, Honorary
R. M. Jessee K. B. Stuckey
J. P. Chicoine Member
C. C. Kim A. D. Watkins
C. M. Dove R. B. Duggan, Honorary
M. Lau S. Yukawa
W. L. Haag, Jr. Member
J. A. Hall R. H. Weigel, Honorary
J. D. Hoh Member
Subgroup on Pressure Relief (SC III) D. J. Jenkins J. I. Woodworth, Honorary
W. D. Lemos Member
S. F. Harrison, Jr., Chair A. L. Szeglin
E. M. Petrosky D. G. Thibault Subgroup on Care and Operation of Heating Boilers (SC IV)
S. V. Voorhees, Chair K. M. McTague

T. L. Bedeaux P. A. Molvie
Subgroup on Strategy and Management
K. J. Hoey
(SC III, Divisions 1 and 2)
R. W. Barnes, Chair M. F. Hessheimer Subgroup on Cast Iron Boilers (SC IV)

J. R. Cole, Secretary R. S. Hill III
K. M. McTague, Chair P. A. Larkin
B. K. Bobo E. V. Imbro
T. L. Bedeaux W. D. Lemos
N. Broom R. M. Jessee
J. P. Chicoine C. P. McQuiggan
B. A. Erler R. F. Reedy
J. A. Hall
C. M. Faidy Y. Urabe
J. M. Helmey
Subgroup on Materials (SC IV)
P. A. Larkin, Chair W. D. Lemos

Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC III) J. A. Hall J. L. Seigle
R. F. Reedy, Chair R. P. Deubler Subgroup on Water Heaters (SC IV)

W. H. Borter B. A. Erler
M. N. Bressler W. C. LaRochelle W. L. Haag, Jr., Chair K. M. McTague
D. L. Caldwell J. D. Stevenson J. Calland F. J. Schreiner
T. D. Gantt M. A. Taylor
W. D. Lemos T. E. Trant
Subgroup on Graphite Core Components (SC III)
Subgroup on Welded Boilers (SC IV)
T. D. Burchell, Chair O. Gelineau
T. L. Bedeaux, Chair E. A. Nordstrom
C. A. Sanna, Secretary M. N. Mitchell
J. Calland J. L. Seigle
R. L. Bratton N. N. Nemeth
C. M. Dove R. V. Wielgoszinski
M. W. Davies T. Oku
W. D. Lemos
S. W. Doms M. Srinivasan
S. F. Duffy
SUBCOMMITTEE ON
NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (SC V)
JOINT ACI-ASME COMMITTEE ON J. E. Batey, Chair D. R. Quattlebaum, Jr.
CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR NUCLEAR SERVICE (SC 3C) F. B. Kovacs, Vice Chair F. J. Sattler
S. Vasquez, Secretary B. H. Clark, Jr., Honorary
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
T. C. Inman, Chair J. Gutierrez S. J. Akrin Member

A. C. Eberhardt, Vice Chair J. K. Harrold J. E. Aycock H. C. Graber, Honorary
C. A. Sanna, Secretary M. F. Hessheimer A. S. Birks Member
N. Alchaar T. E. Johnson P. L. Brown O. F. Hedden, Honorary
T. D. Al-Shawaf N.-H. Lee N. Y. Faransso Member
J. F. Artuso B. B. Scott A. F. Garbolevsky J. R. MacKay, Honorary
H. G. Ashar R. E. Shewmaker G. W. Hembree Member
M. Elgohary J. D. Stevenson R. W. Kruzic T. G. McCarty, Honorary
B. A. Erler A. Y. C. Wong J. F. Manning Member
F. Farzam T. Watson, Liaison Member R. D. McGuire
xix
Subgroup on General Requirements/ Subgroup on Design (SC VIII)
Personnel Qualifications and Inquiries (SC V)
U. R. Miller, Chair T. P. Pastor
R. D. McGuire, Chair G. W. Hembree R. E. Knoblock, Secretary M. D. Rana
J. E. Batey J. W. Houf O. A. Barsky G. B. Rawls, Jr.
A. S. Birks J. R. MacKay R. J. Basile S. C. Roberts
N. Y. Faransso J. P. Swezy, Jr. M. R. Breach C. D. Rodery
F. L. Brown A. Selz
Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (SC V) J. R. Farr S. C. Shah
J. P. Glaspie J. C. Sowinski
A. S. Birks, Chair R. W. Kruzic C. E. Hinnant C. H. Sturgeon
S. J. Akrin D. R. Quattlebaum, Jr. W. S. Jacobs D. A. Swanson
P. L. Brown F. J. Sattler M. D. Lower K. K. Tam
N. Y. Faransso M. J. Wheel R. W. Mikitka E. L. Thomas, Jr.
G. W. Hembree K. Mokhtarian R. A. Whipple
Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (SC V) Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (SC VIII)
G. W. Hembree, Chair R. W. Hardy C. D. Rodery, Chair C. D. Lamb
S. J. Akrin R. A. Kellerhall E. A. Steen, Vice Chair J. S. Lee
J. E. Aycock F. B. Kovacs J. L. Arnold B. R. Morelock
J. E. Batey R. W. Kruzic L. F. Campbell M. J. Pischke
P. L. Brown J. F. Manning H. E. Gordon M. J. Rice
N. Y. Faransso F. J. Sattler W. S. Jacobs B. F. Shelley
A. F. Garbolevsky D. J. Kreft J. P. Swezy, Jr.
Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (SC V)

Subgroup on General Requirements (SC VIII)
N. Y. Faransso, Chair J. E. Batey
S. C. Roberts, Chair A. S. Olivares
J. E. Aycock J. F. Manning
D. B. Demichael, Secretary F. L. Richter
R. J. Basile K. J. Schneider
Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (SC V) J. P. Glaspie D. B. Stewart
K. T. Lau D. A. Swanson
F. B. Kovacs, Chair A. F. Garbolevsky
M. D. Lower K. K. Tam
S. J. Akrin R. W. Hardy
C. C. Neely
J. E. Aycock G. W. Hembree
J. E. Batey R. W. Kruzic
P. L. Brown T. L. Plasek Subgroup on Heat Transfer Equipment (SC VIII)
N. Y. Faransso
R. Mahadeen, Chair B. J. Lerch
G. Aurioles, Secretary S. Mayeux
Working Group on Ultrasonics (SG-VM) (SC V)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S. R. Babka U. R. Miller
R. W. Kruzic, Chair R. A. Kellerhall J. H. Barbee T. W. Norton
J. E. Aycock J. F. Manning O. A. Barsky F. Osweiller
N. Y. Faransso M. D. Moles I. G. Campbell R. J. Stastny
O. F. Hedden F. J. Sattler M. D. Clark S. Yokell
J. I. Gordon R. P. Zoldak
M. J. Holtz S. M. Caldwell, Honorary
SUBCOMMITTEE ON PRESSURE VESSELS (SC VIII) F. E. Jehrio Member
T. P. Pastor, Chair C. C. Neely
K. Mokhtarian, Vice Chair D. T. Peters Subgroup on High-Pressure Vessels (SC VIII)
S. J. Rossi, Secretary M. J. Pischke
R. J. Basile M. D. Rana J. R. Sims, Jr., Chair J. A. Kapp
J. Cameron G. B. Rawls, Jr. S. Vasquez, Secretary J. Keltjens
D. B. Demichael S. C. Roberts L. P. Antalffy D. P. Kendall
J. P. Glaspie C. D. Rodery R. C. Biel A. K. Khare
M. Gold K. J. Schneider D. J. Burns M. D. Mann
W. S. Jacobs A. Selz P. N. Chaku S. C. Mordre
G. G. Karcher J. R. Sims, Jr. R. D. Dixon G. J. Mraz
K. T. Lau E. A. Steen M. E. Dupre E. H. Perez
J. S. Lee K. K. Tam D. M. Fryer D. T. Peters
R. Mahadeen E. Upitis W. Hiller E. D. Roll
S. Malone E. L. Thomas, Jr., Honorary A. H. Honza F. W. Tatar
R. W. Mikitka Member M. M. James S. Terada
U. R. Miller P. Jansson
xx
Subgroup on Materials (SC VIII) Subgroup on Performance Qualification (SC IX)
J. Cameron, Chair W. M. Lundy

D. A. Bowers, Chair K. L. Hayes
E. E. Morgenegg, Secretary E. G. Nisbett
V. A. Bell J. S. Lee
D. C. Agarwal D. W. Rahoi
L. P. Connor W. M. Lundy
J. F. Grubb R. C. Sutherlin
R. B. Corbit R. D. McGuire
E. L. Hibner E. Upitis
P. R. Evans M. B. Sims
M. Katcher
P. D. Flenner G. W. Spohn III
J. M. Given, Jr.
Special Working Group on Graphite Pressure Equipment
(SC VIII)
S. Malone, Chair M. R. Minick Subgroup on Procedure Qualification (SC IX)

U. D’Urso, Secretary E. Soltow
F. L. Brown A. A. Stupica D. A. Bowers, Chair M. B. Sims
M. J. Rice, Secretary W. J. Sperko
Special Working Group on High-Pressure Vessels (SC VIII) M. Bernasek S. A. Sprague
R. K. Brown, Jr. J. P. Swezy, Jr.
S. Vasquez, Secretary A. S. Olivares P. L. Van Fosson
S. D. Reynolds, Jr. T. C. Wiesner
Task Group on Impulsively Loaded Vessels (SC VIII)
R. E. Nickell, Chair J. E. Didlake, Jr.

Honorary Member (SC IX)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
G. A. Antaki T. A. Duffey
D. D. Barker R. Forgan
R. C. Biel B. L. Haroldsen W. K. Scattergood
D. W. Bowman H. L. Heaton
D. L. Caldwell E. A. Rodriguez
A. M. Clayton J. R. Sims, Jr. SUBCOMMITTEE ON
FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS (SC X)
SUBCOMMITTEE ON WELDING (SC IX)
D. Eisberg, Chair J. C. Murphy
J. G. Feldstein, Chair R. D. McGuire P. J. Conlisk, Vice Chair D. J. Painter
W. J. Sperko, Vice Chair B. R. Newmark S. Vasquez, Secretary D. J. Pinell
J. D. Wendler, Secretary A. S. Olivares F. L. Brown G. Ramirez
D. A. Bowers M. J. Pischke J. L. Bustillos J. R. Richter
R. K. Brown, Jr. S. D. Reynolds, Jr. T. W. Cowley J. A. Rolston
M. L. Carpenter M. J. Rice T. J. Fowler B. F. Shelley
L. P. Connor M. B. Sims D. H. Hodgkinson F. W. Van Name
P. D. Flenner G. W. Spohn III L. E. Hunt D. O. Yancey, Jr.
J. M. Given, Jr. M. J. Stanko D. L. Keeler P. H. Ziehl
J. S. Lee P. L. Van Fosson B. M. Linnemann
W. M. Lundy R. R. Young
Subgroup on Brazing (SC IX) SUBCOMMITTEE ON

M. J. Pischke, Chair A. F. Garbolevsky NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTION (SC XI)
E. W. Beckman C. F. Jeerings
L. F. Campbell J. P. Swezy, Jr. G. C. Park, Chair W. E. Norris
M. L. Carpenter R. W. Swayne, Vice Chair K. Rhyne
R. L. Crane, Secretary W. R. Rogers III
W. H. Bamford, Jr. D. A. Scarth
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC IX)
R. C. Cipolla F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
B. R. Newmark, Chair H. B. Porter D. D. Davis J. C. Spanner, Jr.
P. R. Evans P. L. Sturgill R. L. Dyle J. E. Staffiera
R. M. Jessee K. R. Willens E. L. Farrow G. L. Stevens
A. S. Olivares R. E. Gimple E. W. Throckmorton III
F. E. Gregor D. E. Waskey
Subgroup on Materials (SC IX) K. Hasegawa R. A. West
D. O. Henry C. J. Wirtz
M. L. Carpenter, Chair T. Melfi R. D. Kerr C. S. Withers
J. L. Arnold S. D. Reynolds, Jr. S. D. Kulat R. A. Yonekawa
M. Bernasek C. E. Sainz G. L. Lagleder K. K. Yoon
L. P. Connor W. J. Sperko D. W. Lamond T. Yuhara
R. M. Jessee M. J. Stanko J. T. Lindberg Y.-S. Chang, Delegate
C. C. Kim R. R. Young B. R. Newton
xxi
Executive Committee (SC XI) Working Group on Pipe Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (SC XI)
R. W. Swayne, Chair O. F. Hedden D. A. Scarth, Chair K. Hasegawa

G. C. Park, Vice Chair C. G. McCargar G. M. Wilkowski, Secretary P. H. Hoang
R. L. Crane, Secretary W. E. Norris T. A. Bacon D. N. Hopkins
W. H. Bamford, Jr. K. Rhyne W. H. Bamford, Jr. K. Kashima
D. D. Davis F. J. Schaaf, Jr. R. C. Cipolla H. S. Mehta
R. L. Dyle J. C. Spanner, Jr. N. G. Cofie K. Miyazaki
R. E. Gimple E. W. Throckmorton III S. K. Daftuar J. S. Panesar
F. E. Gregor R. A. Yonekawa G. H. De Boo P. J. Rush
E. Friedman K. K. Yoon
B. R. Ganta V. A. Zilberstein
L. F. Goyette
Honorary Members (SC XI)
L. J. Chockie J. P. Houstrup
Subgroup on Liquid-Metal–Cooled Systems (SC XI)
C. D. Cowfer L. R. Katz
O. F. Hedden P. C. Riccardella
C. G. McCargar, Chair W. L. Chase
Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SC XI)

Subgroup on Nondestructive Examination (SC XI)
W. H. Bamford, Jr., Chair K. Koyama J. C. Spanner, Jr., Chair D. O. Henry

G. L. Stevens, Secretary D. R. Lee G. A. Lofthus, Secretary M. R. Hum
R. C. Cipolla H. S. Mehta N. R. Bentley G. L. Lagleder
S. Coffin J. G. Merkle T. L. Chan J. T. Lindberg
G. H. De Boo S. Ranganath C. B. Cheezem G. R. Perkins
B. R. Ganta D. A. Scarth D. R. Cordes A. S. Reed
T. J. Griesbach K. R. Wichman F. J. Dodd F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
K. Hasegawa K. K. Yoon F. E. Dohmen C. J. Wirtz
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
D. N. Hopkins Y.-S. Chang, Delegate M. E. Gothard

Y. Imamura
Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface,

Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (SC XI) Visual, and Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (SC XI)
R. C. Cipolla, Chair J. G. Merkle D. R. Cordes, Secretary D. R. Quattlebaum, Jr.

G. H. De Boo, Secretary M. A. Mitchell B. L. Curtis A. S. Reed
W. H. Bamford, Jr. K. Miyazaki N. Farenbaugh D. Spake
M. Basol R. K. Qashu G. B. Georgiev J. C. Spanner, Jr.
J. M. Bloom S. Ranganath D. O. Henry C. J. Wirtz
B. R. Ganta P. J. Rush J. T. Lindberg
T. J. Griesbach D. A. Scarth
H. L. Gustin T. S. Schurman
F. D. Hayes W. L. Server Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-WCS) (SC XI)
P. H. Hoang F. A. Simonen
D. N. Hopkins K. R. Wichman D. W. Lamond, Chair R. E. Hall
Y. Imamura G. M. Wilkowski J. M. Boughman, Secretary J. K. McClanahan
K. Koyama K. K. Yoon J. J. Churchwell A. McNeill III
D. R. Lee S. Yukawa G. L. Fechter B. L. Montgomery
H. S. Mehta V. A. Zilberstein K. W. Hall E. J. Sullivan, Jr.
Working Group on Operating Plant Criteria (SG-ES) (SC XI) Working Group on Procedure Qualification
and Volumetric Examination (SG-NDE) (SC XI)
T. J. Griesbach, Chair R. Pace
K. R. Baker S. Ranganath M. E. Gothard, Chair R. Kellerhall
W. H. Bamford, Jr. W. L. Server G. R. Perkins, Secretary D. Kurek
H. Behnke E. A. Siegel C. B. Cheezem G. L. Lagleder
B. A. Bishop F. A. Simonen A. D. Chockie G. A. Lofthus
T. L. Dickson G. L. Stevens S. R. Doctor C. E. Moyer
S. R. Gosselin D. P. Weakland F. J. Dodd S. A. Sabo
S. N. Malik K. K. Yoon F. E. Dohmen R. V. Swain
H. S. Mehta K. J. Hacker
xxii
Subgroup on Repair/Replacement Activities (SG-RRA)(SC XI) Working Group on Implementation of Risk-Based Examination
(SG-WCS) (SC XI)
R. A. Yonekawa, Chair R. D. Kerr
E. V. Farrell, Jr., Secretary S. L. McCracken S. D. Kulat, Chair K. W. Hall
S. B. Brown B. R. Newton A. McNeill III, Secretary D. W. Lamond
R. E. Cantrell J. E. O’Sullivan J. M. Agold J. T. Lindberg
P. D. Fisher W. R. Rogers III S. A. Ali R. K. Mattu
E. B. Gerlach R. R. Stevenson B. A. Bishop P. J. O’Regan
R. E. Gimple R. W. Swayne S. T. Chesworth N. A. Palm
D. R. Graham D. E. Waskey C. Cueto-Felgueroso M. A. Pyne
R. A. Hermann J. G. Weicks H. Q. Do F. A. Simonen
E. V. Imbro C. S. Withers R. Fougerousse R. A. West
M. R. Graybeal J. C. Younger
Working Group on Design and Programs (SG-RRA) (SC XI) J. Hakii A. T. Keim, Alternate
E. B. Gerlach, Chair D. R. Graham
S. B. Brown, Secretary G. F. Harttraft Working Group on Inspection of Systems and Components
A. V. Du Bouchet R. R. Stevenson (SG-WCS) (SC XI)
G. G. Elder R. W. Swayne
K. B. Thomas, Chair S. D. Kulat
E. V. Farrell, Jr. A. H. Taufique
D. Song, Secretary D. G. Naujock
S. K. Fisher T. P. Vassallo, Jr.
V. L. Armentrout T. Nomura
J. M. Gamber R. A. Yonekawa
G. L. Belew C. M. Ross
C. Cueto-Felgueroso R. L. Turner
Working Group on Welding and Special Repair Process
H. Q. Do R. A. West
(SG-RRA) (SC XI)
R. Fougerousse G. E. Whitman
D. E. Waskey, Chair R. D. Kerr M. R. Hum
R. E. Cantrell, Secretary C. C. Kim
S. J. Findlan M. Lau Working Group on General Requirements (SC XI)
P. D. Fisher S. L. McCracken
K. A. Gruss B. R. Newton K. Rhyne, Chair E. L. Farrow
M. L. Hall J. E. O’Sullivan E. J. Maloney, Secretary R. K. Mattu
R. A. Hermann J. G. Weicks T. L. Chan S. R. Scott
R. P. Indap K. R. Willens J. D. Ellis C. S. Withers
Subgroup on Water-Cooled Systems (SC XI) Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC XI)
E. W. Throckmorton III, Chair S. D. Kulat R. W. Swayne, Chair J. E. Staffiera
J. M. Agold, Secretary D. W. Lamond C. E. Moyer C. J. Wirtz
G. L. Belew A. McNeill III
J. M. Boughman W. E. Norris
Special Working Group on Plant Life Extension (SC XI)
D. D. Davis D. Song
H. Q. Do J. E. Staffiera T. A. Meyer, Chair P.-T. Kuo
J. D. Ellis H. M. Stephens, Jr. D. V. Burgess, Secretary R. L. Turner
E. L. Farrow K. B. Thomas D. D. Davis G. G. Young
M. J. Ferlisi R. A. West F. E. Gregor
O. F. Hedden G. E. Whitman
M. L. Herrera H. L. Graves III, Alternate
Special Working Group on High-Temperature, Gas-Cooled
Reactors (SC XI)
Working Group on Containment (SG-WCS) (SC XI)
J. E. Staffiera, Chair H. T. Hill J. Fletcher, Chair B. J. Kruse
H. Ashar R. D. Hough M. A. Lockwood, Secretary M. N. Mitchell
S. G. Brown C. N. Krishnaswamy N. Broom F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
K. K. N. Chao D. Naus K. N. Fleming R. W. Swayne
R. C. Cox S. C. Petitgout W. A. O. Kriel
J. W. Crider H. M. Stephens, Jr.
M. J. Ferlisi W. E. Norris, Alternate SUBCOMMITTEE ON TRANSPORT TANKS (SC XII)
H. L. Graves III
A. Selz, Chair G. McRae
L. Plano, Secretary M. R. Minick
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Working Group on ISI Optimization (SG-WCS) (SC XI)

P. D. Stumpf, Secretary M. D. Pham
E. A. Siegel, Chair A. H. Mahindrakar A. N. Antoniou M. D. Rana
D. R. Cordes, Secretary D. G. Naujock C. Becht IV S. Staniszewski
R. L. Turner, Secretary K. B. Thomas M. L. Coats M. R. Toth
W. H. Bamford, Jr. G. E. Whitman M. A. Garrett A. P. Varghese
J. M. Boughman Y. Yuguchi C. H. Hochman S. V. Voorhees
R. E. Hall G. G. Karcher
xxiii
Subgroup on Design and Materials (SC XII) SUBCOMMITTEE ON DESIGN (SC-D)
M. D. Rana, Chair T. A. Rogers R. J. Basile, Chair D. P. Jones

G. G. Karcher A. P. Varghese R. W. Barnes R. W. Mikitka
S. L. McWilliams M. R. Ward M. R. Breach U. R. Miller
N. J. Paulick E. A. Whittle R. P. Deubler W. J. O’Donnell
M. D. Pham G. G. Graven R. D. Schueler, Jr.
G. L. Hollinger A. Selz
R. I. Jetter
Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (SC XII)
Subgroup on Design Analysis (SC-D)
S. V. Voorhees, Chair D. J. Kreft
J. A. Byers G. McRae G. L. Hollinger, Chair K. Matsunaga
B. L. Gehl M. R. Minick S. A. Adams G. A. Miller
L. D. Holsinger A. S. Olivares M. R. Breach W. D. Reinhardt
R. G. Brown D. H. Roarty
R. J. Gurdal G. Sannazzaro
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC XII) C. F. Heberling II T. G. Seipp
C. E. Hinnant D. A. Swanson
C. H. Hochman, Chair M. A. Garrett P. Hirschberg G. Taxacher
T. W. Alexander K. L. Gilmore D. P. Jones E. L. Thomas, Jr.
D. M. Allbritten J. L. Rademacher A. Kalnins R. A. Whipple
C. A. Betts T. Rummel W. J. Koves
J. F. Cannon M. R. Toth
J. L. Freiler L. Wolpert
W. L. Garfield Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Design (SC-D)
R. I. Jetter, Chair T. E. McGreevy

T. Asayama K. A. Moore
SUBCOMMITTEE ON BOILER AND C. Becht IV W. J. O’Donnell
PRESSURE VESSEL ACCREDITATION (SC-BPVA) J. F. Cervenka D. A. Osage
D. S. Griffin J. S. Porowski
W. C. LaRochelle, Chair M. A. DeVries, Alternate B. F. Hantz B. Riou
P. D. Edwards, Vice Chair C. E. Ford, Alternate M. H. Jawad T.-L. Sham
K. I. Baron, Secretary T. E. Hansen, Alternate W. J. Koves M. S. Shelton
M. B. Doherty G. L. Hollinger, Alternate S. Majumdar R. W. Swindeman
P. Hackford D. J. Jenkins, Alternate D. L. Marriott
K. T. Lau B. B. MacDonald, Alternate
L. E. McDonald R. D. Mile, Alternate
K. M. McTague G. P. Milley, Alternate Subgroup on Fatigue Strength (SC-D)
B. R. Morelock T. W. Norton, Alternate
J. D. O’Leary H. R. Staehr, Alternate W. J. O’Donnell, Chair D. P. Jones
D. E. Tanner J. A. West, Alternate S. A. Adams G. Kharshafdjian
B. C. Turczynski R. V. Wielgoszinski, Alternate P. R. Donavin S. Majumdar
D. E. Tuttle O. E. Trapp, Senior Consultant R. J. Gurdal T. Nakamura
E. A. Whittle A. J. Spencer, Honorary C. F. Heberling II D. H. Roarty
G. Bynog, Alternate Member P. Hirschberg G. Taxacher
P. Hsu H. H. Ziada
Subgroup on Openings (SC-D)
SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR ACCREDITATION (SC-NA)
M. R. Breach, Chair J. P. Madden
R. W. Mikitka, Secretary D. R. Palmer
R. R. Stevenson, Chair D. E. Tanner G. G. Graven J. A. Pfeifer
W. C. LaRochelle, Vice Chair D. M. Vickery V. T. Hwang M. D. Rana
J. Pang, Secretary G. Bynog, Alternate J. C. Light E. C. Rodabaugh
M. N. Bressler G. Deily, Alternate R. B. Luney
S. M. Goodwin P. D. Edwards, Alternate
K. A. Huber J. W. Highlands, Alternate
M. Kotb K. M. Hottle, Alternate Special Working Group on Bolted Flanged Joints (SC-D)
J. C. Krane B. G. Kovarik, Alternate
C. A. Lizotte P. F. Prescott, Alternate R. W. Mikitka, Chair J. R. Payne
R. P. McIntyre S. Toledo, Alternate G. D. Bibel P. G. Scheckermann
M. R. Minick E. A. Whittle, Alternate H. A. Bouzid R. W. Schneider
H. B. Prasse R. V. Wielgoszinski, Alternate A. Chaudouet R. D. Schueler, Jr.
T. E. Quaka H. L. Wiger, Alternate E. Michalopoulos A. Selz
A. T. Roberts III O. E. Trapp, Senior Consultant S. N. Pagay M. S. Shelton
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
xxiv
SUBCOMMITTEE ON Subgroup on General Requirements (SC-SVR)
SAFETY VALVE REQUIREMENTS (SC-SVR)
D. B. Demichael, Chair T. M. Parks
S. F. Harrison, Jr., Chair J. P. Glaspie J. F. Ball D. K. Parrish
J. A. West, Vice Chair H. I. Gregg G. Brazier J. W. Ramsey
S. J. Rossi, Secretary W. F. Hart J. P. Glaspie J. W. Richardson
J. F. Ball C. A. Neumann C. A. Neumann J. C. Standfast
S. Cammeresi T. M. Parks
A. Cox D. K. Parrish Subgroup on Testing (SC-SVR)
R. D. Danzy D. J. Scallan
D. B. Demichael J. C. Standfast A. Cox, Chair W. F. Hart
R. J. Doelling Z. Wang J. E. Britt K. G. Roth
S. Cammeresi D. J. Scallan
G. D. Goodson Z. Wang
Subgroup on Design (SC-SVR)
U.S. Technical Advisory Group ISO/TC 185
J. A. West, Chair H. I. Gregg Safety Relief Valves
C. E. Beair D. Miller
R. D. Danzy T. Patel T. J. Bevilacqua, Chair Y.-S. Lai
R. J. Doelling T. R. Tarbay S. J. Rossi, Secretary D. Miller
S. F. Harrison, Jr. J. A. West
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
xxv
xxvi
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

ORGANIZATION OF SECTION III
1 GENERAL Article Number Title

Section III consists of Division 1, Division 2, and Divi- 1000 Introduction or Scope
sion 3. These Divisions are broken down into Subsections 2000 Material
and are designated by capital letters preceded by the letter 3000 Design
“N” for Division 1, by the letter “C” for Division 2, and 4000 Fabrication and Installation
by the letter “W” for Division 3. The following eleven 5000 Examination
books make up the three Divisions. 6000 Testing
Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 7000 Overpressure Protection
1 and Division 2 8000 Nameplates, Stamping, and
Division 1 Reports
Subsection NB — Class 1 Components
The numbering of Articles and the material contained
Subsection NC — Class 2 Components
in the Articles may not, however, be consecutive. Due to
Subsection ND — Class 3 Components
the fact that the complete outline may cover phases not
Subsection NE — Class MC Components
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
applicable to a particular Subsection or Article, the rules
Subsection NF — Supports
have been prepared with some gaps in the numbering.
Subsection NG — Core Support Structures
Subsection NH — Class 1 Components in Elevated
Temperature Service
Appendices 4 SUBARTICLES
Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments
Subsection CC — Concrete Containments and Divi- Subarticles are numbered in units of 100, such as
sion 2 Appendices NB-1100.
Division 3 — Containments for Transportation and Stor-
age of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High Level
Radioactive Material and Waste 5 SUBSUBARTICLES
Subsection WA — General Requirements for
Division 3 Subsubarticles are numbered in units of 10, such as
Subsection WB — Class TP (Type B) Containment NB-2130, and generally have no text. When a number
Subsection WC — Class SC Storage Containments such as NB-1110 is followed by text, it is considered a
paragraph.
2 SUBSECTIONS
6 PARAGRAPHS
Subsections are divided into Articles, Subarticles, para-
graphs, and, where necessary, subparagraphs and subsubp- Paragraphs are numbered in units of 1, such as NB-2121.
aragraphs.
7 SUBPARAGRAPHS
3 ARTICLES
Subparagraphs, when they are major subdivisions of a
Articles are designated by the applicable letters indicated paragraph, are designated by adding a decimal followed
above for the Subsections followed by Arabic numbers, by one or more digits to the paragraph number, such as
such as NB-1000. Where possible, Articles dealing with NB-1132.1. When they are minor subdivisions of a para-
the same topics are given the same number in each Subsec- graph, subparagraphs may be designated by lowercase let-
tion in accordance with the following general scheme: ters in parentheses, such as NB-2121(a).
xxvii
8 SUBSUBPARAGRAPHS approved by the American National Standards Institute.1
When a product is to conform to such a standard, for
Subsubparagraphs are designated by adding lowercase example ANSI B16.5, the standard is approved by the
letters in parentheses to the major subparagraph numbers, American National Standards Institute. The applicable year
such as NB-1132.1(a). When further subdivisions of minor of issue is that suffixed to its numerical designation in
subparagraphs are necessary, subsubparagraphs are desig- Table NB-3132-1, for example ANSI B16.5-1977. Stan-
nated by adding Arabic numerals in parentheses to the dards published by the American Society of Mechanical
subparagraph designation, such as NB-2121(a)(1). Engineers are available from ASME, 22 Law Drive, Box
2300, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2300.
(3) Dimensional and other types of standards cov-
ering products such as valves, flanges, and fittings are also
9 REFERENCES
published by the Manufacturers Standardization Society of
References used within Section III generally fall into the Valve and Fittings Industry and are known as Standard
one of the following four categories. Practices. When a product is required by these rules to
(a) References to Other Portions of Section III. When conform to a Standard Practice, for example MSS SP-
a reference is made to another Article, Subarticle, or para- 6, the Standard Practice referred to is published by the
graph, all numbers subsidiary to that reference shall be Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
included. For example, reference to NB-3000 includes all Fittings Industry, 127 Park Street, N.E., Vienna, VA 22180.
material in Article NB-3000; reference to NB-3200 The applicable year of issue of such a Standard Practice
includes all material in Subarticle NB-3200; reference to is that suffixed to its numerical designation in Table NB-
NB-3230 includes all paragraphs NB-3231 through 3132-1, for example MSS SP-6-1963.
NB-3236. (4) Specifications for welding and brazing materials
(b) References to Other Sections. Other Sections are published by the American Welding Society, 550 N.W.
referred to in Section III are the following: LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33135. Specifications of this
(1) Section II, Materials. When a requirement for a type are incorporated in Section II and are identified by
material, or for the examination or testing of a material, the AWS designation with the prefix “SF,” for example
is to be in accordance with a specification such as SA-105, SFA-5.1.
SA-370, or SB-160, the reference is to material specifica- (5) Standards applicable to the design and construc-
tions in Section II. These references begin with the letter tion of tanks and flanges are published by the American
“S.” Petroleum Institute and have designations such as API-620
(2) Section V, Nondestructive Examination. Section and API-2000. When documents so designated are referred
V references begin with the letter “T” and relate to the to in Section III, they are standards published by the Ameri-
nondestructive examination of material or welds. can Petroleum Institute.
(3) Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. (d) References to Appendices. Two types of Appendices
Section IX references begin with the letter “Q” and relate are used in Section III and are designated Mandatory and
to welding and brazing requirements. Nonmandatory.
(4) Section XI, Rules for Inservice Inspection of (1) Mandatory Appendices contain requirements
Nuclear Power Plant Components. When a reference is which must be followed in construction; such references
made to inservice inspection, the rules of Section XI shall are designated by a Roman numeral followed by Arabic
apply. numerals. References to II-1100 or XI-3212, for example,
relate to the Mandatory Appendices.
(c) Reference to Specifications and Standards Other
(2) Nonmandatory Appendices provide information
Than Published in Code Sections
or guidance for the use of Section III; such references are
(1) Specifications for examination methods and
designated by a capital letter followed by Arabic numerals.
acceptance standards to be used in connection with them
A reference to D-1100, for example, relates to a Nonmanda-
are published by the American Society for Testing and
tory Appendix.
Materials. At the time of publication of Section III, some
such specifications were not included in Section II of this 1
The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) was formerly
Code. A reference to ASTM E 71-64 refers to the specifica- known as the American Standards Association. Standards approved by
the Association were designated by the prefix “ASA” followed by the
tion so designated by and published by ASTM, 100 Barr number of the standard and the year of publication. More recently, the
Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428. American National Standards Institute was known as the United States
(2) Dimensional standards covering products such as of America Standards Institute. Standards were designated by the prefix
“USAS” followed by the number of the standard and the year of publica-
valves, flanges, and fittings are sponsored and published tion. While the letters of the prefix have changed with the name of the
by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers and organization, the numbers of the standards have remained unchanged.
xxviii --``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

2007 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NF
ARTICLE NF-1000
INTRODUCTION
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-1100 SCOPE AND GENERAL (1) The material of the exempt items shall be selected
REQUIREMENTS to tolerate the environmental conditions to which they will
be exposed, such as temperature, fluids, humidity, and
NF-1110 ASPECTS OF CONSTRUCTION
irradiation.
COVERED BY THESE RULES
(2) The exempt item shall be designed for the loading
(a) Subsection NF contains rules for the material, conditions and other requirements identified in the Design
design, fabrication, examination, installation, and prepara- Specification.
tion of certification documents (Certificate of Compliance (3) Design Output Documents (NCA-3550) shall
and NS-1 Certificate of Conformance) for supports for indicate items that are exempt.
components and piping which are intended to conform to (4) Materials, fabrication, and installation of the
the requirements for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC construction exempt items shall comply with Design Output Documents.
as set forth in Subsections NB, NC, ND, and NE, respec- (5) Class 1 springs shall be inspected in accordance
tively, of this Section. with NF-2520.
(b) They do not cover deterioration that may occur in (6) Washers shall comply with the requirements of
service as a result of corrosion, erosion, radiation effects, NF-4700.
or metallurgical instability of the materials (NCA-1130). (7) Wire rope shall comply with the requirements of
(c) Nuclear power plant supports for which the rules NF-2530 and Article NF-3000.
are specified in this Subsection are those metal elements (8) Compression spring end plates shall comply with
which transmit loads between components (NCA-1210), the requirements of Articles NF-3000, NF-4000, NF-5000,
including piping systems, and intervening elements and and NF-8000.
the building structure. However, the term supports does (9) Compression dynamic stops shall comply with
not encompass a structural element the sole function of the requirements of Articles NF-3000, NF-4000, NF-5000,
which is to carry dynamic loads caused by a postulated and NF-8000.
loss of pressure retaining integrity. (10) Thread locking devices shall comply with the
(d) The Owner shall be responsible for assuring the requirements of NF-4725.1.
adequacy of the building structure and all intervening ele-
ments in the support load path in accordance with the
requirements of NCA-3240 and NCA-3250. To the extent NF-1120 RULES FOR SUPPORTS AND THEIR
necessary, the support designer shall consider the structural CLASSIFICATION
interaction with intervening elements and the building
NF-1121 Rules for Supports
structure.
(e) Except for the requirements listed in NF-1110(e)(1) The rules of Subsection NF provide requirements for
through (e)(10), the requirements of Subsection NF do not new construction and include consideration of mechanical
apply to bearings, bushings, gaskets, hydraulic fluids, seals, stresses and effects which result from the constraint of
shims, slide plates, retaining rings, wear shoes, springs, free-end displacements and anchor point motions defined
washers, wire rope, compression spring end plates, thread in NF-3121.12 and NF-3121.13, but not thermal or peak
locking devices, cotter pins, sight glass assemblies, spring stresses.
hanger travel and hydro stops, nameplates, nameplate
attachment devices, or for compression dynamic stops used
NF-1122 Classification of Supports
as stops1 for seismic and other dynamic loads that are
designed primarily for compressive loading and are not Supports shall be constructed to the requirements of this
connected to the support or pressure boundary. Subsection that are applicable to the class of the compo-
nent, including piping system, they are intended to support.
1
Stops do not include snubbers (NF-3412.4). Supports may be optionally classified as permitted in
1
NCA-2134. When the components are optionally classified intervening elements shall fall within the jurisdiction of
to a higher class as permitted in NCA-2134(d), the support this Subsection.
need not be classified to the higher class.
NF-1130 BOUNDARIES OF JURISDICTION NF-1200 TYPES OF SUPPORTS AND

NF-1131 Boundary Between Components and ATTACHMENTS
Supports NF-1210 TYPES OF SUPPORTS
The jurisdictional boundary between components, NF-1211 General Requirements
including piping systems, and supports shall meet the
In this Subsection all supports are categorized into three
requirements of NB-1132, NC-1132, ND-1132, or
separate types based on the general design procedure used
NE-1132 as applicable to the class of component.
for analysis of the support (NF-3140). Requirements for
materials, design, fabrication, and examination for each of
NF-1132 Boundary Between Supports and the the three types are provided in the following Articles of this
Building Structure Subsection. These support types are defined in NF-1212
(a) Supports may bear on or may be welded, bolted, through NF-1215.
pinned, or clamped to the building structure. Typical exam-
ples of jurisdictional boundaries defined between supports NF-1212 Plate and Shell Type Supports
and building structures are shown in Figs. NF-1132-1 and
NF-1132-2. A Plate and Shell Type Support is a support such as a
(b) The jurisdictional boundary between a support and skirt or saddle which is fabricated from plate and shell
the load carrying building structure is the surface of the elements and is normally subjected to a biaxial stress field.
building structure.
(c) For the purpose of defining the jurisdictional bound- NF-1213 Linear Type Support
ary between a support and the building structure, structural
members shown on the civil /structural drawings of the A Linear Type Support is defined as acting under essen-
plant and considered in the building structural analysis tially a single component of direct stress. Such elements
may be designated building structure even though located may also be subjected to shear stresses. Examples of such
in the support load path. However, structural members, structural elements are tension and compression struts,
except as defined in NF-1132(d), detailed on support draw- beams and columns subjected to bending, trusses, frames,
ings which are installed and used for the primary purpose rings, arches, and cables. Energy absorbing parts designed
of supporting piping or components shall be designated to dissipate energy by yielding and which are incorporated
supports and be constructed to the rules of this Subsection. into a linear type piping support shall be constructed in
(d) Surface mounted base plates, with or without accordance with Appendix NF-III.
grouting; fully or partially embedded steel elements
intended to receive loads transmitted by supports; concrete NF-1214 Standard Supports
anchors; and holddown bolts, nuts, and washers shall be
designated building structure. Typical Standard Supports are described in MSS SP-
(e) If the means by which the support is connected to 58, Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials, Design, and
the building structure is a weld, the weld shall fall within Manufacture, which was developed and approved by the
the jurisdiction of this Subsection. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
(f) Attachments to supports are nonstructural and Fittings Industry. Typical catalog items are shown in Fig.
NF-1214-1. The capacities of standard supports may be
(1) not in the support load path
determined using plate and shell analysis or linear (working
(2) may be permanent or temporary
stress) analysis or load rating. Examples of standard sup-
ports are
NF-1133 Boundary Between Supports and (a) rigid supports consisting of anchors, guides,
Intervening Elements restraints, rolling or sliding supports, and rod-type hangers
The jurisdictional boundary between supports and (b) constant and variable type spring hangers
intervening elements in the support load path is the surface (c) snubbers
of the intervening elements. Supports may bear on or may (d) sway braces and vibration dampeners
be welded, bolted, pinned, or clamped to intervening ele- (e) structural attachments such as ears, shoes, lugs,
ments. The means by which supports are connected to rings, clamps, slings, straps, and clevises
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
FIG. NF-1132-1 TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF JURISDICTIONAL BOUNDARIES BETWEEN PIPING SUPPORTS AND
THE BUILDING STRUCTURE
GENERAL NOTE:
These sketches are intended to show jurisdictional concepts and should not be considered as recommended configurations.
3
07 FIG. NF-1132-1 TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF JURISDICTIONAL BOUNDARIES BETWEEN PIPING SUPPORTS AND
THE BUILDING STRUCTURE (CONT’D)
GENERAL NOTE: These sketches are intended to show jurisdictional concepts and should not be considered as recommended configurations.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 4
FIG. NF-1132-1 TYPICAL EXAMPLES OF JURISDICTIONAL BOUNDARIES BETWEEN PIPING SUPPORTS AND
THE BUILDING STRUCTURE (CONT’D)
5
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

FIG. NF-1132-2 TYPICAL EXAMPLE OF JURISDICTIONAL BOUNDARY BETWEEN COMPONENT SUPPORT

AND THE BUILDING STRUCTURE
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 6
FIG. NF-1214-1 TYPICAL STANDARD SUPPORT UNITS 07
Threaded
Rod
Welded Steel
Threaded Attachment Steel Weldless
Steel Clevis Eye Bolt
Rod
With Fastener Turnbuckle
Plate
Angles Steel Pipe Steel Double Steel
Lug Clamp Bolt Pipe Pipe Clamp
Clamp
Riser Clamp Sliding U-Bolt

Surface
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Spring Sway Brace
Variable Spring
Base Support
Variable
Spring Hanger
Snubber
Constant Support
Horizontal Type Constant Support
Vertical Type
7
NF-1215 Primary and Secondary Members in excess of 50% of the allowable stress permitted in the
tables of Section II, Part D, Subparts 1 and 2, NF-3300,
Support members are also categorized as primary or and applicable Code Cases.
secondary according to function. These member types are
defined in the following paragraphs.
NF-1230 WELDING BETWEEN TYPES OF
(a) Primary Members. Primary members of supports
SUPPORTS
are defined as those members designed to carry loads under
any postulated load condition. NF-1231 Welded Joints Between Plate and Shell
(b) Secondary Members. Secondary members are Type and Linear Type Supports
defined as those members typically used as bracing to Welded joints between Plate and Shell Type Supports
maintain primary member system geometry, and which (NF-1212), and Linear Type Supports (NF-1213) shall
under all loading conditions, are not designed to sustain meet the rules of either Plate and Shell Type or Linear
any significant stress. Significant stress is defined as being Type welded joints of this Subsection.
8
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

ARTICLE NF-2000
MATERIAL
NF-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR II, Part C, except as otherwise permitted in Section IX,
MATERIAL and shall also comply with the applicable requirements of
this Article. The requirements of this Article do not apply
NF-2110 SCOPE OF PRINCIPAL TERMS to materials used as backing rings or backing strips in
EMPLOYED welded joints.
(a) The term material as used in this Subsection is
defined in NCA-9000. The term Material Organization
(Metallic) is defined in NCA-9000. NF-2122 Special Requirements Conflicting With
(b) The requirements of this Article make reference to Permitted Material Specifications
the term thickness. For the purpose intended, the following (a) Special requirements stipulated in this Article shall
definitions of nominal thickness apply: apply in lieu of the requirements of the material specifica-
(1) plate: the thickness is the dimension of the short tions wherever the special requirements conflict with the
transverse direction. material specification requirements [NCA-3856.3(d)].
(2) forgings: the thickness is the dimension defined Where the special requirements include an examination,
as follows: test, or treatment which is also required by the material
(a) hollow forgings: the nominal thickness is mea- specification, the examination, test, or treatment need be
sured between the inside and outside surfaces (radial performed only once. Required nondestructive examina-
thickness). tions shall be performed as specified for each product form
(b) disk forgings (axial length less than the outside in NF-2500. Any examination, repair, test, or treatment
diameter): the nominal thickness is the axial length. required by the material specification or by this Article
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(c) flat ring forgings (axial length less than the may be performed by the Material Organization or the
radial thickness): for axial length ≤ 2 in. (50 mm), the Certificate Holder, as provided in NF-4121.1. Pipe or tube
axial length is the nominal thickness. For axial length > 2 material used under the rules of this Subsection need not
in. (50 mm), the radial thickness is the nominal thickness. be hydrostatically or pneumatically tested, provided these
(d) rectangular solid forgings: the least rectangular materials are not used in a pressure retaining function.
dimension is the nominal thickness. (b) Copper and copper-based alloys shall not be used
(3) castings: thickness, t, is defined as the largest for structural members.
nominal thickness of the load carrying portion of the (c) The stress rupture test of SA-453 and SA-638 for
casting. Grade 660 (UNS S66286) is not required for design temper-
atures of 800°F (427°C) and below.
NF-2120 SUPPORT MATERIAL
NF-2121 Permitted Material Specifications NF-2124 Size Ranges
(a) Except as provided in NF-2121(b), material for sup- Material outside the limits of size or thickness given in
ports shall conform to the requirements of the specifications any specification in Section II may be used if the material
for material listed in the tables of Section II, Part D, includ- is in compliance with the other requirements of the specifi-
ing all applicable footnotes in the table, applicable to the cation and no size limitation is given in the rules for con-
Class of construction, as indicated in Table NF-2121(a)-1. struction. In those specifications in which chemical
(b) The requirements of Article NF-2000 do not apply composition or mechanical properties are indicated to vary
to exempt items as indicated in NF-1110(e). Certificates of with size or thickness, any material outside the specification
Compliance (NF-2130) are not required for exempt items. range shall be required to conform to the composition and
(c) Welding and brazing material used in manufacture mechanical properties shown for the nearest specified range
of items shall comply with an SFA Specification in Section [NCA-3856.3(d)].
9
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
07 TABLE NF-2121(a)-1
MATERIAL TABLES REQUIRED FOR SUPPORTS
Design Stress Allowable Yield Strength Tensile Strength
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS

Type and Intensity Values Stress Values Values Values
Class Sm S Sy Su
Plate and shell
Class 1 ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Class 2 and MC ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺
Class 3 ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺
Bolting (all classes) ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺
Linear
Class 1 ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺

Class 2 and MC ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺
Class 3 ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺
10
Bolting (all classes) ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- ----------------- 嘺
Standard support
Class 1 ----------------- 嘺 Plate and ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- 嘺

Class 2 ----------------- shell ----------------- 嘺 Plate and ----------------- 嘺 Linear ----------------- 嘺 All types
Class 3 ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- shell ----------------- -----------------
嘺嘺嘺
Bolting (all classes) ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------------- 嘺 ----------------- 嘺
Applicable Tables Tables 2A Tables 1A Table 4 [Note (1)] All Classes Table U All Classes
Not for Resale, 01/24/2008 16:12:15 MST

2B Cl.1
冧 1B Cl.2, Cl.3, and MC
冧 T
Table Y-1
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Table Y-2 provides permanent strain limiting factor for plate- and shell-type supports.
(b) Tables TE and TM provide values of the coefficient of thermal expansion and modulus of elasticity, respectively.
NOTE:
(1) Multiply tabulated values by 3 to arrive at Sy values. Round up to the next higher 0.5 ksi (3.5 MPa).
Licensee=Fluor Corp no FPPPV per administrator /2110503106, User=Mendez, Fernan

NF-2130 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIAL be controlled during the repair of material and the manufac-
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ture and installation of supports so that it is identifiable as

(a) Material used in the construction of supports shall
acceptable material until the material is actually consumed
be certified. Certified Material Test Reports in accordance
in the process (NF-4122).
with NCA-3862 shall be provided for material used for
primary members for Class 1 Plate and Shell Type Sup-
ports, and Class 1 Linear Type Supports. Material for other NF-2160 DETERIORATION OF MATERIAL IN
Classes of supports and all Classes of Standard Supports SERVICE
shall be provided with Certified Material Test Reports Consideration of deterioration of material caused by ser-
when impact testing is required (NF-2311). Copies of these vice is generally outside the scope of this Subsection. It
certificates shall be provided with the support. is the responsibility of the Owner to select material suitable
(b) Certificates of Compliance with the material speci- for the conditions stated in the Design Specifications
fication, grade, class, and heat treated condition, as applica- (NCA-3250), with specific attention being given to the
ble, or Certified Material Test Reports shall be provided effect of Service Conditions upon the properties of the
by the Material Organization for material for all other material.
supports, Standard Supports, and secondary members of
all types and Classes of supports.
NF-2170 HEAT TREATMENT TO ENHANCE
(c) When Design Documents, such as the Design Report
IMPACT PROPERTIES
or Load Capacity Data Sheet, permit the use of alternative
materials for which certificates of compliance are permit- Carbon steel, low alloy steels, and high alloy chromium
ted, the alternative materials may be documented in the (Series 4XX) steels may be heat treated by quenching and
Design Documents or the documentation for the support tempering to enhance their impact properties. Postweld
in lieu of documenting the specific material used. The heat treatment of the support at a temperature of not less
requirements of NF-2150 for identification of materials than 1,100°F (595°C) may be considered to be the temper-
shall apply. ing phase of the heat treatment.
(d) When material Certificates of Compliance are per-
mitted, the support manufacturer shall transmit copies of NF-2180 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT
the material Certificates of Compliance applicable to each TREATMENT OF MATERIAL
support. Alternatively, he shall execute and furnish a single
When heat treating temperature or time is required by
document certifying a listing of all material specifications
the material specification and the rules of this Subsection,
involved in the shipment. When a single document is fur-
the heat treating shall be performed in temperature-sur-
nished, his quality program shall provide for his retention
veyed and -calibrated furnaces or the heat treating shall
of the material Certificates of Compliance for each of the
be controlled by measurement of material temperature ther-
materials incorporated into the supports.
mocouples in contact with the material or attached to blocks
in contact with the material or by calibrated pyrometric
NF-2140 WELDING MATERIAL instruments. Heat treating shall be performed under furnace
loading conditions such that the heat treatment is in accor-
For the requirements governing the material to be used dance with the material specification and the rules of this
for welding, see NF-2400. Subsection.
NF-2150 MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION NF-2200 MATERIAL TEST COUPONS AND

SPECIMENS FOR FERRITIC
The identification of material requiring Certified Mate-
STEEL MATERIAL
rial Test Reports shall meet the requirements of NCA-3856.
Material furnished by a Material Organization with Cer- NF-2210 HEAT TREATMENT
tificates of Compliance shall be identified by a controlled REQUIREMENTS
system meeting the requirements of the applicable material NF-2211 Test Coupon Heat Treatment for
specification, grade, and class. Identification of the material Ferritic Material1
to the Material Organization’s Certificate of Compliance If ferritic steel material is subjected to heat treatment
is not required after the support manufacturer has verified during construction of a support, the material used for the
that the material meets the requirements of this Section.
1
Material for small items shall be controlled during the Any postweld heat treatment time which is anticipated to be applied
to the material or item after it is completed shall be specified in the
manufacture of the supports so that they are identifiable Design Specifications. The Certificate Holder shall include this time in
as acceptable material at all times. Welding material shall the total time at temperature specified to be applied to the test specimens.
11
impact test specimens shall be heat treated in the same (3) using thermal barriers or insulation at the edge
manner as the support, except that test coupons and speci- where specimens are to be removed
mens for P-No. 1 Group Nos. 1 and 2 material with a
nominal thickness of 2 in. (50 mm) or less are not required It shall be demonstrated (and this information shall be
to be so heat treated. The support manufacturer shall pro- included in the Certified Material Test Report) that the
vide the Material Organization with the temperature and cooling rates are equivalent to NF-2212.2(a) or (b).
heating and cooling rate to be used. In the case of postweld
heat treatment, the total time at temperature or temperatures
for the test material shall be at least 80% of the total time NF-2220 PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING
at temperature or temperatures during actual postweld heat TEST COUPONS AND
treatment of the material, and the total time at temperature SPECIMENS FOR QUENCHED
or temperatures for the test material, coupon, or specimen AND TEMPERED MATERIAL
may be performed in a single cycle. NF-2221 General Requirements
The procedure for obtaining impact test specimens for
NF-2212 Test Coupon Heat Treatment for quenched and tempered material is related to the product
Quenched and Tempered Material form. Coupon and specimen location shall be as required by
NF-2212.1 Cooling Rates. When ferritic steel material the material specification, except as stated in the following
is subjected to quenching from the austenitizing tempera- paragraphs of this Subarticle. References to dimensions
ture, the test coupons representing those materials shall be signify nominal values.
cooled at a rate similar to and no faster than the main body
of the material except in the case of certain forgings and NF-2222 Plates
castings (NF-2223.3 and NF-2226.4). This rule shall apply NF-2222.1 Number of Tension Test Coupons. The 07
for coupons taken directly from the material as well as for number of tension test coupons required shall be in accor-
separate test coupons representing the material, and one dance with the material specification and with SA-20,
of the general procedures described in NF-2212.2 or one except that from carbon steel plates weighing 42,000 lb
of the specific procedures described in NF-2220 shall be (19 000 kg) and over and alloy steel plates weighing 40,000
used for each product form. lb (18 000 kg) and over, two tension test coupons shall be
NF-2212.2 General Procedures. One of the general taken, one representing the top end of the plate and one
procedures in NF-2212.2(a), (b), and (c) may be applied representing the bottom end of the plate.
to quenched and tempered material or test coupons repre- NF-2222.2 Orientation and Location of Coupons.
senting the material, provided the specimens are taken Coupons shall be taken so that specimens shall have their
relative to the surface of the product in accordance with longitudinal axes at least 1⁄4t from a rolled surface and with
NF-2220. Further specific details of the methods to be used the midlength of the specimen at least t from any heat
shall be the obligation of the Material Organization and treated edge, where t is the nominal thickness of the mate-
the Certificate Holder. rial. The orientation of the coupons shall be as specified
(a) Any procedure may be used which can be demon- in the material specification.
strated to produce a cooling rate in the test material that
matches the cooling rate of the main body of the product NF-2222.3 Requirements for Separate Test Cou-
within 25°F (14°C) and 20 sec at all temperatures after pons. Where a separate test coupon is used to represent
cooling begins. the support material, it shall be of sufficient size to ensure
(b) If cooling rate data for the material and cooling rate that the cooling rate of the region from which the test
control devices for the test specimens are available, the coupons are removed represents the cooling rate of the
test specimens may be heat treated in the device to represent material at least 1⁄4t deep and t from any edge of the product.
Unless cooling rates applicable to the bulk pieces or product
the material, provided that the provisions of NF-2212.2(a)
are simulated in accordance with NF-2212.2(b), the dimen-
are met.
sions of the coupon shall not be less than 3t ⴛ 3t ⴛ t,
(c) When any of the specific procedures described in
where t is the nominal material thickness.
NF-2220 are used, faster cooling rates at the edges may
be compensated for by
(1) taking the test specimens at least t from a NF-2223 Forgings
quenched edge, where t equals the material thickness NF-2223.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be
(2) attaching a steel pad at least t wide by a partial taken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes
penetration weld (which completely seals the buffered sur- at least 1⁄4t from any surface and with the midlength of the
face) to the edge where specimens are to be removed or specimens at least t from any second surface, where t is
12
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

the maximum heat treated thickness. A thermal buffer as specification, the Inspector shall have the option of wit-
described in NF-2212.2(c) may be used to achieve these nessing the selection, placing an identifying stamping on
conditions, unless cooling rates applicable to the bulk forg- them, and witnessing the testing of these specimens.
ings are simulated as otherwise provided in NF-2212.2.
NF-2223.2 Very Thick and Complex Forgings. Test NF-2224 Bars and Bolting Material 07
coupons for forgings that are both very thick and complex, NF-2224.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be
such as trunnions, support forgings, flanges, and other com- taken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes
plex forgings that are contour shaped or machined to essen- at least 1⁄4t from the outside or rolled surface and with the
tially the finished product configuration prior to heat midlength of the specimens at least t from a heat treated
treatment, may be removed from prolongations or other end, where t is either the bar diameter or thickness.
stock provided on the product. The Certificate Holder shall NF-2224.2 Bolting Material. For bolting material, the
specify the surfaces of the finished product subjected to coupons shall be taken in conformance with the applicable
high tensile stresses in service. The coupons shall be taken material specification and with the midlength of the speci-
so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at a men at least one diameter or thickness from a heat treated
distance below the nearest heat-treated surface, equivalent end. When the studs, nuts, or bolts are not of sufficient
to at least the greatest distance that the indicated high length, the midlength of the specimen shall be at the mid-
tensile stress surface will be from the nearest surface during length of the studs, nuts, or bolts. The studs, nuts, or bolts
heat treatment, and with the midlength of the specimens selected to provide test coupon material shall be identical
a minimum of twice this distance from a second heat- with respect to the quenched contour and size, except for
treated surface. In any case, the longitudinal axes of the length, which shall equal or exceed the length of the repre-
specimens shall not be nearer than 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) to any sented studs, nuts, or bolts.
heat-treated surface and the midlength of the specimens
shall be at least 11⁄2 in. (38 mm) from any heat-treated NF-2225 Tubular Products and Fittings
surface.
NF-2225.1 Location of Coupons. Coupons shall be
NF-2223.3 Coupons From Separately Produced Test taken so that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes
Forgings. Test coupons representing forgings from one at least 1⁄4t from the inside or outside surface and with the
heat and one heat treatment lot may be taken from a sepa- midlength of the specimens at least t from a heat treated
rately forged piece under the conditions given in end, where t is the nominal wall thickness of the tubular
NF-2223.3(a) through (e). product.
(a) The separate test forging shall be of the same heat NF-2225.2 Separately Produced Coupons Repre-
of material and shall be subjected to substantially the same senting Fittings. Separately produced test coupons repre-
reduction and working as the production forging it representing fittings may be used. When separately produced
sents. coupons are used, the requirements of NF-2223.3 shall
(b) The separate test forging shall be heat treated in the be met.
same furnace charge and under the same conditions as the
production forging. NF-2226 Castings
(c) The separate test forging shall be of the same nomi- NF-2226.1 Castings With 2 in. (50 mm) Maximum
nal thickness as the production forging. Thickness and Less. For castings with a maximum thick-
(d) Test coupons for simple forgings shall be taken so ness of 2 in. (50 mm) and less, the specimens shall be
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at the taken from either the standard separately cast coupons or
region midway between midthickness and the surface and the casting, in accordance with the material specification.
with the midlength of the specimens no nearer to any heat
NF-2226.2 Castings With Thicknesses Exceeding 2
treated edge than a distance equal to the forging thickness,
in. (50 mm) Maximum Thickness. For castings exceeding
except when the thickness–length ratio of the production
a thickness of 2 in. (50 mm), the coupons shall be taken
forging does not permit, in which case a production forging
from the casting (or an extension of it) so that specimens
shall be used as the test forging and the midlength of the
shall have their longitudinal axes at least 1⁄4t of the maxi-
specimens shall be at the midlength of the test forgings.
mum heat treated thickness from any surface and with the
(e) Test coupons for complex forgings shall be taken midlength of the specimens at least t from any second
in accordance with NF-2223.2. surface. A thermal buffer may be used [NF-2212.2(c)(3)].
NF-2223.4 Test Specimens for Forgings. When test NF-2226.3 Separately Cast Test Coupons for Cast-
specimens for forgings are to be taken under the applicable ings With Thicknesses Exceeding 2 in. (50 mm). In lieu
13
of the requirements of NF-2226.2, separately cast test cou- (1) Attachments to the component or piping shall
pons may be used under the conditions of NF-2226.3(a) meet the requirements for impact testing stipulated in the
through (c). applicable Subsection.
(a) The separate test coupon representing castings from (2) Class 1, 2, 3, and MC component supports shall
one heat and one heat treated lot shall be of the same heat meet the requirements of NF-2300.
of material and shall be subjected to substantially the same (3) For Class 1, 2, and 3 piping supports, Class 1, 2,
foundry practices as the production casting it represents. and 3 Standard Supports, and all other types and Classes
(b) The separate test coupon shall be heat treated in the of supports, the Design Specification (NCA-3250) shall
same furnace charge and under the same conditions as the state whether or not impact testing is required for the
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
production casting, unless cooling rates applicable to the material of which the support is constructed. When impact
bulk castings are simulated in accordance with NF-2212.2. testing is required, the tests shall meet the requirements of
(c) The separate test coupon shall not be less than 3t NF-2300 for Class 1, 2, 3, or MC, respectively and shall
ⴛ 3t ⴛ t, where t equals the nominal thickness of the become a requirement of this Subsection.
casting. Test specimens shall be taken with their longitudi- (b) The requirements for supports shall be as specified
nal axes at the region midway between midthickness and
in NF-2300, except that the materials described in
the surface and with the midlength of the specimens no
NF-2311(b)(1) through (b)(13) are not to be impact tested
nearer any heat treated edge than a distance equal to the
as a requirement of this Subsection.
casting thickness.
(1) Material with a nominal section thickness of 5⁄8 07
NF-2226.4 Castings Machined or Cast to Finished in. (16 mm) and less.
Configuration Before Heat Treatment. In lieu of the (2) Bolting, including studs, nuts, and bolts, with a
requirements of NF-2226.1, NF-2226.2, or NF-2226.3, test nominal size of 1 in. (25 mm) and less.
coupons may be removed from prolongations or other stock
(3) Bars with a nominal cross-sectional area of 1 in2
provided on the product. The coupons shall be taken so
(650 mm2) and less.
that specimens shall have their longitudinal axes at a dis-
tance below the nearest heat-treated surface equivalent at (4) Material for fittings with all pipe connections of
5
least to the greatest distance that the indicated high tensile ⁄8 in. (16 mm) nominal wall thickness and less.
stress surface will be from the nearest surface during heat (5) Austenitic stainless steels, including precipita-
treatment and with the midlength of the specimens a mini- tion-hardened austenitic Grade 660 (UNS S66286).
mum of twice this distance from a second heat-treated (6) Nonferrous materials.
surface. In any case, the longitudinal axes of the specimens (7) Material for supports when the maximum stress
shall be at least 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) from any heat-treated does not exceed 6,000 psi (40 MPa) tension or is com-
surface and the midlength of the specimens shall be at pressive.
least 11⁄2 in. (38 mm) from any second heat-treated surface. (8) Rolled structural shapes, when the thickness of a
The Certificate Holder shall specify the surfaces of the flange is 5⁄8 in. (16 mm) or less.
finished product subjected to high tensile stresses in (9) Materials for Class 1, 2, or MC supports, listed
service. in Table NF-2311(b)-1, for thicknesses 21⁄2 in. (64 mm)
and less when the Lowest Service Temperature3 is at least
NF-2227 Rolled Shapes 30°F (15°C) above the tabulated temperature. This exemp-
For rolled shapes, the coupons shall be taken so that tion from impact testing does not apply to either the weld
specimens shall have their longitudinal axes on a line repre- metal (NF-2430) or the weld procedure qualification
senting the center of the thickest element of the shape and (NF-4335).
with the midlength of the specimen at least t from a heat (10) Materials for Class 3 supports, listed in Table
treated end. NF-2311(b)-1, for thicknesses 21⁄2 in. (64 mm) and less,
when the Lowest Service Temperature is equal to or greater
NF-2300 FRACTURE TOUGHNESS than the tabulated temperature. This exemption from
REQUIREMENTS FOR impact testing does not apply to either the weld metal
MATERIAL (NF-2430) or the weld procedure qualification (NF-4335).
NF-2310 MATERIAL TO BE IMPACT TESTED (11) Materials for Class 2 and MC supports for which
NF-2311 Supports for Which Impact Testing of the Lowest Service Temperature exceeds 150°F (65°C).
Material Is Required2
(a) Support materials shall be impact tested in accor- 3
Lowest Service Temperature (LST) is the minimum temperature
dance with the requirements listed below. which will be maintained inside the containment vessel during the plant
operation (for supports within containment), or alternatively, the calcu-
2
When impact testing is required, the methods of Appendix G (Section lated or measured minimum metal temperature of the support expected
III, Division 1, Appendices) may be used as an alternative design proce- during normal operation when the pressure within the component exceeds
dure for assuring protection against nonductile fracture. 20% of the system hydrostatic test pressure.
14
07 TABLE NF-2311(b)-1 NF-2322 Location and Orientation of Test

EXEMPTIONS FROM IMPACT TESTING UNDER Specimens
NF-2311(b)(9) AND (10) FOR MATERIAL
THICKNESS TO 21⁄2 in. (64 mm), INCLUSIVE Impact test specimens for quenched and tempered mate-
Material rial shall be removed from the locations and orientation
Material Condition TNDT, °F (°C) specified for tensile test specimens in each product form
[Note (1)] [Note (1)] [Notes (2), (3)] in NF-2220 except that for plates the orientation of the
SA-537, Class 1 N −30 (−35)
impact test specimens shall be longitudinal. For material
SA-516, Grade 70 Q& T −10 (−25) in other heat treated conditions, impact test specimens shall
SA-516, Grade 70 N 0 (−18) be removed from the locations and orientations specified
SA-508, Class 1 Q& T +10 (−10) for tensile test specimens in the material specification
SA-533, Grade B Q& T +10 (−10) except that for plates the orientation of the impact speci-
SA-299 [Note (4)] N +20 (−7)
SA-216, Grades Q& T +30 (0)
mens shall be longitudinal, and for structural shapes the
WCB, WCC location and orientation of the impact test specimens shall
SA-36 (Plate) HR +40 (5) be as specified in ASTM Specification A 673-77. Alterna-
SA-508, Class 2 Q&T +40 (5) tively, the orientation may be in the direction of maximum
stress regardless of heat treatment. For bolting, the Cv
NOTES:
(1) Material Condition letters refer to:
impact test specimens shall be prepared with the longitudi-
N p Normalize nal axis of the specimen located at least one-half radius
Q & T p Quench and Temper or 1 in. (25 mm) below the surface plus the machining
HR p Hot Rolled allowance per side, whichever is less. The fracture plane
(2) These values for TNDT were established from data on heavy section of the specimen shall be at least one diameter or thickness
steel [thickness greater than 21⁄2 in. (64 mm)]. Values for sections
less than 21⁄2 in. (64 mm) thick are held constant until additional from the heat treated end. When the studs, nuts, or bolts
data are obtained. are not of sufficient length, the midlength of the specimen
(3) TNDT p temperature at or above nil-ductility transition temperature shall be at the midlength of the studs, nuts, or bolts. The
(ASTM E 208-91); TNDT is 10°F (5.6°C) below the temperature studs, nuts, or bolts selected to provide test coupon material
at which at least two specimens show no-break performance.
shall be identical with respect to the quenched contour and
(4) Materials made to a fine grain melting practice.
size, except for length, which shall equal or exceed the
length of the represented studs, nuts, or bolts. For all mate-
rial, the number of tests shall be in accordance with
(12) Materials for Class 3 supports for which the NF-2340.
Lowest Service Temperature exceeds 100°F (38°C).
(13) Materials for Class 2, 3, and MC supports for
which the Lowest Service Temperature (LST) is equal or
NF-2330 TEST REQUIREMENTS AND
above the Minimum Design Metal Temperature of Fig.
NF-2311(b)-1 for the materials listed and the applicable ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
material thicknesses. NF-2331 Material (Excluding Bolting)
(c) The Design Specification (NCA-3250) shall state
the Lowest Service Temperature (LST) for the support and When impact testing is required, material (other than
the designated impact test temperature, when required. bolting) shall be tested as required by NF-2331(a) and (b).
(a) Test three Cv specimens at the designated tempera-
ture (NF-2311). All three specimens shall meet one of the
acceptance standards applicable to the specific test method.
NF-2320 IMPACT TEST PROCEDURES
(1) Charpy V-Notch Testing for Lateral Expansion
NF-2321 Charpy V-Notch Tests Values. The test results of the three specimens, collectively
The Charpy V-notch test (Cv), when required, shall be and singly, shall meet the respective requirements of Table
performed in accordance with SA-370. Specimens shall be NF-2331(a)-1 for Class 1, of Table NF-2331(a)-2 for Class
in accordance with SA-370, Fig. 11, Type A. A test shall 2 and MC, and of Table NF-2331(a)-3 for Class 3 supports.
consist of a set of three full-size 10 mm ⴛ 10 mm speci- (2) Charpy V-Notch Testing for Absorbed Energy
mens. The lateral expansion and absorbed energy, as appli- Values. The test results of the three specimens, collectively
cable, and the test temperature, as well as the orientation and singly, shall meet the respective requirements of Table
and location of all tests performed to meet the requirements NF-2331(a)-4 for Class 1, of Fig. NF-2331(a)-1 for Class
of NF-2330 shall be reported in the Certified Material Test 2 and MC, and of Fig. NF-2331(a)-2 for Class 3 supports.
Report. (b) Apply the procedures of NF-2331(a) to
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
15
07 FIG. NF-2311(b)-1 IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION CURVES FOR MATERIALS FOR CLASS 2, 3, AND MC SUPPORTS
(see next page for Notes)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
140 (60)
120 (50)
100 (38)
Minimum Design Metal Temperature, °F (°C)
A*
80 (27)
B*
60 (15)
40 (5)
C
20 (−7)
D
0 (−18)
−20 (−30)
−40 (−40)
−50 (−46)
−60 (−51)
Impact testing required
−80 (−62)
0.625 (16) 1(25) 2 (50) 3 (75) 4 (100) 5 (125) 6 (150)
Nominal Thickness, in. (mm)
[Limited to 4 in. (100 mm) for welded construction]
*See NF-2311(b)(12) for Class 3 lowest service temperature limit
16
FIG. NF-2311(b)-1 IMPACT TEST EXEMPTION CURVES FOR MATERIALS FOR CLASS 2, 3, AND MC SUPPORTS
(CONT’D)
GENERAL NOTES ON ASSIGNMENT OF MATERIALS TO CURVES:

(a) Curve A—all carbon and all low alloy steel plates, structural shapes, and bars not listed in Curves B, C, and D below
(b) Curve B
(1) SA-285 Grades A and B
SA-414 Grade A
SA-442 Grade 55 > 1 in. (25 mm) if not to fine grain practice and normalized
SA-442 Grade 60 if not to fine grain practice and normalized
SA-515 Grades 55 and 60
SA-516 Grades 65 and 70 if not normalized
SA-612 if not normalized
SA-662 Grade B if not normalized
SA-724 if not normalized
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(2) all materials of Curve A if produced to fine grain practice and normalized which are not listed for Curves C and D below;
(3) except for bolting [see (e) below], plates, structural shapes, and bars, all other product forms (such as pipe, fittings, and tubing) not listed
for Curves C and D below
(c) Curve C
(1) SA-182 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
SA-302 Grades C and D
SA-336 Grades F21 and F22 if normalized and tempered
SA-387 Grades 21 and 22 if normalized and tempered
SA-442 Grade 55 ≤ 1 in. (25 mm) if not to fine grain practice and normalized
SA-516 Grades 55 and 60 if not normalized
SA-533 Grades B and C
SA-662 Grade A;
(2) all material of Curve B if produced to fine grain practice and normalized and not listed for Curve D below
(d) Curve D
SA-203
SA-442 if to fine grain practice and normalized
SA-508 Class 1
SA-516 if normalized
SA-524 Classes 1 and 2
SA-537 Classes 1 and 2
(e) For bolting the following impact test exemption temperature shall apply:
Impact Test
Spec. No. Grade Exemption Temperature, °F (°C)
SA-193 B5 −20 (−30)
SA-193 B7 −40 (−40)
SA-193 B7M −50 (−45)
SA-193 B16 −20 (−30)
SA-307 B −20 (−30)

SA-320 L7, L43 Impact tested
SA-325 1 −20 (−30)
SA-354 BB −20 (−30)
SA-354 BC 0 (−18)
SA-354 BD +20 (−7)
SA-449 ... −20 (−30)
17
TABLE NF-2331(a)-1 and qualified by heat treated test specimens, one test shall
REQUIRED Cv LATERAL EXPANSION VALUES be made for each plate as-rolled. The term as-rolled refers
FOR CLASS 1 SUPPORT MATERIAL to the plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot,
OTHER THAN BOLTING not to its heat treated condition.
Nominal Wall Lateral Expansion,
Thickness, in. (mm) mils (mm)
5
⁄8 (16) or less No test required
NF-2342 Forgings and Castings
Over 5⁄8 to 1 (16 to 25), incl. 15 (0.38)
Over 1 (25) 25 (0.64) (a) Where the weight of an individual forging or casting
is less than 1,000 lb (450 kg), one test shall be made to
represent each heat in each heat treatment lot.
TABLE NF-2331(a)-2 (b) When heat treatment is performed in a continuous-
REQUIRED Cv LATERAL EXPANSION VALUES type furnace with suitable temperature controls and
FOR CLASS 2 AND MC SUPPORT MATERIAL equipped with recording pyrometers so that complete heat
OTHER THAN BOLTING treatment records are available, a heat treatment lot shall be
Nominal Wall Lateral Expansion,
considered as the lesser of a continuous run not exceeding 8
Thickness, in. (mm) mils (mm) hr duration or a total weight, so treated, not exceeding
5
2,000 lb (900 kg).
Over 5⁄8 to 1 (16 to 25), incl. 15 (0.38)
(c) One test shall be made for each forging or casting
Over 1 (25) 20 (0.50) of 1,000 to 10,000 lb (450 kg to 4 500 kg) in weight.
(d) As an alternative to NF-2342(c), a separate test forg-
ing or casting may be used to represent forgings or castings
TABLE NF-2331(a)-3 of different sizes in one heat and heat treat lot, provided
REQUIRED Cv LATERAL EXPANSION VALUES FOR the test piece is a representation of the greatest thickness
CLASS 3 SUPPORT MATERIAL OTHER THAN BOLTING in the heat treat lot. In addition, test forgings shall have
Nominal Wall Lateral Expansion, been subjected to substantially the same reduction and
Thickness, in. (mm) mils (mm) working as the forgings represented.
5
(e) Forgings or castings larger than 10,000 lb (4 500
Over 5⁄8 (16) 15 (0.38)
kg) shall have two tests per part for Charpy V-notch. The
location of Cv impact test specimens shall be selected so
that an equal number of specimens is obtained from posi-
tions in the forging or casting 180 deg apart.
(1) base material4
(f) As an alternative to NF-2342(e) for static castings,
(2) the base material, the heat affected zone, and weld
metal from the weld procedure qualification tests of a separately cast test coupon (NF-2226.3) may be used;
NF-4330 one test shall be made for Charpy V-notch.
(3) the weld metal of NF-2431
NF-2343 Bars and Rolled Shapes
NF-2333 Bolting Material
(a) For bars, one test shall be made for each diameter
When impact testing is required, for bolting material
or size greater than 1 in. (25 mm) in each lot, where a lot
including studs, nuts, and bolts, test three Cv specimens at
is defined as one heat of material
the designated temperature. All three specimens shall meet
(1) as-rolled in one continuous operation or
the requirements of Table NF-2333-1.
(2) heat treated in one charge, or each 6,000 lb (2 700
kg) or less from one continuous operation
NF-2340 NUMBER OF IMPACT TESTS (b) For rolled shapes, the frequency of testing shall be
REQUIRED one test (a set of three specimens) for at least each 15 tons
NF-2341 Plates (14 000 kg) or each single length of 15 tons (14 000 kg)
or more, of the same nominal shape size, excluding length,
One test shall be made from each plate as heat treated. for each heat in the as-rolled condition. If the shapes are
Where plates are furnished in the unheat-treated condition heat treated, one test shall be taken from each heat of each
4
nominal shape size, excluding length, in each furnace lot.
The requirements for impact testing of the heat-affected zone (NF-
4335.2) may result in reduced test temperatures or increased toughness For shapes heat treated in a continuous furnace, a lot shall
requirements for the base material. not exceed 15 tons (14 000 kg).
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 18
TABLE NF-2331(a)-4
REQUIRED Cv ENERGY VALUES FOR CLASS 1 SUPPORT MATERIAL OTHER THAN BOLTING
Customary Units
Energy, ft-lb for Base Materials of Specified Minimum Yield Strength, ksi
Over 55 ksi to 75 ksi, Over 75 ksi to 105 ksi,
55 ksi or Below Incl. Incl.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Average Lowest Average Lowest Average Lowest

Nominal Wall Thickness, in. of 3 1 of 3 of 3 1 of 3 of 3 1 of 3
5
⁄8 or less [Note (1)] ... ... ... ... ... ...
Over 5⁄8 to 1, incl. [Note (2)] 15 10 20 15 25 20
Over 1 [Note (2)] 25 20 30 25 35 30
SI Units
Energy, J for Base Materials of Specified Minimum Yield Strength, MPa
Over 380 MPa to Over 515 MPa to
380 MPa or Below 515 MPa, Incl. 725 MPa, Incl.
Average Lowest Average Lowest Average Lowest
Nominal Wall Thickness, mm of 3 1 of 3 of 3 1 of 3 of 3 1 of 3
16 or less [Note (1)] ... ... ... ... ... ...

Over 16 to 25, incl. [Note(2)] 20 14 27 20 34 27
Over 25 [Note (2)] 34 27 41 34 47 41
NOTES:
(1) No test required.
(2) Where weld metal tests of NF-2400 are made to these requirements, the impact energy shall conform to the requirements of either of the
base materials being joined.
NF-2344 Tubular Products and Fittings NF-2350 RETESTS

On products that are seamless or welded without filler NF-2351 Retests for Class 1, 2, 3, and MC
metal, one test shall be made from each lot. On products Material Other Than Bolting
which are welded with filler metal, one additional test with
the specimens taken from the weld area shall also be made (a) For Charpy V-notch tests required by NF-2331 to
on each lot. A lot shall be defined as stated in the applicable meet the acceptance standards of Tables NF-2331(a)-1,
material specification, but in no case shall a lot consist of NF-2331(a)-2, and NF-2331(a)-3, respectively, one retest
products from more than one heat of material and of more at the same temperature may be conducted, provided
than one diameter, with the nominal thickness of any prod- (1) the average value of the test results meets the
uct included not exceeding that to be impact tested by minimum requirements,
more than 1⁄4 in. (6 mm); such a lot shall be in a single (2) not more than one specimen per test is below the
heat treatment load or in the same continuous run in a minimum requirements, and
continuous furnace controlled within a 50°F (28°C) range (3) the specimens not meeting the minimum require-
and equipped with recording pyrometers. ments are not lower than 5 mils (0.13 mm) below the
specified requirements.
A retest consists of two additional specimens taken as
NF-2345 Bolting Material
near as practicable to the failed specimens. For acceptance
One test shall be made for each lot of material where a of the retests, both specimens shall meet the minimum
lot is defined as one heat of material heat treated in one requirements.
charge or as one continuous operation, not to exceed the (b) For Charpy V-notch tests required by NF-2331 to
following (in weight): meet the acceptance standards of Table NF-2331(a)-4, one
Diameter Weight retest at the same temperature may be conducted provided
(1) the average value of the test results meets the
13⁄4 in. (44 mm) and less 1,500 lb (700 kg)
“Average of 3” requirements specified.
Over 13⁄4 in. to 21⁄2 in. (44 mm to 64 mm) 3,000 lb (1 350 kg)
Over 21⁄2 in. to 5 in. (64 mm to 125 mm) 6,000 lb (2 700 kg) (2) not more than one specimen per test is below the
Over 5 in. (125 mm) 10,000 lb (4 500 kg) “Lowest 1 of 3” requirements specified.
19
FIG. NF-2331(a)-1 REQUIRED Cv ENERGY VALUES FOR CLASS 2 AND MC SUPPORT

MATERIAL OTHER THAN BOLTING
0.625 (16)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
50 (68)
Cv, ft-lb (J) (Average of Three Specimens)
40 (54)
Minimum specified
yield strength
≥75 ksi (515 MPa)
65 ksi (450 MPa)

30 (41)
55 ksi (380 MPa)
45 ksi (310 MPa)
20 (27)
≤38 ksi (260 MPa)
15 (20)
10 (14)
0 (0) 1.0 (25) 2.0 (50) ≥3.0 (75)

Maximum Nominal Thickness of Material or Weld, in. (mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Interpolation between yield strengths shown is permitted.
(b) The lowest of three specimens tested shall not be less than 5 ft-lbf (7 J) below the average
value required.
20
FIG. NF-2331(a)-2 REQUIRED Cv ENERGY VALUES FOR CLASS 3 SUPPORT MATERIAL

OTHER THAN BOLTING
0.625 (16)
50 (68)
Cv, ft-lb (J) (Average of Three Specimens)
40 (54)
Minimum specified
yield strength
≥75 ksi (515 MPa)
65 ksi (450 MPa)

30 (41)
55 ksi (380 MPa)
45 ksi (310 MPa)
20 (27)
≤38 ksi (260 MPa)
15 (20)
10 (14)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0 (0) 1.0 (25) 2.0 (50) ≥3.0 (75)

Maximum Nominal Thickness of Material or Weld, in. (mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Interpolation between yield strengths shown is permitted.
(b) The lowest of three specimens tested shall not be less than 5 ft-lbf (7 J) below the average
value required.
21
TABLE NF-2333-1 NF-2400 WELDING MATERIAL

REQUIRED Cv VALUES
FOR BOLTING MATERIAL NF-2410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Nominal Diameter, Lateral Expansion, (a) All welding material used in the construction and
in. (mm) mils (mm) repair of supports or material, except welding material
1 (25) or less No test required used for cladding or hard surfacing, shall conform to the
Over 1 (25) 25 (0.64) requirements of the welding material specification or to
the requirements for other welding material as permitted
in Section IX. In addition, welding material shall conform
to the requirements stated in this Subarticle and to the rules
07 (3) the specimen not meeting the requirements is not covering identification in NF-2150.
lower than 5 ft-lb (7 J) below the “Lowest 1 of 3” require- (b) The Certificate Holder shall provide the organization
ments specified. performing the testing with the following information, as
(4) a retest consists of two additional specimens taken applicable:
as near as practicable to the failed specimens. For accept- (1) welding process
ance of the retests, both specimens shall be equal to or (2) SFA Specification and classification
greater than the “Average of 3” requirements specified. (3) other identification if no SFA Specification
applies
(4) minimum tensile strength [NF-2431.1(e)] in
NF-2352 Retests for Bolting for Charpy V-Notch either the as-welded or heat treated condition, or both
Tests [NF-2431.1(c)]
For Charpy V-notch tests of bolting required by NF-2333 (5) Charpy V-notch test for material as-welded or
to meet the acceptance standards of Table NF-2333-1, one heat treated, or both (NF-2331); the test temperature, and
retest at the same temperature may be conducted, provided the lateral expansion or the absorbed energy, shall be pro-
vided
(a) the average value of the test results meets the mini-
mum requirements. (6) the preheat and interpass temperatures to be used
during welding of the test coupon [NF-2431.1(c)]
(b) not more than one specimen per test is below the
(7) postweld heat treatment time, temperature range,
minimum requirements.
and maximum cooling rate, if the production weld will be
(c) the specimens not meeting the minimum require-
heat treated [NF-2431.1(c)]
ments are not lower than 5 mils (0.13 mm) below the
(8) elements for which chemical analysis is required
specified requirements.
per the SFA Specification or WPS and NF-2432
(d) a retest consists of two additional specimens taken
(9) minimum delta ferrite (NF-2433)
as near as practicable to the failed specimens. For accept-
ance of the retests, both specimens shall meet the minimum
requirements.
NF-2420 REQUIRED TESTS
The required tests shall be conducted for each lot of
NF-2360 CALIBRATION OF INSTRUMENTS covered, flux cored, or fabricated electrodes; for each heat
AND EQUIPMENT of bare electrodes, rod, or wire for use with the OFW,
GMAW, GTAW, PAW, and EGW (electro-gas welding)
Calibration of temperature instruments and Cv impact processes (Section IX, QW/QB-492); for each heat of con-
test machines used in impact testing shall be performed at sumable inserts; for each combination of heat of bare elec-
the frequency specified in NF-2360(a) or (b). trodes and lot of submerged arc flux; for each combination
(a) Temperature instruments used to control test temper- of lot of fabricated electrodes and lot of submerged arc
ature of specimens shall be calibrated and the results flux; for each combination of heat of bare electrodes or
recorded to meet the requirements of NCA-3858.2 at least lot of fabricated electrodes and dry blend of supplementary
once in each 3 month interval. powdered filler metal and lot of submerged arc flux; or for
(b) Cv impact test machines shall be calibrated and the each combination of heat of bare electrodes and lot of
results recorded to meet the requirements of NCA-3858.2. electroslag flux. Tests performed on welding material in
The calibrations shall be performed using the frequency the qualification of weld procedures will satisfy the testing
and methods outlined in ASTM E 23-02a and employing requirements for the lot, heat, or combination of heat and
standard specimens obtained from the National Institute batch of welding material used, provided the tests required
of Standards and Technology. by NF-4000 and this Subarticle are made and the results
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
22
conform to the requirements of this Article. The definitions not to exceed 24 hr and not to exceed 100,000 lb (45 000
in NF-2420(a) through (h) apply. kg), from chemically controlled wire, subject to require-
(a) A dry batch of covering mixture is defined as the ments of NF-2420(f)(1), (f)(2), and (f)(3).
quantity of dry covering ingredients mixed at one time in (1) For the chemical control of the product of the rod
one mixing vessel; a dry batch may be used singly or may mill, coils shall be limited to a maximum of one splice
be subsequently subdivided into quantities to which the prior to processing the wire. Chemical analysis shall be
liquid binders may be added to produce a number of wet made from a sample taken from both ends of each coil of
mixes as in NF-2420(c). mill coiled rod furnished by mills permitting spliced coil
(b) A dry blend is defined as one or more dry batches practice of one splice maximum per coil. A chemical analy-
mixed in a mixing vessel and combined proportionately to sis need be taken from only one end of rod coils furnished
produce a uniformity of mixed ingredients equal to that by mills prohibiting spliced coil practice.
obtained by mixing the same total amount of dry ingredi- (2) Carbon, manganese, silicon, and other intention-
ents at one time in one mixing vessel. ally added elements shall be determined to identify the
(c) A wet mix is defined as the combination of a dry material to ensure that it conforms to the SFA or user’s
batch or dry blend [NF-2420(a) and (b), respectively] and material specification.
liquid binder ingredients at one time in one mixing vessel. (3) Each container of wire shall be coded for identifi-
(d) A lot of covered, flux-cored, or fabricated electrodes cation and traceability to the lot, production period, shift,
is defined as the quantity of electrodes produced from the line, and analysis of rod used to make the wire.
same combination of heat of metal and dry batch, dry blend, (g) A lot of submerged arc or electroslag flux is defined
or chemically controlled mixes of flux or core materials. as the quantity of flux produced from the same combination
Alternatively, a lot of covered, flux-cored, or fabricated of raw materials under one production schedule.
electrodes may be considered one type and size of elec- (h) A dry blend of supplementary powdered filler metal
trode, produced in a continuous period, not to exceed 24 hr is defined as one or more mixes of material produced in
and not to exceed 100,000 lb (45 000 kg), from chemically a continuous period, not to exceed 24 hr and not to exceed
controlled tube, wire, or strip and a dry batch, a dry blend, 20,000 lb (9 000 kg) from chemically controlled mixes of
or chemically controlled mixes of flux, provided each con- powdered filler metal, provided each container of powdered
tainer of welding materials is coded for identification and metal is coded for identification and traceable to the produc-
traceable to the production period, the shift, line, and analy- tion period, the shift, and the mixing vessel. A chemically
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
sis range of both the mix and the rod, tube, or strip used controlled mix of powdered filler metal is defined as pow-
to make the electrode. dered filler metal material that has been chemically ana-
(1) Chemically controlled tube, wire, or strip is lyzed to assure that it conforms to the percent allowable
defined as consumable tube, wire, or strip material supplied variation from the powdered filler metal manufacturer’s
on coils with maximum of one slice per coil that has been standard, for each chemical element, for that type of pow-
chemically analyzed to assure that the material conforms dered filler metal. A chemical analysis shall be made on
to the electrode manufacturer’s chemical control limits for each mix made in an individual mixing vessel after blend-
the specific type of electrode. Both ends of each coil shall ing. The chemical analysis range of the supplemental pow-
be chemically analyzed except that those coils which are dered filler shall be the same as that of the welding
splice free need only be analyzed on one end of the coil. electrode, and the ratio of powder to electrode used to
(2) Chemically controlled mixes of flux are defined make the test coupon shall be the maximum permitted for
as flux material that has been chemically analyzed to assure production welding.
that it conforms to the percent allowable variation from
the electrode manufacturer’s standard for each chemical
NF-2430 WELD METAL TESTS
element for that type electrode. A chemical analysis shall
be made on each mix made in an individual mixing vessel NF-2431 Mechanical Properties Test
after blending. Tensile and impact tests shall be made, in accordance
(e) A heat of bare electrode, rod, wire, or consumable with this paragraph, of welding materials which are used
insert is defined as the material produced from the same to join P-Nos. 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, and 11 base materials in
melt of metal. any combination, with the exceptions listed in NF-2431(a)
(f) Alternatively, for carbon and low alloy steel bare through (d).
electrode, rod, wire, or consumable inserts for use with (a) austenitic stainless steel and nonferrous welding
SAW, OFW, GMAW, GTAW, PAW, and EGW processes, material used to join the listed P-Numbers
a heat may be defined as either the material produced from (b) consumable inserts (backing filler material)
the same melt of metal or the material produced from one (c) welding material used for GTAW root deposits with
type and size of wire when produced in a continuous period, a maximum of two layers
23
(d) welding material to be used for the welding of base in accordance with the requirements of SFA-5.1, Specifi-
materials exempted from impact testing by NF-2311(b)(1) cation for Mild Steel Covered Electrodes. For impact speci-
through (b)(8) and NF-2311(b)(11) and (b)(12) shall like- men preparation and testing, the applicable parts of
wise be exempted from the impact testing required by this NF-2321 shall apply. The longitudinal axis of the specimen
paragraph shall be at a minimum depth of 1⁄4t from a surface, where
t is the thickness of the test weld.
NF-2431.1 General Test Requirements. The welding (e) One all weld metal tensile specimen shall be tested
test coupon shall be made in accordance with NF-2431.1(a) and shall meet the specified minimum tensile strength
through (f) using each process with which the weld material requirements of the base material specification. When base
will be used in production welding. materials of different specifications are to be welded, the
(a) Test coupons shall be of sufficient size and thickness tensile strength requirements shall conform to the specified
that the test specimens required herein can be removed. minimum tensile strength requirements of either of the
07 (b) The weld metal to be tested for all processes except base material specifications.
electroslag welding shall be deposited in such a manner (f) Impact specimens of the weld metal shall be tested
as to eliminate substantially the influence of the base mate- where impact tests are required for either of the base materi-
rial on the results of the tests. Weld metal to be used with als of the production weld. The weld metal shall conform
the electroslag process shall be deposited in such a manner to the requirements of NF-2331(a), applicable to the base
as to conform to one of the applicable Welding Procedure material. Where different requirements exist for the two
Specifications (WPS) for production welding. The base base materials, the weld metal may conform to either of
material shall conform with the requirements of Section the two requirements.
IX, QW-403.1 or QW-403.4, as applicable.
NF-2431.2 Standard Test Requirements. In lieu of
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(c) The welding of the test coupon shall be performed the use of the General Test Requirements specified in
within the range of preheat and interpass temperatures NF-2431.1, tensile and impact tests may be made in accor-
which will be used in production welding. Coupons shall dance with this subparagraph where they are required for
be tested in the as-welded condition or they shall be tested mild and low alloy steel covered electrodes; the material
in the applicable postweld heat treated condition when the combinations to require weld material testing, as listed in
production welds are to be postweld heat treated. The NF-2431, shall apply for this Standard Test Requirements
postweld heat treatment holding time5 shall be at least 80% option. The limitations and testing under this Standard Test
of the maximum time to be applied to the weld metal in option shall be in accordance with NF-2431.2(a) through
production application. The total time for postweld heat (f).
treatment of the test coupon may be applied in one heating (a) Testing to the requirements of this subparagraph
cycle. The cooling rate from the postweld heat treatment shall be limited to electrode classifications included in
temperature shall be of the same order as that applicable specifications SFA-5.1 or SFA-5.5.
to the weld metal in the support. In addition, weld coupons (b) The test assembly required by SFA-5.1 or SFA-5.5,
for weld metal to be used with the electroslag process as applicable, shall be used for test coupon preparation,
that are tested in the as-welded condition, or following a except that it shall be increased in size to obtain the number
postweld heat treatment within the holding temperature of Cv specimens required by NF-2331(a), where applicable.
ranges of Table NF-4622.1-1 or Table NF-4622.4(c)-1, (c) The welding of the test coupon shall conform to the
shall have a thickness within the range of 0.5 to 1.1 times requirements of the SFA Specification for the classification
the thickness of the welds to be made in production. Elec- of electrode being tested. Coupons shall be tested in the
troslag weld coupons to be tested following a postweld as-welded condition and also in the postweld heat treated
heat treatment, which will include heating the coupon to condition. The postweld heat treatment temperatures shall
a temperature above the “Holding Temperature Range” of be in accordance with Table NF-4622.1-1 for the applicable
Table NF-4622.1-1 for the type of material being tested, P-Number equivalent. The time at postweld heat treatment
shall have a thickness within the range of 0.9 to 1.1 times temperature shall be 8 hr (this qualifies postweld heat treat-
the thickness of the welds to be made in production. ments of 10 hr or less). When the postweld heat treatment
(d) Regardless of the welding process or welding mate- of the production weld exceeds 10 hr, or the PWHT temper-
rial being tested, the tensile specimens, and the Cv impact ature is other than that required above, the general test of
specimens where required, shall be located and prepared NF-2431.1 shall be used.
(d) The tensile and Cv specimens shall be located and
prepared in accordance with the requirements of SFA-5.1
5
Any postweld heat treatment time which is anticipated to be applied or SFA-5.5, as applicable.
Design Specification. The Certificate Holder shall include this time in (e) One all weld metal tensile specimen shall be tested
the total time at temperature specified to be applied to the test specimens. and shall meet the specified minimum tensile strength
24
TABLE NF-2432.1-1 TABLE NF-2432.2(a)-1

SAMPLING OF WELDING MATERIALS FOR WELDING MATERIAL CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Materials Elements
All Other Cr–Ni stainless materials C, Cr, Mo, Ni, Mn, Si, Cb
GTAW/PAW GMAW Processes
A-No. 8 filler metal Filler metal Weld Weld

or weld deposit deposit
deposit deposit method is not provided by the SFA Specification,
the sample shall be removed from a weld pad, groove, or
All other filler metal Filler metal Filler metal Weld other test weld6 made using the welding process that will
or weld or weld deposit
deposit deposit
be followed when the welding material or combination of
welding materials being certified is consumed. The weld
for A-No. 8 material to be used with the GMAW or EGW
process shall be made using the shielding gas composition
requirement of the SFA Specification for the applicable specified in the Welding Procedure Specification that will
electrode classification. be followed when the material is consumed. The test sam-
(f) The requirements of NF-2431.1(f) shall be applicable ple for ESW shall be removed from the weld metal of
to the impact testing of this option. the mechanical properties test coupon. Where a chemical
analysis is required for a welding material which does not
NF-2432 Chemical Analysis Test have a mechanical properties test requirement, a chemical
analysis test coupon shall be prepared as required by
Chemical analysis of filler metal or weld deposits shall NF-2431.1(c), except that heat treatment of the coupon is
be made in accordance with NF-2420 and as required by not required and the weld coupon thickness requirements
NF-2432.1 and NF-2432.2. of NF-2431.1(c) do not apply.
NF-2432.1 Test Method. The chemical analysis test (d) The alternate method provided in NF-2432.1(b) for
shall be performed in accordance with this Subparagraph the preparation of samples for chemical analysis of welding
and Table NF-2432.1-1, and the results shall conform to material to be used for corrosion resistant overlay cladding
NF-2432.2. shall require a test weld made in accordance with the
(a) A-No. 8 welding material to be used with GTAW essential variables of the Welding Procedure Specification
and PAW processes and any other welding material to be that will be followed when the welding material is con-
used with any GTAW, PAW, or GMAW process shall sumed. The test weld shall be made in conformance with
have chemical analysis performed either on the filler metal the requirements of Section IX, QW-214.1. The removal
or on a weld deposit made with the filler metal in accor- of chemical analysis samples shall conform with QW-214.3
dance with NF-2432.1(c) or (d). for the minimum thickness for which the Welding Proce-
(b) A-No. 8 welding material to be used with other than dure Specification is qualified.
the GTAW and PAW processes and other welding material NF-2432.2 Requirements for Chemical Analysis. The
to be used with other than the GTAW, PAW, or GMAW chemical elements to be determined, the composition
process shall have chemical analysis performed on a weld requirements of the weld metal, and the recording of results
deposit of the material or combination of materials being of the chemical analysis shall be in accordance with
certified in accordance with NF-2432.1(c) or (d). The NF-2432.2(a) through (c).
removal of chemical analysis samples shall be from an (a) Welding material of ferrous alloy A-No. 8 (Section
undiluted weld deposit made in accordance with IX, QW-442) shall be analyzed for the elements listed in
NF-2432.1(c). As an alternative, the deposit shall be made Table NF-2432.2(a)-1 and for any other elements specified
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
in accordance with NF-2432.1(d) for material that will be either in the welding material specification referenced by
used for corrosion resistant overlay cladding. Where the the Welding Procedure Specification or in the Welding
Welding Procedure Specification or the welding material Procedure Specification.
specification specifies percentage composition limits for (b) The chemical composition of the weld metal or filler
analysis, it shall state that the specified limits apply for metal shall conform to the welding material specification
either the filler metal analysis or the undiluted weld deposit
analysis or for in situ cladding deposit analysis in confor- 6
The methods given in the Appendix of SFA 5.9, Specification for
mance with the above required certification testing. Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding
(c) The preparation of samples for chemical analysis of Rods and Bare Electrodes, shall be used to establish a welding and
sampling method for the pad, groove, or other test weld to ensure that
undiluted weld deposits shall comply with the method the weld deposit being sampled will be substantially free of base metal
given in the applicable SFA Specification. Where a weld dilution.
25
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
for elements having specified percentage composition lim- NF-2520 REQUIRED EXAMINATION AND
its. Where the Welding Procedure Specification contains ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS FOR
a modification of the composition limits of SFA or other CLASS 1 SPRINGS
referenced welding material specifications, or provides lim-
Spring coils for Class 1 variable, constant, and sway
its for additional elements, these composition limits of the
brace standard supports shall be examined after coiling by
Welding Procedure Specification shall apply for accept-
either the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant method.
ability.
Linear indications shall be removed by grinding and blend-
(c) The results of the chemical analysis shall be reported
ing. If the depth of the ground area exceeds 3% of the bar
in accordance with NCA-3862.1. Elements listed in Table
diameter or thickness, the spring coil shall be rejected.
NF-2432.2(a)-1 but not specified in the welding material
specification or Welding Procedure Specification shall be
reported for information only. NF-2530 REQUIRED EXAMINATION AND
ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS FOR
NF-2433 Delta Ferrite Determination COILED WIRE ROPE USED AS A
A determination of delta ferrite shall be performed on SPRING
A-No. 8 weld material (Section IX, QW-442) backing filler Coiled wire rope used as a spring shall be visually exam-
metal (consumable inserts); bare electrode, rod, or wire ined after coiling and shall be free from kinks, loose
filler metal; or weld metal, except that delta ferrite determi- strands, loose wires, or broken protruding wires.
nations are not required for SFA-5.4, Type 16-8-2, or A-
No. 8 weld filler metal to be used for weld metal cladding.
NF-2433.1 Method. Delta ferrite determinations of NF-2580 EXAMINATION OF BOLTING
welding material, including consumable insert material, MATERIAL AND RODS7
shall be made using a magnetic measuring instrument and NF-2581 Required Examinations
weld deposits made in accordance with NF-2433.1(b). NF-2581.1 Class 1 Supports. All bolting material and
Alternatively, the delta ferrite determinations for welding rods shall be visually examined in accordance with
materials may be performed by the use of chemical analysis NF-2582. Nominal sizes greater than 2 in. (50 mm) shall be
of NF-2432 in conjunction with Fig. NF-2433.1-1. examined by either the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
(a) Calibration of magnetic instruments shall conform method (NF-2583). In addition, nominal sizes greater than
to AWS A4.2-91. 4 in. (100 mm) shall be ultrasonically examined in accor-
(b) The weld deposit for magnetic delta ferrite determi- dance with NF-2584.
nation shall be made in accordance with NF-2432.1(c).
(c) A minimum of six ferrite readings shall be taken on NF-2581.2 Class 2, 3, and MC Supports. Bolts, studs,
the surface of the weld deposit. The readings obtained shall and nuts shall be examined in accordance with the require-
be averaged to a single Ferrite Number (FN). ments of the material specification and NF-2582.
NF-2433.2 Acceptance Standards. The minimum
acceptable delta ferrite shall be 5FN. The results of the NF-2582 Visual Examination
delta ferrite determination shall be included in the Certified
The areas of threads, shanks, and heads of final machined
Material Test Report of NF-2130 or NF-4120.
parts shall be visually examined. Harmful discontinuities
such as laps, seams, or cracks that would be detrimental
NF-2440 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF
to the intended service are unacceptable.
WELDING MATERIAL
Suitable storage and handling of electrodes, flux, and
other welding materials shall be maintained. Precautions NF-2583 Magnetic Particle or Liquid Penetrant
shall be taken to minimize absorption of moisture by fluxes Examination
and cored, fabricated, and coated electrodes. All bolting material and rods greater than 2 in. (50 mm)
nominal size for Class 1 supports shall be examined by a
NF-2500 EXAMINATION AND REPAIR OF magnetic particle method or a liquid penetrant method.
MATERIAL Such examination shall be performed on the finished bolt-
NF-2510 EXAMINATION AND REPAIR OF ing material after threading or on the material stock at
MATERIAL OTHER THAN BOLTING approximately the finished diameter before threading and
Material for supports shall be examined in accordance 7
The word rods as used in this Subarticle is intended to cover rods
with the material specification. Defects may be repaired that are threaded. It also includes forged piston rods if they are threaded
as permitted by the material specification. for a portion of their length. It does not apply to unthreaded bar stock.
26
FIG. NF-2433.1-1 DELTA FERRITE CONTENT
18 20 22 24 26 28 30
18 18
)
FN
r(
be
4
0
m
nu
8
16 16
te
12
rri
2
Fe
16
6
Nieq ⫽ Ni ⫹ 35 C ⫹ 20 N ⫹ 0.25 Cu
20
24
10
28
14
35
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
18
14 22 14
45
26
30 55
40 65
50 75
60
12 85 12
70
80 95
90
100
10 10
18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Creq ⫽ Cr ⫹ Mo ⫹ 0.7 Nb
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The actual nitrogen content is preferred. If this is not available, the following applicable nitrogen value shall be used:
(1) GMAW welds, 0.08%, except that when self-shielding, flux-cored electrodes are used, 0.12%
(2) Welds made using other processes, 0.06%.
(b) This diagram is identical to the WRC-1992 Diagram, except that the solidification mode lines have been removed for ease of use.
27
after heading (if involved). Linear nonaxial indications are NF-2600 MATERIAL MANUFACTURER’S
unacceptable. Linear axial indications greater than 1 in. QUALITY SYSTEM PROGRAMS
(25 mm) in length are unacceptable. NF-2610 DOCUMENTATION AND
MAINTENANCE OF QUALITY
SYSTEM PROGRAMS
(a) Except as provided in NF-2610(b), Material Organi-
NF-2584 Ultrasonic Examination for Sizes zations shall have a Quality System Program or an Identi-
Greater Than 4 in. (100 mm) fication and Verification Program, as applicable, which
meets the requirements of NCA-3800.
All bolting material and rods greater than 4 in. (100 mm) (b) The requirements of NCA-3862 shall be met as
nominal size for Class 1 supports shall be ultrasonically required by NF-2130. The other requirements of
examined over the entire cylindrical surface prior to thread- NCA-3800 need not be used by Material Organizations
ing in accordance with the requirements of the following for small products, as defined in NF-2610(c), for brazing
subparagraphs. material, and for material that is allowed by this Subsection
to be furnished with a Certificate of Compliance. For these
products, the Certificate Holder’s Quality Assurance Pro-
NF-2584.1 Ultrasonic Method. Examination shall be
gram (NCA-4000) shall include measures to provide assur-
carried out by the straight beam, radial scan method. ance that the material is furnished in accordance with the
material specification and the requirements of this Sub-
NF-2584.2 Examination Procedure. Examination section.
shall be performed at a nominal frequency of 2.25 MHz (c) For the purpose of this paragraph, small products
with a search unit not to exceed 1 in.2 (650 mm2) area. are defined as given in NF-2610(c)(1) through (c)(3)
(1) pipe, tube, pipe fittings, and flanges of 2 in. (50
NF-2584.3 Calibration of Equipment. Calibration mm) nominal size and less
sensitivity shall be established by adjustment of the instru- (2) bolting material, including studs, nuts, and bolts
ment so that the first back reflection is 75%–90% of full of 2 in. (50 mm) nominal diameter and less
screen height. (3) structural material with a nominal cross-sectional
area of 2 sq in. (1 300 mm2) and less
NF-2584.4 Acceptance Standards. Any discontinuity (d) When impact testing is required in accordance with
that causes an indication in excess of 20% of the height NF-2300, the material not exempted by NF-2311 shall be
of the first back reflection or any discontinuity which pre- furnished with Certified Material Test Reports in accor-
vents the production of a first back reflection of 50% of dance with NCA-3862.
the calibration amplitude is not acceptable. (e) Structural materials, which are permitted by this
Section to be furnished with a Certificate of Compliance,
may be repaired by welding using welders, documentation,
and examination requirements specified in SA-6 and need
not meet the requirements of NCA-3857.3.
NF-2586 Repair by Welding (f) Materials manufactured to a Material Specification
prohibiting weld repair without user approval do not
Weld repairs of bolting material and rods are not per- require documentation to indicate that weld repairs have
mitted. not been performed.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
28
ARTICLE NF-3000
DESIGN
NF-3100 GENERAL DESIGN NF-3112.2 Design Mechanical Loads. The specified

REQUIREMENTS Design Mechanical Loads shall be established in accor-
dance with NCA-2142.1(c), and shall include all loads
NF-3110 LOADING CRITERIA from the component or piping acting on the support.
NF-3111 Loading Conditions
NF-3112.3 Design Stress Intensity and Allowable
The loadings that shall be taken into account in designing Stress Values. When the procedures of design by analysis
a support include, but are not limited to, those in the fol- (NF-3220) are employed, the applicable design stress inten-
lowing: sity values Sm listed in Tables 2A, 2B, and 4 of Section
(a) weight of the piping or component and normal con- II, Part D, Subpart 1 shall be used. When the procedures
tents under plant and system operating and test conditions, of linear elastic analysis (NF-3320) are employed, the
including loads due to static and dynamic head and fluid allowable stress values shall be the applicable yield
flow effects strength values Sy listed in Table Y-1, Section II, Part D,
(b) weight of the support Subpart 1 as modified by the design factors given in
(c) superimposed static and thermal loads and reactions NF-3322. The material shall not be used at metal and
induced by the supported system components design temperatures that exceed the temperature limit in
(d) dynamic loads, including loads caused by earth- the applicability column for which stress or stress intensity
quake and vibration values are listed. The values in the tables may be interpo-
(e) effects from piping thermal expansion lated for intermediate temperatures.
(f) anchor and support movement effects
(g) environmental loads such as wind and snow loads NF-3113 Service Conditions
(h) expansion or contraction of a component produced
Each Service Condition to which the piping or compo-
by internal or external pressure
nent may be subjected shall be categorized in accordance
Guidelines for classification of these loadings into primary, with NCA-2142.2, and Service Limits [NCA-2142.4(b)]
secondary, or peak are listed in NF-3120 and NF-3220. shall be designated in the Design Specification in such
detail as will provide a complete basis for design in accor-
dance with this Article.
NF-3112 Design Loadings
The Design Loadings shall be established in accordance NF-3114 Test Conditions
with NCA-2142.1 and NF-3112.1 through NF-3112.3. The component and piping suppport loadings resulting
NF-3112.1 Design Temperature. The specified Design from test conditions shall be identified (NCA-2142).
Temperature shall be established in accordance with
NCA-2142.1(b). The metal temperature shall be deter-
mined by computation using accepted heat transfer proce- NF-3120 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
dures or by measurement from equipment in service under NF-3121 Terms Relating to Design by Analysis
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
plant and system equivalent operating conditions. In lieu NF-3121.1 General Considerations
of heat transfer analysis or measurements, the component (a) Terms that are common to the design by stress analy-
or piping Design Temperature may be used. In no case sis of Plate- and Shell-Type, Linear-Type, and Standard
shall the temperature at the surface of the metal exceed Supports are defined in NF-3121.2 through NF-3121.16.
the maximum temperature listed in Tables 1A, 1B, 2A, (b) Terms unique to the design by stress analysis of
2B, 3, 4, and Y-1 of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, or Plate- and Shell-Type Supports are defined in NF-3212.
exceed the maximum temperature limitations specified (c) Terms unique to the design by stress analysis of
elsewhere in this Subsection. Linear-Type Supports are defined in NF-3313.
29
NF-3121.2 Primary Stress. Primary stress is any nor- and equal to the average of stress across the thickness of
mal stress or shear stress developed by an imposed loading the section under consideration.
which is necessary to satisfy the laws of equilibrium of
NF-3121.8 Bending Stress. Bending stress is the vari-
external and internal forces and moments. The basic char-
able component of normal stress. The variation may or
acteristic of a primary stress is that it is not self-limiting.
may not be linear across the thickness.
Primary stresses which considerably exceed the yield
strength Sy will result in failure or, at least, in gross distor- NF-3121.9 Total Stress. Total stress is the sum of the
tion. A thermal stress is not classified as a primary stress. primary and secondary stress contributions. Recognition
A general primary membrane stress is one which is so of each of the individual contributions is essential to estab-
distributed in the support that no redistribution of load lishment of appropriate stress limitations.
occurs in the support as a result of yielding. Examples of
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-3121.10 Critical Buckling. Critical buckling

primary stress are general membrane stress in a circular
occurs when a support is loaded to a state at which an
cylindrical shell due to a uniformly distributedaxial load,
infinitesimal additional load or disturbance causes the sup-
and bending stress in a cantilever beam due to a normal
port to change from an equilibrium condition to one of
end load. In addition to the above, for supports, stresses
instability.
induced in the support by restraint of free end displacement
[NF-3111(e)] and anchor motion [NF-3111(f)] of piping NF-3121.11 Thermal Stress. Thermal stress is a self-
are considered primary stresses. equilibrating stress produced by a nonuniform distribution
of temperature or by differing thermal coefficientsof expan-
NF-3121.3 Secondary Stress. Secondary stress is a sion. Thermal stress is developed in a solid body whenever
normal stress or a shear stress developed by the constraint a volume of material is prevented from assuming the size
of adjacent material or by self-constraint of the structure. and shape that it normally would under a change in temper-
The basic characteristic of a secondary stress is that it ature. Evaluation of thermal stresses in the support is not
is self-limiting. Local yielding and minor distortions can required by this Subsection.
satisfy the conditions that cause the stress to occur, and
failure from one application of the stress is not to be NF-3121.12 Free End Displacement. Free end dis-
expected. An example of secondary stress is bending stress placement consists of the relative motions that would occur
at a gross structural discontinuity. between an attachment and connected structure or equip-
ment if the two members were separated and permitted to
NF-3121.4 Peak Stress. Peak stress is that increment move.
of stress which is additive to the primary plus secondary
NF-3121.13 Anchor Point Motion Stress. Anchor
stresses by reason of local discontinuities or local thermal
point motion stresses are those stresses resulting from the
stress, including the effects, if any, of stress concentrations.
differential motion of support points. An example is differ-
The basic characteristic of a peak stress is that it does not
ential building settlement.
cause any noticeable distortion and is objectionable only
as a possible source of a fatigue crack or brittle fracture. NF-3121.14 Gross Structural Discontinuity. Gross
A stress that is not highly localized falls into this category structural discontinuity is a geometric or material disconti-
if it is of a type which cannot cause noticeable distortion. nuity that affects the stress or strain distribution through
Evaluation of peak stresses in the support is not required the entire thickness of the member. Gross discontinuity-
by this Subsection. type stresses are those portions of the actual stress distribu-
tions that produce net bending and membrane force resul-
NF-3121.5 Normal Stress. Normal stress is the compo- tants when integrated through the thickness. Examples of
nent of stress normal to the plane of reference. This is gross structural discontinuities are junctions between parts
also referred to as direct stress. Usually the distribution of of different diameters or thicknesses and flange-to-shell
normal stress is not uniform through the thickness of a junctions.
part, so this stress is considered to be made up in turn of
two components, one uniformly distributed and equal to NF-3121.15 Limit Analysis — Collapse Load. The
the average value of stress across the thickness under con- methods of limit analysis are used to compute the maxi-
sideration, and the other varying from this average value mum load or combination of loads a structure made of
with the location across the thickness. ideally plastic (nonstrain-hardening) material can carry.
The deformations of an ideally plastic structure increase
NF-3121.6 Shear Stress. Shear stress is the component without bound at this load, which is termed the collapse
of stress tangent to the plane of reference. load.
NF-3121.7 Membrane Stress. Membrane stress is the NF-3121.16 Collapse Load — Lower Bound. If, for
component of normal stress that is uniformly distributed a given load, any system of stresses can be found which
30
everywhere satisfies equilibrium and nowhere exceeds the margins shall be introduced to allow for variations due to
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
material yield strength, using shape factors associated with fabrication and installation. Care shall be taken to ensure
the cross section under consideration, the load is at or that design clearances and travel ranges are based on the
below the collapse load. This is the lower bound theorem maximum range that might occur between two operating
of limit analysis which permits calculations of a lower conditions and not necessarily on the maximum cold to
bound to the collapse load. hot range. All parts of the support shall be fabricated and
assembled so that they will not be disengaged by movement
of the supported piping or component. Supports needed
NF-3122 Piping or Component Deformation
only to provide stability during Level C or Level D Service
Limits
Conditions shall be designed and installed so as not to
Deformation limits for the supported piping or compo- overstress the piping or component during Level A or Level
nent shall be stipulated in the Design Specifications, if B Service Conditions.
required.
NF-3128 Snubbers
NF-3123 Functional Requirements The end connection of the snubber shall be designed
When a support is to be designed to perform a specific to accommodate vertical and horizontal movement of the
function during any Service Condition, the functional piping or component, as required.
requirements shall be designated in the Design Specifica-
tions. NF-3130 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
NF-3131 Requirements for Acceptability
NF-3124 Rolling and Sliding Supports The requirements for acceptability of support design are
(a) Rolling and sliding supports shall permit free move- given in NF-3131(a) through (e).
ment of the piping or component, or the piping or compo- (a) The design shall be such that the stress intensity
nent shall be designed to include the imposed load and values or the stress values (whichever are applicable) will
frictional resistance of these types of supports; their dimen- not exceed the limits given in this Subarticle. Table NF-
sions shall provide for the designed movement of the sup- 3131(a)-1 indicates the rules and limits to be used for
ported piping or component. the various classes and types of design procedures. The
(b) Sliding supports (or shoes) and brackets shall be applicable tables of allowable stress values for materials
designed to accommodate the forces caused by friction in to be used with a specific design procedure are referenced
addition to the loads imposed by bearing. The dimensions in Table NF-2121(a)-1.
of the support shall provide for the design movement of (b) The design procedure shall be one of those given
the supported piping or component. Material and lubricants in Table NF-3131(a)-1 as being applicable to supports.
used in sliding supports shall be suitable for the environ- (c) The design details shall conform to the rules of this
ment of the metal at the point of sliding contact and shall Subarticle or to those referenced herein.
be specified in the Design Documents. (d) For configurations where compressive stresses
occur, the critical buckling stress shall be taken into account
in addition to the requirements of NF-3131(a), (b), and (c).
NF-3125 Sway Braces and Vibration Dampeners
(e) For Class 1 supports, protection against nonductile
Sway braces and vibration dampeners may be used to fracture shall be provided. An acceptable procedure for
limit the effects of vibration and may be of the rigid strut nonductile failure prevention is given in Appendix G of
(linear type) tension–compression type. If employed in the Section III, Division 1, Appendices.
design or added as a result of observation under startup or
initial operating conditions, the effect of sway braces shall NF-3132 Dimensional Standards
be included in the stress analysis of the piping or compo-
Dimensions of supports may comply with the standards
nent for all of the specified conditions.
and specifications listed in Table NF-3132-1 but are not
mandatory. Compliance with these standards does not
NF-3127 Provisions for Movement of Supported replace or eliminate the requirements for stress analysis or
Piping or Component load rating.
Consideration shall be given to the relative motion of
the supported piping or component and the support. When NF-3133 Stress Analysis
clearances or travel ranges or both are required to accom- A detailed stress analysis or Design Report, as required
modate piping or component movements, sufficient design by NCA-3550 for all supports, shall be prepared in
31
TABLE NF-3131(a)-1
REFERENCE PARAGRAPHS FOR PROCEDURES FOR DESIGN OF
COMPONENT SUPPORTS, PIPING SUPPORTS, AND STANDARD SUPPORTS
Plate and Shell Linear
Type and
Class of Design by Weld Experimental Load Design by Weld Experimental Load
Support Analysis Bolting Joint Analysis Rating Analysis Bolting Joints Analysis Rating
Component
Class 1 NF-3220 NF-3225 NF-3226 NF-3270 NF-3280 NF-3320 NF-3324 NF-3324 NF-3370 NF-3380
NF-3522 NF-3525 NF-3526 NF-3523 NF-3525 NF-3526
and MC NF-3552 NF-3555 NF-3556 NF-3553 NF-3555 NF-3556
[Note (1)]
NF-3552 NF-3555 NF-3556 NF-3553 NF-3555 NF-3556
Piping
NF-3622 NF-3625 NF-3626 NF-3623 NF-3625 NF-3626
NF-3652 NF-3655 NF-3656 NF-3653 NF-3655 NF-3656
NF-3652 NF-3655 NF-3656 NF-3653 NF-3655 NF-3656
Standard
[Note (1)] NF-3422 NF-3425 NF-3426 NF-3423 NF-3425 NF-3426
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
[Note (1)] NF-3452 NF-3455 NF-3456 NF-3455 NF-3456 NF-3380
NF-3452 NF-3455 NF-3456 NF-3453 NF-3455 NF-3456
NOTE:
(1) Supports for Class 2 vessels designed to NC-3200 shall be designed in accordance with Class 1 requirements.
sufficient detail to show that each of the stress limits of NF-3140 GENERAL DESIGN PROCEDURES
NF-3200 or NF-3300 is satisfied when the support is sub- NF-3141 Types of Procedures
jected to the loadings of NF-3110. (a) The design procedure which may be used is depen-
dent on the type of support being designed and the Class
NF-3134 Support Tolerances of construction involved. Three design procedures are rec-
ognized, namely
(a) Tolerances shall be specified by the designer in the (1) design by analysis
design output documents. Fabrication tolerances and local (a) maximum shear stress theory
installation tolerances as contained in Nonmandatory (b) maximum stress theory
Appendix NF-D are only mandatory when invoked by the (2) experimental stress analysis (Section III, Division
designer. 1, Appendices, Appendix II)
(b) When specifying the support tolerances, the support (3) load rating
designer shall consider the piping support location/orienta- (b) Unless either the experimental stress analysis proce-
tion tolerances specified by the piping designer (Appendix dure or the load rating procedure is used, the requirements
T-1230). of the following paragraphs apply.
32
TABLE NF-3132-1
DIMENSIONAL STANDARDS
Standard Description
Pipe and Tubing

Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASME B36.10M-2000
Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI/ASME B36.19M-1985 (R1994)
Bolting
Square and Hex Bolt and Screws (Inch Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASME B18.2.1a-1999 [Note (1)]
Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASME/ANSI B18.2.2-1987 (R1999) [Note (1)]
Socket Cap, Shoulder and Set Screws, Hex and Spline Keys (Inch Series) . . . . . . . . . ASME B18.3-1998 [Note (1)]
Threads
Unified Inch Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASME B1.1-1989 [Note (1)]
Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983 (R1992) [Note (1)]
Dryseal Pipe Threads (Inch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI B1.20.3-1976 (R1998) [Note (1)]
Standard Supports
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Pipe Hangers and Supports — Fabrication and Installation Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSS SP-89-2003
Structural Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars
General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for
Structural Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASME SA-6/SA-6M
NOTE:
(1) These standards are referenced for dimensional purposes only. Any manufacturing or inspection requirements contained in them are not
mandatory. The SA or SB Material Specification specifies the applicable manufacturing and inspection requirements.
NF-3142 Plate- and Shell-Type Supports — NF-3144 Standard Supports — Analysis

Analysis Procedure Procedure
(a) Elastic analysis based on maximum shear stress Standard Supports designed by analysis shall be
theory in accordance with the rules of NF-3200 shall be designed to either the requirements of NF-3142 or
used in the design of Plate- and Shell-Type Supports of NF-3143, according to whether they are Plate- and Shell-
Class l construction. Type or Linear-Type Standard Supports.
(b) Elastic analysis based on maximum stress theory
shall be used in the design of Plate- and Shell-Type Sup-
ports of Class 2, 3, and MC construction. Supports for NF-3200 DESIGN RULES FOR PLATE-
Class 2 vessels designed to NC-3200 shall be designed in AND SHELL-TYPE SUPPORTS
accordance with Class 1 requirements. NF-3210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NF-3211 Basis for Determining Stresses in Design
NF-3143 Linear-Type Supports — Analysis by Analysis
Procedure The theory of failure used in the rules of this Subsection
(a) The analysis procedure shall comply with for combining stresses for the design of Class 1 Plate- and
NF-3143(a)(1) or (a)(2). Shell-Type Supports is the maximum shear stress theory;
for Class 2, 3, and MC Plate- and Shell-Type Supports, it
(1) Elastic analysis based on maximum stress theory
is the maximum stress theory.
in accordance with the rules of NF-3300 shall be used for
the design of Linear-Type Supports for Class 1, 2, and 3
and MC construction. NF-3212 Definitions
(2) Limit analysis in accordance with the procedures Terms used in the design of Plate- and Shell-Type Sup-
of NF-3340 shall be used in the design of Linear-Type ports by stress analysis are defined in NF-3121 and in
Supports for Class 1, 2, and 3 and MC construction when NF-3212.1 below.
members and their connections are subject to high cycle
NF-3212.1 Stress Intensity.1 Stress intensity is defined
fatigue as defined in NF-3331.
as twice the maximum shear stress. The stress intensity is
(b) High cycle fatigue analysis in accordance with pro-
cedures of NF-3330 shall be used in the design of Linear- 1
This definition of stress intensity is not related to the definition of
Type Supports for Class 1 construction. stress intensity applied in the field of fracture mechanics.
33
the difference between the algebraically largest principal NF-3221.4 Limit Analysis. The limits on primary
stress and the algebraically smallest principal stress at a membrane plus primary bending stress intensity
given point. Tensile stresses are considered positive and [NF-3221.1(b)] need not be satisfied at a specific location
compressive stresses are considered negative. if it can be shown by means of limit analysis or by tests
that the specified loadings do not exceed two-thirds of the
lower bound collapse load for Design Loadings and Service
NF-3220 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1 Level A and B Loadings, and do not exceed 0.8 times the
lower bound collapse load for Service Level C Loadings.
NF-3221 Stress Limits The rules of Appendix F (Section III, Division 1, Appendi-
Stress limits for elements of Class 1 supports are given ces) shall apply for Service Level D Loadings. For materi-
in this paragraph. Stress limits for bolts and welds are als in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1 for which allowable
given in NF-3225 and NF-3226. General requirements con- stresses, or stress intensities, may reach 90% of the yield
cerning stress determinations, definitions, derivations of strength Sy at temperature, the specified loading shall not
stress intensities, and classification of stresses are given in exceed the product of the applicable permanent strain lim-
NF-3210. iting factor of Table Y-2, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1
Plate- and Shell-Type Supports may be designed by times the lower bound collapse load.
either elastic or limit analysis, stress intensity limits for
which are given in NF-3221.1 through NF-3221.4. NF-3222 Derivation of Stress Intensities
NF-3221.1 Design Limits. The stress intensity limits One requirement for the acceptability of a design
which must be satisfied for the Design Loadings stated in (NF-3130) is that the calculated stress intensities shall not
the Design Specification are the two limits of this paragraph exceed specified allowable limits. These limits differ
and the Special Stress Limits of NF-3223. The design stress depending on the stress category (primary, secondary, etc.)
intensity values Sm are given in NF-3224. from which the stress intensity is derived. This paragraph
(a) General primary membrane stress intensity Pm is describes the procedure for the calculation of the stress
derived from the average value across the thickness of a intensities which are subject to the specified limits. The
section of the general primary stresses produced by speci- steps in the procedure are stipulated in NF-3222(a)
fied Design Mechanical Loads, but excluding all secondary through (e).
stresses. Averaging is to be applied to the stress compo- (a) At the point on the support which is being investi-
nents prior to determination of the stress intensity values. gated, choose an orthogonal set of coordinates, such as
The allowable value of this stress intensity is Sm at the tangential, longitudinal, and radial, and designate them by
Design Temperature. the subscripts t, l, and r. The stress components in these
(b) Primary membrane plus primary bending stress directions are then designated ␴t , ␴l , and ␴r for direct
intensity Pm + Pb is derived from the highest value across stresses and Tlt , Tlr , and Tr t for shear stresses.
the thickness of a section of the general membrane stresses (b) Calculate the stress components for each type of
plus primary bending stresses produced by the specified loading to which the item will be subjected and assign
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Design Mechanical Loads, but excluding all secondary each set of stress values to one or a group of the following
stresses. The allowable value of this stress intensity is categories:
1.5Sm. (1) general primary membrane stress Pm (NF-3121.7)
(2) primary bending stress Pb (NF-3121.8)
NF-3221.2 Service Level A Through D Service Lim- (3) secondary stress Q (NF-3121.3)
its. The rules and stress limits which must be satisfied in (c) For each category, calculate the algebraic sum of
an elastic analysis for any Level A through D Service the values of ␴t that result from the different types of
Loadings stated in the Design Specification are those given loadings, and similarly for the other five stress components.
in NF-3221.1 and NF-3223 multiplied by the appropriate Certain combinations of the categories must also be con-
stress intensity limit factor from Tables NF-3522(b)-1 and sidered.
NF-3622(b)-1 for the particular loading and stress cate- (d) Translate the stress components for the t, l, and r
gories. directions into principal stresses ␴1, ␴2, and ␴3.
NF-3221.3 Test Limits. The rules and stress limits (e) Calculate the stress differences S12, S23, and S31 from
which must be satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the following equations:
the Design Specification are those given in NF-3221.1 and S12 p ␴1 − ␴2
NF-3223 multiplied by the appropriate stress intensity limit S23 p ␴2 − ␴3
factor in Tables NF-3522(b)-1 and NF-3622(b)-1 under
Test Loadings. S31 p ␴3 − ␴1
34
The stress intensity S is the largest absolute value of S12, NF-3223.4 Applications of Elastic Analysis for
S23, and S31. Stresses Beyond the Yield Strength. Certain of the allow-
able stresses permitted in the design criteria are such that
NOTE: Membrane stress intensity is derived from the stress components
the maximum stress calculated on an elastic basis may
averaged across the thickness of the section. The averaging shall be
performed at the component stress level in NF-3222(b) or (c). exceed the yield strength of the material.
NF-3224 Design Stress Values

NF-3223 Special Stress Limits
The design stress intensity values Sm are given in Tables
The following deviations from the basic stress limits are 2A, 2B, and 4, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1 for support
provided to cover special Service Loadings or configura- material. Values for intermediate temperatures may be
tions. Some of these deviations are more restrictive and found by interpolation. Values of yield strength and ulti-
some are less restrictive than the basic stress limits.In cases
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
mate tensile strength are given in Tables Y-1 and U, Section

of conflict between these requirements and the basic stress II, Part D, Subpart 1, respectively. Values of the coefficient
limits, the rules of this paragraph take precedence for the of thermal expansion and of the modulus of elasticity are
particular situations to which they apply. given in Tables TE and TM, Section II, Part D, Subpart 2.
NF-3223.1 Bearing Loads
(a) The average bearing stress for resistance to crushing NF-3225 Design of Bolting
under the maximum load, experienced as a result of Design NF-3225.1 Design Limits. The rules and stress limits
Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, except that must be satisfied for any Design Loading stated in the
those for which Level D Limits are designated, shall be Design Specification are those given in NF-3324.6.
limited to Sy at temperature, except that when the distance
to a free edge is larger than the distance over which the NF-3225.2 Service Limits, Level A Through D. The
bearing load is applied, a stress of 1.5Sy at temperature is rules and stress limits which must be satisfied for any
permitted. Level A through D Service Loading stated in the Design
(b) When bearing loads are applied near free edges, Specification are those given in NF-3324.6 multiplied by
such as at a protruding ledge, the possibility of a shear the appropriate stress limit factor for the particular service
failure shall be considered. The average shear stress shall loading level and stress category specified in Table NF-
be limited to 0.6S m in the case of primary stress 3225.2-1. This product shall not exceed the yield strength
(NF-3121.2) and 0.5Sy in the case of primary stress plus of the material at temperature.
secondary stress (NF-3121.9). NF-3225.3 Test Limits. The rules and stress limits that
(c) When considering bearing stresses in pins and simi- must be satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the Design
lar members, the Sy at temperature is applicable, except Specification are those given in NF-3324.6 multiplied by
that a value of 1.5Sy may be used if no credit is given to the appropriate stress limit factor for the particular Service
the bearing area within one pin diameter from a plate edge. Loading Level and stress category specified in Table NF-
NF-3223.2 Pure Shear 3225.2-1.
(a) The average primary shear stress across a section NF-3225.4 Friction-Type Joints. Multiplying factors
loaded in pure shear, experienced as a result of Design normally used to increase the allowable limits for Service
Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, except Level B, C, and D are not applicable to friction-type joints
those for which Level D Limits are designated, shall be [see NF-3324.6(a)(4)].
limited to 0.6Sm.
(b) The maximum primary shear, experienced as a result NF-3226 Design of Welded Joints
of Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Load-
NF-3226.1 Permissible Types of Welded Joints in
ings except those for which Level D Limits are designated,
Plate- and Shell-Type Supports. All welded joints in
exclusive of stress concentration at the periphery of a solid
Plate- and Shell-Type Supports shall be continuous and
circular section in torsion, shall be limited to 0.8Sm. Primary
shall be of one of the types listed in NF-3226.1(a) through
plus secondary shear stresses shall be converted to stress
(c). Typical examples of those permitted types are shown
intensities (equal to two times pure shear stress) and as
in Fig. NF-3226.1-1. Fillet and partial penetration welds
such shall not exceed the basic stress limits of Tables NF-
shall meet the requirements of NF-3324.5(d), except that
3522(b)-1 and NF-3622(b)-1.
NF-3324.5(d)(7) does not apply.
NF-3223.3 Triaxial Stresses. The algebraic sum of the (a) Butt Joints. Butt joints shall be one of the following:
three primary principal stresses (␴1 + ␴2 + ␴3) shall not (1) full penetration, single or double welded [Fig.
exceed four times the tabulated value of Sm. NF-3226.1-1, sketches (a-1) and (a-2)].
35
TABLE NF-3225.2-1
STRESS LIMIT FACTORS
FOR CLASS 1, 2, 3, AND MC BOLT DESIGN BY ANALYSIS
Stress Limit Factors for Loading Levels Stated in Design Specification [Note (1)]
Stress Service Service Service Service Test

Category Design Level A Level B Level C Level D Loading
Tension Kbo p 1.0 Kbo p 1.0 Kbo p 1.15 Kbo p 1.25 [Note (2)] Kbo p 1.25
and shear
GENERAL NOTE: Kbo p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable tensile and shear stresses
NOTES:
(1) Not to be used for friction type connections.
(2) Use Appendix F.
(2) partial penetration, double welded [Fig. NF- (4) the applicable welds may be square groove, bevel
3226.1-1, sketch (b)]. groove, J groove, flare V groove or flare bevel groove
(3) the applicable welds may be either square groove,
NF-3226.2 Stress Intensities and Stress Limits for
V groove, bevel groove, J groove, U groove, flare V groove,
Welded Joints in Plate- and Shell-Type Supports
or flare bevel groove [see Fig. NF-3226.1(a)-1].
(a) Design Limits. The stress intensity and allowable
(4) when angle joints are used for connecting a transi-
stress limits which must be satisfied for welds for the
tion in diameter to a cylinder, the angle ␣ of Fig. NF-
Design Loadings stated in the Design Specification shall
3226.1-1, sketch (f) shall not exceed 30 deg.
be the following:
(5) A tapered transition having a length not less than
(1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The stress inten-
three times the offset between the adjacent surfaces of
sity limits for full penetration groove welds shall not exceed
abutting sections, as shown in Fig. NF-3226.1(a)-2, shall
the applicable stress intensity value for the base metal
be provided at joints between sections that differ in thick-
being joined, as specified in NF-3221.1 and Table NF-
ness by more than one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner
3324.5(a)-1. See NF-3111.
section or by more than 1⁄8 in. (3 mm), whichever is less.
(2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds
The transition may be formed by any process that will
provide a uniform taper. The weld may be partly or entirely (a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or
in the tapered section, or adjacent to it. This paragraph Shear on Effective Throat. The stress intensity and stress
also applies when there is a reduction in thickness within limits shall be the same as those for the base metal as
a spherical shell, or cylindrical course or plate. required in NF-3221.1.
(6) When the use of backing rings will result in unde- (b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective
sirable conditions such as severe stress or corrosion, the Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in Table NF-
requirements of NF-4240 shall be met. 3324.5(a)-1.
(b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the (3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limits for fillet
following: welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
(1) full penetration, as shown in Fig. NF-3226.1-1, (b) Service Limits, Levels A, B, C, and D, and Test. The
sketch (d-1) rules and stress limits that must be satisfied for welds for
(2) partial penetration with a fillet weld as shown in any Level A, B, C, and D Service and Test Loadings stated
Fig. NF-3226.1-1, sketches (d-2) and (d-3) in the Design Specification are those given in NF-3226.2(a)
multiplied by the appropriate base material stress limit
(3) the applicable welds are fillet, square groove, V
factor given in Table NF-3622(b)-1 for Piping Supports
groove, bevel groove, U groove, J groove, flare V groove
and Table NF-3522(b)-1 for Component Supports.
and flare bevel groove
(c) The effective sizes of welds shall be as given in
(c) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following:
NF-3324.5(d) and NF-3324.5(f).
(1) full penetration, Fig. NF-3226.1-1, sketches (c)
and (g) NF-3226.3 Consideration of Lamellar Tearing.
(2) partial penetration, double welded with or without Welded joint configurations causing significant through-
additional fillet welds, Fig. NF-3226.1-1, sketch (e) thickness tensile stress [as defined in NF-1215(b)] during
(3) partial penetration, single welded between the end fabrication and/or service on rolled product forms should
surface of a closed tubular section or a closed formed be avoided. However, if this type of construction is used,
section, Fig. NF-3226.1-1, sketch (h) the designer should consider one or several of the following
36
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

FIG. NF-3226.1-1 PERMISSIBLE WELDED JOINTS FOR CLASS 1 PLATE- AND SHELL-TYPE SUPPORTS
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
37
FIG. NF-3226.1(a)-1 TYPICAL WELD DETAILS REFERENCED
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
38
FIG. NF-3226.1(a)-2 BUTT WELDING OF PLATES OF UNEQUAL THICKNESS
factors that may reduce the susceptibility of the joint to ␴1 + ␴2 ≤ 1.5S (2)
experience lamellar tearing and provide documentation,
including fabrication requirements, in the Design Output where
Documents: S p allowable stress value, ksi (MPa), from the appli-
(a) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent practical. cable table of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, as
(b) Select materials that are resistant to lamellar tearing. referenced in Table NF-2121(a)-1
(c) Invoke any of the special fabrication requirements ␴1 p membrane stress, ksi (MPa), which is the average
of NF-4441. stress across the solid section under consideration.
It includes the effects of discontinuities, but not
local stress concentrations.
NF-3250 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 ␴2 p bending stress, ksi (MPa), which is the linear vary-
AND MC
ing portion of the stress across the solid section
Plate- and Shell-Type Supports may be designed by under consideration. It excludes the effects of dis-
either elastic or limit analysis, limits for which are given continuities and concentrations.
in the following subparagraphs. Limits for bolts and welds
are given in NF-3255 and NF-3256. For general require- NF-3251.2 Service Loadings — Service Level A
ments and definitions, see NF-3100 and NF-3210. Through D. The rules and stress limits that must be satis-
fied in an elastic analysis for any Level A through D Service
Loading stated in the Design Specification are those given
NF-3251 Stress Limits for Design Loadings in NF-3251.1 multiplied by the appro-
NF-3251.1 Design Loadings. The stress2 limits are sati- priate stress limit factor specified in Tables NF-3552(b)-1
sfied for the Design Loadings (NCA-2142.1) stated in the and NF-3652(b)-1.
Design Specifications if the requirements of eqs. (1) and
(2) are met. NF-3251.3 Test Loadings. The rules and stress limits
that must be satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the
␴1 ≤ 1.0S (1) Design Specification are those given for Design Loadings
in NF-3251.1 multiplied by the appropriate stress limit
2
Stress means the maximum normal stress (principal stress). factor specified in Tables NF-3552(b)-1 and NF-3652(b)-1.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
39
NF-3251.4 Limit Analysis. The limits for Class 1 Plate- meet the requirements of NF-3324.5(e). Lap joints shall
and Shell-Type Supports designed by limit analysis apply. meet the requirements of NF-3324.3.
(a) Butt Joints. Butt joints shall be one of the following:
NF-3252 Special Stress Limits (1) full penetration, single and double welded, Fig.
NF-3256.1-1, sketches (a-1) and (a-2).
The following deviations from the basic stress limits are
(2) partial penetration, double welded, Fig. NF-
provided to cover special Service Loadings or configura-
3256.1-1, sketch (b).
tions. Some of these deviations are more restrictive and
(3) when angle joints are used for connecting a transi-
some are less restrictive than the basic stress limits. In
tion in diameter to a cylinder, the angle ␣ of Fig. NF-
cases of conflict between these requirements and the basic
3256.1-1, sketch (n) shall not exceed 30 deg.
stress limits, the rules of this paragraph take precedence
for the particular situations to which they apply. (4) A tapered transition having a length not less than
three times the offset between the adjacent surfaces of
NF-3252.1 Bearing Loads abutting sections, as shown in Fig. NF-3226.1(a)-2, shall
(a) The average bearing stress for resistance to crushing be provided at joints between sections that differ in thick-
under the maximum load, experienced as a result of Design ness by more than one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner
Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, shall section or by more than 1⁄8 in. (3 mm), whichever is less.
be limited to Sy at temperature, except that when the dis-
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The transition may be formed by any process that will

tance to a free edge is larger than the distance over which provide a uniform taper. The weld may be partly or entirely
the bearing load is applied, a stress of 1.5Sy at temperature in the tapered section or adjacent to it.
is permitted. (5) When the use of backing rings will result in unde-
(b) When bearing loads are applied near free edges, sirable conditions such as severe stress or corrosion,the
such as at a protruding ledge, the possibility of a shear requirements of NF-4240 shall be met.
failure shall be considered. In the case of load controlled (b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the
stress only, the average shear stress shall be limited to 0.6S
following:
in the case of primary stress (NF-3121.2).
(1) full penetration, as shown in Fig. NF-3256.1-1,
(c) When considering bearing stresses in pins and simi-
sketch (c)
lar members, the Sy at temperature value is applicable,
except that a value of 1.5Sy may be used if no credit is (2) partial penetration with a fillet weld as shown in
given to the bearing area within one pin diameter from a Fig. NF-3256.1-1, sketches (d) and (e)
plate edge. (c) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following:
(1) full penetration, single or double welded, Fig. NF-
NF-3252.2 Pure Shear 3256.1-1, sketches (f-1), (f-2), and (h)
(a) The average primary shear stress across a section
(2) partial penetration, with or without additional fil-
loaded in pure shear, experienced as a result of Design
let welds, Fig. NF-3256.1-1, sketch (g)
Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, shall
(3) partial penetration, single welded between a plate
be limited to 0.6S.
and the end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed
(b) The maximum primary shear, experienced as a result
formed section, Fig. NF-3256.1-1, sketch (j)
of Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Load-
ings exclusive of stress concentration at the periphery of (4) fillet, double welded, Fig. NF-3256.1-1, sketch
a solid circular section in torsion, shall be limited to 0.8S. (k-1); single welded when double members are used, Fig.
NF-3256.1-1, sketch (k-2)
(5) fillet, single welded between a flat surface and
NF-3255 Design of Bolting the end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed
The provisions of NF-3225 apply. formed section, Fig. NF-3256.1-1, sketch (l)
(d) Lap Joints. Lap joints shall be fillet, double welded,
NF-3256 Design of Welded Joints Fig. NF-3256.1-1, sketch (m).
NF-3256.1 Permissible Types of Welded Joints in (e) The applicable welds for the joints permitted in
Plate- and Shell-Type Supports. All welded joints in NF-3256.1(a) through (d) are
Plate- and Shell-Type Supports shall be continuous and (1) square groove, bevel groove, J groove, flare bevel
shall be of one of the types listed in NF-3256.1(a) through groove, U groove and V groove
(d). Typical examples of those permitted types are shown (2) plug and slot welds are permitted in NF-3256.1(c)
in Fig. NF-3256.1-1. Fillet and partial penetration welds and (d) only
shall meet the requirements of NF-3324.5(d), except that (3) fillet welds are permitted in NF-3256.1(c)(4),
NF-3324.5(d)(7) does not apply. Plug and slot welds shall (c)(5), and (d) only
40
FIG. NF-3256.1-1 PERMISSIBLE WELDED JOINTS FOR CLASS 2, 3, AND MC PLATE- AND
SHELL-TYPE SUPPORTS
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
41
NF-3256.2 Allowable Stress Limits NF-3265 Design of Bolting

(a) Design Limits. The allowable stress limits which The provisions of NF-3225 apply.
must be satisfied for the Design Loadings stated in the
Design Specification shall be the following:
NF-3266 Design of Welded Joints
(1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The allowable
stress limits for full penetration groove welds shall not The types of welded joints shall be as stipulated in
exceed the applicable allowable stress value for the base NF-3256 for Class 2 and MC supports, except that for
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
metal being jointed, as specified in NF-3251.1 and Table groove welded T-joints, groove welded corner joints, and
NF-3324.5(a)-1. fillet welded T-joints, as listed in NF-3256.1(a)(2) and
(2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds (a)(3), the welds may be intermittent instead of continuous.
(a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or Intermittent fillet welds shall meet the requirements of
Shear on Effective Throat. The allowable stress limits shall NF-3324.5(d)(7). The allowable stress limits shall be as
be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. stipulated in NF-3256.2.
(b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective
Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in Table NF- NF-3270 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS
3324.5(a)-1.
(3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limit for fillet Supports may be designed by experimental stress analy-
welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5 (a)-1. sis in accordance with Appendix II (Section III, Division
1, Appendices).
07 (b) Service Limits. Level A Through D, and Test. The
rules and stress limits which must be satisfied for welds
for any Level A through D Service and Test Loading stated NF-3280 DESIGN BY LOAD RATING
in the Design Specification are those given in NF-3356.2(a) NF-3281 Procedure for Load Rating
multiplied by the appropriate base material stress limit
factor given in Table NF-3652(b)-1 for Piping Supports The procedure for load rating shall consist of imposing
and Table NF-3552(b)-1 for Component Supports. a total load on one or more duplicate full-size samples of
a support equal to or less than the load under which the
NF-3256.3 Effective Size. The effective sizes of welds support fails to perform its required function. Full-size
shall be as given in NF-3324.5(d) through (f). samples composed of various parts may have each part or
a number of parts load rated, provided that all parts in the
NF-3256.4 Consideration of Lamellar Tearing. load path are either load rated or otherwise qualified per
Welded joint configurations causing significant through- NF-3200, or by experimental stress analysis. When parts
thickness tensile stress [as defined in NF-1215(b)] during are connected by bolting or welding, the connection shall
fabrication and/or service on rolled product forms should be either load rated or qualified per NF-3225 or NF-3226.
be avoided. However, if this type of construction is used, Should more than one part be load rated in a single load
the designer should consider one or several of the following test, then the load rating equations of NF-3280 shall be
factors that may reduce the susceptibility of the joint to evaluated for each part using the part’s Sy (act) and Su (act)
experience lamellar tearing and provide documentation, values. The part having the lowest load rating shall estab-
including fabrication requirements, in the Design Output lish the load rating for the combination of parts. A single
Documents: test sample is permitted but, in that case, the load ratings
(a) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent practical. shall be reduced by 10%. Otherwise, tests shall be run on a
(b) Select materials that are resistant to lamellar tearing. statistically significant number of samples. The permissible
(c) Invoke any of the special fabrication requirements types of welded joints shall be as permitted for the specific
of NF-4441. class of construction in NF-3226.1, NF-3256.1, and
NF-3266. The full-size sample shall be fabricated for test-
ing using welds not exceeding weld sizes stipulated in the
Design Drawings. Bolted joints in the test sample shall
NF-3260 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 3 be made up using the lowest strength bolt material and
minimum edge distance allowed by the specification.
NF-3261 Stress Limits
NF-3282 Load Ratings in Relation to Design
The design of Class 3 supports shall be in accordance
Service and Test Loadings
with the requirements of NF-3250 using one of the design
procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1 for Class 3 The load rating for Design Loadings shall be determined
construction. in accordance with the requirements for Service Level A
42
limits. The load ratings for Service Loadings for which determined for Service Levels A through C by the methods
Level A, B, or C Limits have been designated shall be of NF-3282.2. In addition, for cases where buckling gov-
determined by means of the equations in the following erns, TLu shall be corrected for the ratio of Young’s Modu-
subparagraphs. For Level D Limits, see Appendix F of lus at the Design Temperature to Young’s Modulus at the
Section III, Division 1, Appendices. The load rating for test temperature. The load rating shall be determined by
Test Loadings shall be determined in accordance with the the following equations:
requirements for Service Level B limits.
Design and Level A Limits
NF-3282.1 Nomenclature. The symbols used in this
paragraph are defined as follows: Design and Level A Limits
K l p load rating coefficient for support in com- load rating p 0.50 K l ⴛ TLu
pression
Test and Level B Limits
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S p allowable stress value at the Design Tempera-
ture (NF-3112.1) from the applicable tables of
load rating p 0.50 K l ⴛ TLu
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, ksi (MPa)
Su p specified minimum tensile strength of the Level C Limits
material used in the support as given in the
applicable tables of Section II, Part D, Subpart load rating p 0.50 K l ⴛ TLu
1, ksi (MPa)
K l p 1.0 for elastic buckling
Su(act) p actual tensile strength of the material used in
the part or support which had reached ultimate Sy
capacity during the test, psi (MPa) Kl p for inelastic buckling
Sy (act)
Sy(act) p actual yield strength of the material used in
the part or support which yielded during the NF-3282.4 Alternative Load Rating Method Using
test, psi (MPa) TLy or TLu Test Results Only. Either TLy or TLu test
TLu p support test load at which a substantial increase results may be used to establish a support load rating,
in load displacement results in zero or negative provided the load rating as determined by the method of
increase in actual support load NF-3282.2 or NF-3282.3 is modified as follows:
TLy p support test load at or below yield (a) For load rating based on TLy test results only
(1) for supports constructed of materials having defi-
NF-3282.2 Plate- and Shell-Type Supports. The load nitely determinable yield points and specified minimum
ratings for Plate- and Shell-Type Supports for the Service Sy /Su ratios not greater than 0.625, the load rating shall be
Loadings shall be determined by the following equations: multiplied by 0.83. If Sy (act) of the material is not known,
Design and Level A Limits (lower of the two values) 150% of the material specified minimum yield strength
shall be assumed as the Sy /Sy (act) in place of multiplier 0.83
S (2) for supports constructed of carbon steel with spec-
load rating(yield) p TLy ⴛ 1.0 (5)
Sy(act) ified minimum tensile strengths of not over 70,000 psi (485
S MPa), Sy (act) shall be increased by 5,000 psi (34 MPa) prior
load rating(ult.) p TLu ⴛ 1.0 to determining the load rating
Su(act)
(3) for all other materials the determined load rating
Test and Level B Limits (lower of the two values) shall be multiplied by 0.67
S
load rating(yield) p TLy ⴛ 1.33 (6) For supports loaded in compression, a TLu test shall be
Sy (act)
performed with the compressive load rating determined in
S accordance with NF-3282.3.
load rating(ult.) p TLu ⴛ 1.33
Su(act) (b) For load rating based on TLu test results, the deter-
mined load rating shall be multiplied by 0.50.
Level C Limits (lower of the two values)
S
Sy (act)
NF-3300 DESIGN RULES FOR LINEAR-
TYPE SUPPORTS
S
Su(act) NF-3310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NF-3282.3 Supports Loaded in Compression. The This Subarticle provides rules for the design of Linear-
load rating for supports loaded in compression shall be Type Supports by either linear elastic analysis (NF-3320)
43
or plastic (limit) analysis (NF-3340). Linear elastic analyti- (a) Design Limits. The rules and stress limits that must
cal procedures are also provided (NF-3330) for the design be satisfied in an elastic analysis for any Design Loading
of members and connections which will be subjected to shall be stated in the Design Specification.
high cycle fatigue conditions in service. (b) Service Limits, Level A Through D. The rules and
stress limits which must be satisfied in an elastic analysis
NF-3311 Design Considerations for any Level A through D Service Loading stated in the
NF-3311.1 Linear Elastic Analysis. The rules for lin- Design Specification are those given in NF-3321 multiplied
ear elastic analysis are based on the yield strength values by the appropriate stress limit factor from Tables NF-
at temperature of the materials used in constructing linear- 3523(b)-1 and NF-3623(b)-1 for the particular loading and
type supports that are set forth in Tables 4 and Y-1 of stress category.
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1. The allowable stresses are (c) Test Limits. The rules and stress limits that must
determined in NF-3320 by applying factors of safety depen- be satisfied for any Test Loadings stated in the Design
dent on the structural member involved to these specified Specification are those given in NF-3321 multiplied by the
yield strength values. appropriate stress limit factor in Tables NF-3523(b)-1 and
Sm values for bolting materials listed in Table 4, Section NF-3623(b)-1 under Test Loadings.
II, Part D, Subpart 1 are based on (1⁄3)Sy. Multiply Sm by
three to arrive at Sy values for the material [round up to
next higher 0.5 ksi (1 MPa)] if an Sy value for the material NF-3313 Nomenclature and Numbering of
is needed. Equations
NF-3311.2 High Cycle Fatigue Analysis. The rules NF-3313.1 Nomenclature. Except where symbols are
for designing Linear-Type Supports given in NF-3330 are used in the text of the paragraphs that follow to represent
essentially the same as those given in NF-3320 for linear the value of complex algebraic expressions, the nomencla-
elastic analysis, except that the maximum range of stress, ture adopted in NF-3300 is defined as follows:
namely, the difference between the minimum and maxi- A p gross area of an axially loaded compression mem-
mum value of the stress throughout each cycle and the ber, in.2 (mm2)
frequency with which the support will be subjected to this Ab p nominal body area of a fastener, in.2 (mm2); area
range of stress, shall be taken into consideration when so of an upset rod based upon the major diameter of
stipulated by the Design Specification (NCA-3250). its threads, i.e., the diameter of a coaxial cylinder
NF-3311.3 Limit Analysis. The rules for limit (plastic) that would bound the crests of the upset threads,
analysis given in NF-3340 may be used as an alternative in.2 (mm2)
to the linear elastic analysis method. These rules permit Ae p effective net area of an axially loaded tension
proportioning Linear-Type Supports on the basis of limit member, in.2 (mm2)
design by determining their lower bound collapse loads. Af p area of compression flange, in.2 (mm2)
The requirements set forth in NF-3320 governing allowable An p net area of an axially loaded tension member, in.2
stresses to be used in designing Linear-Type Supports are (mm2)
waived when the limit design procedure is employed, but Ast p cross-sectional area of stiffener or pair of stiffen-
all other pertinent provisions of NF-3320 shall apply. ers, in.2 (mm2)
NF-3311.4 Basis for Determining Stress in Design by Aw p area of girder web, in.2 (mm2)
Analysis. The theory of failure used in the rules for the C p ratio of bolt tensile strength to tensile strength of
design of Linear-Type Supports is the maximum stress connected part
theory. In the maximum stress theory, the controlling stress Cb p bending coefficient dependent upon moment gra-
is the maximum principal stress. dient
Cc p slenderness ratio separating elastic and inelastic
NF-3311.5 Terms Relating to Design by Analysis.
buckling
Terms used in the design of Linear-Type Supports by stress
analysis are defined in NF-3313. C′c p effective column slenderness ratio
Cm p coefficient applied to bending term in interaction
equation and dependent upon column curvature
NF-3312 Analysis Methods
caused by applied moments
Linear-Type Supports may be designed by either elastic Ct p reduction coefficient in computing effective net
or limit analysis, limits for which are given in NF-3312.1. area of an axially loaded tension member
NF-3312.1 Elastic Analysis. In elastic analysis it is Cv p ratio of critical web stress, according to the linear
assumed that all component and support stiffnesses remain buckling theory, to the shear yield stress of web
constant. material
44
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

C1 p increment used in computing minimum spacing p the computed force delivered by the flange or
of oversized and slotted holes moment connection plate, multiplied by five-
C2 p increment used in computing minimum edge dis- thirds for Level A loads and multiplied by four-
tance for oversized and slotted holes thirds for Level B, C, and D loads, kips (N)
D p factor dependent upon type of transverse stiffeners Pcr p maximum strength of axially loaded compression
p outside diameter of tubular members, in. (mm) member or beam, kips (N)
E p modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi (MPa) Pe p Euler buckling load, kips (N)
Fa p axial compressive stress permitted in the absence Ps p maximum slip resistance of the joint, lb (N)
of bending moment, ksi (MPa) Py p axial plastic load, equal to member area times
specified minimum yield stress, kips (N)
Fas p axial compressive stress permitted in the absence
Qa p ratio of effective area of an axially loaded member
of bending moment, for bracing and other second-
to its total area
ary members, ksi (MPa)
Qs p axial stress reduction factor
Fb p bending stress permitted in the absence of axial
R p reaction or concentrated transverse load applied
force, ksi (MPa)
to beam or girder, kips (N); radius, in. (mm)
F′b p allowable bending stress in compression flange
Su p tabulated values of ultimate tensile strength of
of plate girders as reduced for hybrid girders or
material at temperature (Table U, Section II, Part
because of large web depth–thickness ratio, ksi
D, Subpart 1), ksi (MPa)
(MPa)
Sy p yield strength at temperature (Table Y-1, Section
F′e p Euler stress divided by factor of safety, ksi (MPa) II, Part D, Subpart 1), ksi (MPa)
Fp p allowable bearing stress on the projected area of Tb p specific pretension of a high strength bolt, kips (N)
bolts or pins, or on contact area of milled surfaces Ti p initial clamping force per bolt, lb (N)
and ends of rollers, rockers, or fitted bearing stif- Vu p shear produced by required factored loading, ulti-
feners at temperature, ksi (MPa) mate load, kips (N)
Fsr p stress range, ksi (MPa) Y p ratio of yield stress of web steel to yield stress of
Ft p allowable tensile stress, ksi (MPa) stiffener steel
Ftb p allowable tensile stress at temperature, ksi (MPa) Zx p plastic section modulus for axis of bending, in.3
Fv p allowable shear stress, ksi (MPa) (mm3)
Fvb p allowable shear stress at temperature, ksi (MPa) a p clear distance between transverse stiffeners;
Fyc p column yield stress, ksi (MPa) dimension parallel to the direction of stress, Table
Fyst p stiffener yield stress, ksi (MPa) NF-3332.3-1, in. (mm)
K p effective length factor a′ p distance required at ends of welded partial length
L p span length cover plate to develop stress, in. (mm)
p distance from center of bolt hole to edge of con- b p actual width of stiffened and unstiffened compres-
sion elements, in. (mm)
nected part, in. (mm)
p dimensions normal to the direction of stress, Table
M p moment, in-kip (N-mm) (NF-3320); factored
NF-3332.3-1, in. (mm)
bending moment, in-kip (N-mm) (NF-3340)
be p effective width of stiffened compression element,
M′ p lesser of the factored moments at the ends of
in. (mm)
unbraced segment, in-kip (N-mm)
bf p flange width of rolled beam or plate girder, in.
M1 p smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam
(mm)
column, in-kip (N-mm) d p depth of beam or girder, in. (mm)
M2 p larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam p diameter of roller or rocker bearing, in. (mm)
column, in-kip (N-mm) p nominal diameter of fastener, in. (mm)
Mm p critical moment that can be resisted by a plasti- dc p column web depth clear of fillets, in. (mm)
cally designed member in the absence of axial e p horizontal displacement, in the direction of the
load, in-kip (N-mm) span, between top and bottom of simply supported
Mp p plastic moment, in-kip (N-mm) beam at its ends, in. (mm)
N p length of bearing of applied load, in. (mm) f p axial compression stress on member based on
P p force transmitted by a fastener, kips (N) effective area, ksi (MPa)
(NF-3320); factored axial load, kips (N) fa p computed axial stress, ksi (MPa)
(NF-3340); axial load, kips (N) (NF-3340) fb p computed bending stress, ksi (MPa)
Pbf p factored beam flange or connection plate force in f ′c p specified compression strength of concrete, ksi
a restrained connection (MPa)
45
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 2007 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NF
fp p computed bearing stress, ksi (MPa) ␣ p ratio of hybrid girder web yield stress to flange
ft p computed tensile stress, ksi (MPa) yield stress
fv p computed shear stress, ksi (MPa) ⌬ p displacement of the neutral axis of a loaded mem-
fvs p shear between girder web and transverse stiffen- ber from its position when the member is not
ers, kips /linear in. (N/mm) of single stiffener or loaded, in. (mm)
pair of stiffeners NF-3313.2 Numbering of Equations. A separate series
gp transverse spacing (gage) between successive of equation numbers is used for each paragraph and each
holes in line of stress, in. (mm) series, beginning with eq. (1).
hp clear distance between flanges of a beam or girder
at the section under investigation, in. (mm)
kp coefficient relating linear buckling strength of a
NF-3320 DESIGN BY LINEAR ELASTIC
plate to its dimensions and condition of edge
ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1
support
p also distance between outer face of column flange NF-3321 General Design Requirements
and web toe of its fillet if column is a rolled shape, NF-3321.1 Design and Service Conditions
or equivalent distance if column is a welded shape, (a) Except as otherwise provided in this Subarticle, all
in. (mm) items of the structure shall be so proportioned that the
ks p slip coefficient for the particular surface condition stress, ksi (MPa), for Design and Level A Service Limits,
taken from Table NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1 shall not exceed the values of NF-3322. For Level B, C,
lp for beams, distance between cross section braced and D Service Limits, allowable stresses may be increased
against twist or lateral displacement of the com- by the factors shown in Tables NF-3523(b)-1 and NF-
pression flange, in. (mm) 3623(b)-1. Bearing-type stress limits are excluded from
p for columns, actual unbraced length of member, rules for Level D Service Limits.
in., unsupported length of lacing bar, in. (mm) (b) To avoid column buckling in compression members,
lb p actual unbraced length in plane of bending, in. local instability associated with compression flange buck-
(mm) ling in flexural members, and web buckling in plate girders,
lcr p critical unbraced length adjacent to plastic hinge, the allowable stress shall be limited to two-thirdsof the
in. (mm) critical buckling stress.
m p number of shear planes per bolt NF-3321.2 Design for High Cycle Fatigue Condi-
n p number of bolts in the joint tions. Design for high cycle fatigue conditions shall be in
r p governing radius of gyration, in. (mm) accordance with the requirements of NF-3330, using the
rb p radius of gyration about axis of concurrent bend- allowable stresses of NF-3322 as modified by NF-3332.4.
ing, in. (mm)
rc p radius of gyration of a section comprising the
compression flange plus one-third of the compres- NF-3322 Design Requirements for Structural Steel
sion web area, taken about an axis in the plane Members
of the web, in. (mm) NF-3322.1 Allowable Stresses — Design and Level
ry p radius of gyration of a member about its weak A Service Conditions
axis, in. (mm) (a) Stress in Tension. The allowable stress in tension
sp longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of shall be as given in NF-3322.1(a)(1) through (a)(3)
any two consecutive holes, in. (mm) (1) Except for pin-connected and threaded members,
tp girder, beam, or column web thickness, in. (mm); Ft shall be
thickness of a connected part, in. (mm)
p wall thickness of a tubular member, in. (mm) Ft p 0.60Sy (1)
tb p thickness of beam flange or moment connection but not more than 0.5 times Su on the effective net area.3
plate at rigid beam to column connection, in. (mm) (2) For pin-connected members, using the net area3
tf p flange thickness, in. (mm)
tl p thickness of thinner part joined by partial penetra- Ft p 0.45Sy (2)
tion groove weld, in. (mm)
xp subscript relating to bending about the strong prin- (3) For threaded parts in tension, see
cipal axis NF-3324.6(a)(1).
yp subscript relating to bending about the weakprin-
3
cipal axis For determination of effective net area, see NF-3322.8.
46
(b) Stress in Shear members, when l /r exceeds 120 the allowable stress in
(1) Except as provided in NF-3322.1(b)(2) and compression shall be
NF-3324.6(a)(2), on the cross-sectional area effective in
resisting shear Fa [eq. (4) or (5)]
Fas p (6)
冢冣
l
1.6 −
Fv p 0.40Sy (3a) 200r
The effective area in resisting shear of rolled and fabricated (2) Gross Sections of Columns Fabricated From Aus-
shapes may be taken as the overall depth times the web tenitic Stainless Steel. On the gross section of axially loaded
thickness. compression members whose cross sections meet the provi-
(2) At the beam end connections where the top flange sions of NF-3322.2(d) the allowable stress in compression
is coped, and in similar situations where failure might shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2)(a) and (c)(2)(b).
occur by shear along a plane through the fasteners, or by (a) Where Kl /r Is Less Than or Equal to 120.
a combination of shear along a plane through the fasteners
冢冣
plus tension along a perpendicular plane, on the effective Kl / r
Fa p Sy 0.47 − (6a)
area in resisting tearing failure shall be 444
Fv p 0.30Su (3b) (b) Where Kl /r Is Greater Than 120. The following

compressive stress limit applies to bracing and secondary
The effective area is the minimum net failure surface, members, as well as main members:
bounded by the bolt holes.
冢冣
(c) Stress in Compression. The allowable stress in com- Kl / r
Fa p Sy 0.40 − (6b)
pression shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1) through 600
(c)(3). The allowable compressive stress for columns,
except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel, shall (3) Member Elements Other Than Columns
be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compres- (a) Plate Girder Stiffeners. On the gross area of
sive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless plate girder stiffeners, the allowable stress in compression
steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allow- shall be
able compressive stress for member elements other than
Fa p 0.60Sy (7)
columns constructed of any material, including austenitic
stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3). (b) Webs of Rolled Shapes. On the web of rolled
(1) Gross Sections of Columns, Except Those Fabri- shapes at the toe of the fillet, the allowable stress in com-
cated of Austenitic Stainless Steel pression shall be
(a) Where Kl /r Is Less Than Cc. On the gross
section of axially loaded compression members whose Fa p 0.75Sy (8)
cross sections meet the provisions of NF-3322.2(d), when For the use of stiffeners to avoid web crippling, see
Kl /r (the largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced NF-3322.6(a).
segment as defined in NF-3322.2) is less thanCc , the allow-
(d) Stress in Bending. The allowable bending stress
able stress in compression shall be
resulting from tension and compression in structural mem-
[1 − (Kl / r)2 / 2Cc2 ] Sy bers shall be as required by NF-3322.1(d)(1) through (d)(6).
Fa p (4)
5 / 3 +[3(Kl / r) / 8Cc ] − [(Kl / r)3 / 8Cc3 ] (1) Compact Sections
(a) Tension and compression on extreme fibers of
where compact hot rolled or built-up members (except hybrid
beams and members made from 65 ksi (450 MPa) or greater
Cc p 冪 2␲ 2 E / Sy Sy material) symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of
(b) Where Kl /r Is Greater Than Cc. On the gross their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsec-
section of axially loaded compression members when Kl /r tion NF shall result in a maximum bending stress
exceeds Cc , the allowable stress in compression shall be
Fb p 0.66Sy (9)
12␲ 2 E
Fa p (5) In order to qualify, a member shall meet the requirements
23 (Kl / r)2 of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a)(1) through (d)(1)(a)(7).
(c) Where the Slenderness Ratio Exceeds 120. On (1) The flanges shall be continuously connected
the gross section4 of axially loaded bracing and secondary to the web or webs.
(2) The width–thickness ratio of unstiffened 07
4
For this case, K is taken as unity. projecting elements of the compression flange [as defined
47
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

in NF-3322.2(d)] shall not exceed 65 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, for nine-tenths of the negative moments produced by grav-
use 170 / 冪 Sy.). ity loading which are maximum at points of support, pro-
07 (3) The width–thickness ratio of stiffened ele- vided that for such members the maximum positive
ments of the compression flange [as defined in moment shall be increased by one-tenth of the average
NF-3322.2(d)] shall not exceed 190 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, negative moments. This reduction shall not applyto
use 500 / 冪 Sy.). moments produced by loading on cantilevers. If the nega-
(4) The depth–thickness ratio of the web or webs tive moment is resisted by a column rigidly framed to the
shall not exceed the value given by eq. (10) or (11), as beam or girder, the one-tenth reduction may be used in
applicable proportioning the column for the combined axial and bend-
ing loading, provided that the stress fa due to any concurrent
(U.S. Customary Units) axial load on the member does not exceed 0.15Fa .
d / t p 共640 / 冪 Sy 兲关1 − 3.74 共 fa / Sy 兲兴 (10) (2) Members With High Flange Width–Thickness 07
Ratio. Members that meet the requirements of
(SI Units) NF-3322.1(d)(1), except that bf /2tf exceeds 65 / 冪 Sy (For
d / t p 共1 680 / 冪 Sy 兲关1 − 3.74 共 fa / Sy 兲兴 (10) SI units, use 170 / 冪 Sy.) but is less than 95 / 冪 Sy (For SI
units, use 250 / 冪 Sy.), may be designed on the basis of an
when fa /Sy ≤ 0.16; allowable bending stress
(U.S. Customary Units) (U.S. Customary Units)

d / t p 257 / 冪 Sy (11)
Fb p Sy 关0.79 − 0.002 共 bf / 2tf 兲冪 Sy 兴 (13)
(SI Units)
(SI Units)
d / t p 673 / 冪 Sy (11)
Fb p Sy 关0.79 − 0.0008 共 bf / 2tf 兲冪 Sy 兴 (13)
when fa /Sy > 0.16.
(5) The laterally unsupported length of the com- (3) Doubly Symmetrical Members With Bending 07
pression flange of members other than box-shaped mem- About the Minor Axis. Tension and compression on extreme
bers shall not exceed the value 76bf / 冪 Sy (for SI units, use fibers of doubly symmetrical I and H shaped members
200bf / 冪 Sy) nor 20,000 /[(d /Af ) Sy] {for SI units, use [except for hybrid girders and members made from 65 ksi
138 000 /[(d /Af ) Sy]}. (450 MPa) or greater Sy material] which are bent about
(6) The laterally unsupported length of the com- their minor axis, meeting the requirements of
pression flange of a box-shaped member of rectangular NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (d)(1)(b); solid round and square
cross section, whose depth is not more than six times the bars; and solid rectangular sections bent about their weaker
width and whose flange thickness is not more than two axis shall not exceed a bending stress of
times the web thickness, shall not exceed the value
Fb p 0.75Sy (14)
(U.S. Customary Units)
Doubly symmetrical I and H shaped members bent about
关1,950 + 1,200 共M1 / M2 兲兴共b / Sy 兲 (12) their minor axis [except for hybrid girders and members
made from 65 ksi (450 MPa) or greater Sy material], meet-
ing the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where
(SI Units) bf /2tf exceeds 65 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, use 170 / 冪 Sy.) but is
关13 400 + 8 300 共M1 / M2 兲兴共b / Sy 兲 (12) less than 95 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, use 250 / 冪 Sy.), may be
designed on the basis of an allowable bending stress
except that it need not be less than 1,200(b /Sy) [for SI
units, use 8 300(b /Sy)]. (U.S. Customary Units)
(7) The diameter–thickness ratio of hollow cir-
cular sections shall not exceed 3,300 /Sy (for SI units, use Fb p Sy 关1.075 − 0.005 共 bf / 2tf 兲冪 Sy 兴 (15a)
23 000 /Sy).
(SI Units)
(b) Beams and girders (except for hybrid girders
and members made from 65 ksi (450 MPa) or greater Sy Fb p Sy 关1.075 − 0.002 共 bf / 2tf 兲冪 Sy 兴 (15a)
material) which meet the requirements of
NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a)(1) through (d)(1)(a)(7) and are contin-
uous over supports or are rigidly framed to columns by Rectangular tubular sections meeting the requirements of
means of high strength bolts or welds may be proportioned NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a)(1), (d)(1)(a)(3), and (d)(1)(a)(4), and
48
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

bent about their minor axis, may be designed on the basis (SI Units)
of an allowable bending stress
l / rc ≥ 冪共3 516 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / Sy
Fb p 0.66Sy (15b)
then
(4) Box-Type Flexural Members. Tension and com-
pression on extreme fibers of box-type flexural members
whose compression flange or web width–thickness ratio Fb p 共170 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / 共 l / rc 兲2 (18)
does not meet the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1), but
(SI Units)
does conform to the requirements of NF-3322.2(d), shall
not exceed a bending stress of Fb p 共1 172 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / 共 l / rc 兲2 (18)
Fb p 0.60Sy (16) When the compression flange is solid and approximately

rectangular in cross section and its area is not less than
Lateral torsional buckling need not be investigated for a that of the tension flange
box section whose depth is less than six times its width.Lat-
eral support requirements for box sections of larger depth– (U.S. Customary Units)
width ratios must be determined by special analysis. Fb p 共12 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / 共ld / Af 兲 (19)
(5) Miscellaneous Members
(a) Tension on extreme fibers of flexural members (SI Units)
not covered in NF-3322.1(d)(1) through (d)(4), shall not Fb p 共82 740 Cb 兲 / 共ld / Af 兲 (19)
exceed a bending stress as determined by using eq. (16).
07 (b) Compression on extreme fibers of flexural where
members included in NF-3322.1(d)(5)(a), meeting the Cb p 1.75 + 1.05(Ml /M2 ) + 0.3 (Ml /M2 )2 ≤ 2.3, where
requirements of NF-3322.2(d)(1)(b), and having an axis M1 is the smaller and M2 is the larger bending
of symmetry in and loaded in the plane of their web and moment at the ends of the unbraced length taken
compression on extreme fibers of channels5 bent about about the strong axis of the member, and where
their major axis, shall have the larger value of bending M1 /M2 (the ratio of end moments) is positive
stress computed by eqs. (17) through (19), as applicable, when M1 and M2 have the same sign (reversecur-
but not more than 0.60Sy.6 vature bending) and is negative when they are of
opposite signs (single curvature bending). When
When the bending moment at any point within an
unbraced length is larger than that at both ends
1⁄ 1⁄
of this length, the value of Cb shall be taken as
关共102 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / Sy 兴
2
≤ l / rc ≤ 关共510 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / Sy 兴
2 1. When computing Fbx and Fby to be used in eq.
(20), Cb may be computed by the equation given
(SI Units) above for frames subject to joint translation. Cb
1⁄ 1⁄ may conservatively be taken as 1 for cantilever
2 2
关共703.3 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / Sy 兴 ≤ l / rc ≤ 关共3 516 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / Sy 兴 beams.7
then For cantilevers braced against twist only at the support, l
may be conservatively taken as the actual length.
(U.S. Customary Units) (c) For hybrid plate girders, Sy for eqs. (17) and
Fb p 冦⁄
2
3 − 关 Sy 共 l / rc 兲2 / 共1,530 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲兴 Sy 冧 (17) (18) is the yield stress of the compression flange. Equation
(19) shall not apply to hybrid girders.
(6) Miscellaneous Members Braced Laterally. Com- 07
(SI Units)
pression in extreme fibers of flexural members meeting the
Fb p 冦⁄
2
3 − 关 Sy 共 l / rc 兲2 / 共10 550 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲兴 Sy冧 (17) requirements of NF-3322.2(d)(1)(b), but not included in
NF-3322.1(d)(5)(b), shall result in a maximum bending
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
When stress as determined by using eq. (16), provided that sec-

tions bent about their major axis are braced laterally in the
(U.S. Customary Units) region of compression stress at intervals not exceeding
76bf / 冪 Sy (For SI units, use 200bf / 冪 Sy.).
l / rc ≥ 冪共510 ⴛ 103 Cb 兲 / Sy
7
5
For the use of larger Cb values, see: The Structural Stability Research
Only eq. (19) is applicable to channels. Council, Guide to Stability Design Criteria for Metal Structures, 3rd
6
See NF-3322.3 for further limitations in plate girder flange stress. edition, p. 135.
49
(e) Combined Stresses (c) For compression members in frames braced

(1) Axial Compression and Bending. For members against joint translation in the plane of loading and sub-
subjected to both axial compression and bending, including jected to transverse loading between their supports, the
bending moment resulting in secondary stress, stresses value of Cm may be determined by rational analysis; how-
shall be proportioned to satisfy the requirements of eqs. ever, in lieu of such analysis, the following values may
(20) through (22) be used:
(1) for members whose ends are restrained
fa Cmx fbx Cmy fby
+ + ≤ 1.0 (20) against rotation in the plane of bending
Fa (1 − fa / F ′ex ) Fbx (1 − fa / F ′ey ) Fby
Cm p 0.85
fa f f
+ bx + by ≤ 1.0 (21)
0.60Sy Fbx Fby (2) for members whose ends are unrestrained
against rotation in the plane of bending
After evaluating primary stresses, the right-hand side of
eq. (22) may be replaced by 1.5 when both primary and Cm p 1.0
secondary bending stresses are considered. When fa /Fa ≤
0.15, eq. (22) may be used in lieu of eqs. (20) and (21) (2) Axial Tension and Bending. Members subject to
both axial tension and bending stresses shall be propor-
fa f f tioned at all points along their length to satisfy the require-
+ bx + by ≤ 1.0 (22)
Fa Fbx Fby ments of Eq. (21), where fb is the computed bending tensile
stress. However, the computed bending compressive stress,
In eqs. (20) through (22), the subscripts x and y indicate taken alone, shall not exceed the applicable value according
the axis of bending about which a particular stress or design to NF-3322.1(d), “Stress in Bending.”
property applies, and
(3) Shear and Tension. Bolts subject to combined
12␲ 2 E shear and tension shall be proportioned in accordance with
F ′e p the requirements of NF-3324.
23(Klb / rb )2
(f) Bearing on Contact Area
for all members except those fabricated of austenitic stain- (1) Milled Surfaces. On contact area of milled sur-
less steel, or faces and ends of fitted bearing stiffeners8 on projected
area of pins in reamed, drilled, or bored holes, the maxi-
␲ 2E mum bearing stress shall be
F ′e p
2.15(Klb / rb )2
Fp p 0.90Sy (23)
for members fabricated of austenitic stainless steel (in the
expression for F′e , as in the case of Fa , Fb , and 0.60Sy , (2) Rollers and Rockers. The maximum bearing
F′e may be multiplied by the appropriate stress limit factor stress, ksi (MPa), shall be
from the Tables NF-3523(b)-1 and NF-3623(b)-1 for the
particular stress category), where Cm is a coefficient whose
冢冣
value shall be as given in NF-3322.1(e)(1)(a) through Sy − 13
Fp p 0.66d (24a)
(e)(1)(c) 20
(a) For compression members in frames subject to
(SI Units)
joint translation (sidesway), Cm p 0.85.
冢冣
(b) For rotationally restrained compression mem- Sy − 90
Fp p 0.66d (24a)
bers in frames braced against joint translation and not 20
subject to transverse loading between their supports in the
plane of bending (3) Bolts. The maximum bearing load on projected
area of bolts in bearing connections shall be
Cm p 0.6 − 0.4 (M1 / M2 )
Fp p 1.5Su (24b)
where
(4) Concrete Bearing. In the absence of any other
M1 /M2 p the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the Code rules governing bearing stresses on concrete, the
ends of that portion of the member unbraced maximum bearing stress values shall be as given in
in the plane of bending under consideration. NF-3322.1(f)(4)(a) and (f)(4)(b)
M1 /M2 is positive when the member is bent in
reverse curvature and negative when it is bent 8
When parts in contact have different yield stresses, Sy shall be the
in single curvature. smaller value.
50
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(a) on the full area of a concrete support to the direction of compression stress. The width of unstiff-
ened plates shall be taken from the free edge to the first
Fp p 0.35f ′c (25)
row of fasteners or welds; the width of legs of angles,
(b) on less than the full area of a concrete support channel and zee flanges, and stems of tees shall be taken
as the full nominal dimension; the width of flanges of I
Fp p 0.35f ′c 冪 A2 / A1 ≤ 0.7f ′c (26) and H shaped members and tees shall be taken as one-half
where of the full nominal width. The thickness of a sloping flange
shall be measured at a section halfway between a free edge
A1 p bearing area, in.2 (mm2)
and the corresponding face of the web.
A2 p full cross-sectional area of concrete support, in.2
(b) Determination of Effective Width. Unstiffened
(mm2)
elements subject to axial compression or compression due
(g) Single Angle Members. Single angle members shall to bending shall be considered as fully effective when the
be designed in accordance with Appendix NF-II. width–thickness ratio is not greater than the following:
NF-3322.2 Stability and Slenderness and Width– (1) for single angle struts and double angle struts 07
Thickness Ratios with separators, 76 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, use 200 / 冪 Sy.)
(a) General Requirements (2) for struts comprising double angles in con- 07
(1) General stability shall be provided for the struc- tact; angles or plates projecting from girders, columns,
ture as a whole and for each compression element. Design or other compression members; compression flanges of
consideration shall be given to significant load effects beams; and stiffeners on plate girders, 95 / 冪 Sy (For SI
resulting from the deflected shape of the structure or of units, use 250 / 冪 Sy.)
individual elements of the lateral load resisting system, (3) for stems of tees, 127 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, use 07
including the effects on beams, columns, bracing, connec- 333 / 冪 Sy.)
tions, and shear walls.
(2) In determining the slenderness ratio of an axially When the actual width–thickness ratio exceeds these val-
loaded compression member, except as provided in ues, the design stress shall be governed by the provisions
NF-3322.1(c)(3), the length shall be taken as its effective of NF-3322.2(e).
length Kl, and r shall be taken as the corresponding radius (2) Stiffened Elements Under Compression
of gyration. (a) Effective Width. Stiffened compression ele-
(b) Lateral Stability ments are those having lateral support along both edges
(1) Braced Frames. In frames [where lateral stability which are parallel to the direction of the compression stress.
is provided by adequate attachment to diagonal bracing (to The width of such elements shall be taken as follows:
shear walls), to an adjacent structure having adequate lat- (1) For webs of rolled, built-up, or formed sec-
eral stability, or to floor slabs (or roof decks) secured tions, h is the clear distance between flanges.
horizontally by walls or bracing systems parallel to the (2) For webs of rolled, built-up, or formed sec-
plane of the frame] and in trusses, the effective length tions, d is the full nominal depth.
factor K for the compression members shall be taken as
(3) For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up
1.0, unless analysis shows that a smaller value may be used.
sections, the width b is the distance between adjacent lines
(2) Unbraced Frames. In frames where lateral stabil-
of fasteners or lines of welds.
ity is dependent upon the bending stiffness of rigidly con-
(4) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural
nected beams and columns, the effective length Kl of
sections, the width b is the clear distance between webs
compression members shall be determined by a rational
method and shall not be less than the actual unbraced less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner
length. radius is not known, the flat width may be taken as the
total section width minus three times the thickness.
(c) Maximum Slenderness Ratios
(1) The slenderness ratio Kl /r of compression mem- (b) Determination of Effective Width. Stiffened
bers shall not exceed 200. elements subject to axial compression or to uniform com-
(2) The slenderness ratio l /r of tension members, pression due to bending, as in the case of the flange of a
other than rods, preferably should not exceed 240 for main flexural9 member, shall be considered as fully effective
members, and 300 for lateral bracing members and other when the width–thickness ratio is not greater than the fol-
secondary members. lowing:
(d) Width Ratios
(1) Unstiffened Elements Under Compression 9
Webs of flexural members are covered by the provisions of
(a) Effective Width. Unstiffened (projecting) com- NF-3322.6(a) and NF-3322.6(e)(2) and are not subject to the provisions
pression elements are those having one free edge parallel of this paragraph.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
51
07 (1) for flanges of square and rectangular box (U.S. Customary Units)
sections of uniform thickness, 238 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, use
Qs p 1.340 − 0.00447 共 b / t 兲冪 Sy (27)
624 / 冪 Sy.)
07 (2) for unsupported width of cover plates perfo- (SI Units)
rated with a succession of access holes,10 317 / 冪 Sy (For
Qs p 1.340 − 0.00171 共 b / t 兲冪 Sy (27)
SI units, use 831 / 冪 Sy.)
07 (3) for all other uniformly compressed stiffened when
elements, 253 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, use 663 / 冪 Sy.)
Except in the case of perforated cover plates, when the b / t ≥ 155 / 冪 Sy
actual width–thickness ratio exceeds these values, the
design stress shall be governed by the provisions of (SI Units)
NF-3322.2(e).
b / t ≥ 400 / 冪 Sy
(c) Circular Tubular Elements. Circular tubular
elements subject to axial compression shall be considered then
as fully effective when the ratio of the outside diameter to
the wall thickness is not greater than 3,300 /Sy (22 700 /Sy). (U.S. Customary Units)
For diameter to thickness ratios greater than 3,300 / Sy Qs p 15,500 冫关 Sy 共 b / t 兲2兴 (28)
(22 700 /Sy) but less than 13,000 /Sy (89 600 /Sy), the calcu-
lated stress shall be governed by the provisions of (SI Units)
NF-3322.2(e). Qs p106 869 冫关 Sy 共 b / t 兲2兴 (28)
(e) Slender Compression Elements
(1) General Requirements. Axially loaded members (b) For angles or plates projecting from columns
and flexural members, containing elements subject to com- or other compression members and for projecting elements
pression and having a width–thickness ratio in excess of of compression flanges of girders, when
the applicable limit given in NF-3322.2(d)(1) and (d)(2),
shall be proportioned to meet the requirements of the fol-
lowing subparagraphs: 95 冫冪Sy / kc < b / t < 195 冫冪Sy / kc
07 (2) Unstiffened Compression Elements. Except as
(SI Units)
provided herein, stress on unstiffened compression ele-
ments, the width–thickness ratio of which exceeds the 250 冫冪Sy / kc < b / t < 510 冫冪Sy / kc
applicable limit given in NF-3322.2(d)(1), shall be subject
to a reduction of factor Qs. The value of Qs shall be deter- then
mined by eqs. (27) to (32), as applicable, where b is the (U.S. Customary Units)
width of the unstiffened element as defined in
NF-3322.2(d)(1). When such elements comprise the com- Qs p 1.293 − 0.00309 共 b / t 兲冪 Sy / kc (29)
pression flange of a flexural member, the maximum allow- (SI Units)
able bending stress shall not exceed 0.6S y Q s , nor the
applicable value as provided in NF-3322.2(e)(5) or (e)(6). Qs p 1.293 − 0.00118 共 b / t 兲冪 Sy / kc (29)
The allowable stress of axially loaded compression mem-
when
bers shall be modified by the appropriate reduction factor
Qs as provided in NF-3322.2(e)(5). (U.S. Customary Units)
(a) For single angles, when
b / t > 195 / 冪 Sy / kc
(U.S. Customary Units) (SI Units)
76 冫冪 Sy < b / t < 155 冫冪 Sy b / t > 510 / 冪 Sy / kc
(SI Units) then
200 冫冪 Sy < b / t < 400 冫冪 Sy (U.S. Customary Units)
then Qs p 26,200 kc / 关Sy 共b / t兲2兴 (30)
(SI Units)
10
Assumes net area of plate at widest hole as basis for computing
compression stresses. Qs p 180 000 kc / 关Sy 共b / t兲2兴 (30)
52
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

4.05 h TABLE NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1

kc p if > 70, otherwise kc p 1.0. LIMITING PROPORTIONS FOR CHANNELS AND TEES
共h / t 兲 0.46 t
Ratio of Flange Ratio of Flange
(c) For stems of tees, when Width to Profile Thickness to Web
Shape Depth or Stem Thickness
≤0.25 ≤3.0
127 / 冪 Sy < b / t < 176 / 冪 Sy
Built-up or
rolled channels
Built-up tees
} ≤0.50
≥0.50
≤2.0
≥1.25
(SI Units) Rolled tees ≥0.50 ≥1.10
333 / 冪 Sy < b / t < 461 / 冪 Sy
then
(SI Units)
冤1 − 冢(b / t) 冪 f 冣冥 ≤ b
663t 132
Qs p 1.908 − 0.00715 共 b / t 兲冪 Sy (31) be p (33)
冪f
(SI Units) (2) For other uniformly compressed elements:
Qs p 1.908 − 0.00273 共 b / t 兲冪 Sy (31)
when
冤1 − 冢(b / t) 冪 f 冣冥 ≤ b
253t 44.3
be p (34)
(U.S. Customary Units) 冪f
b / t ≥ 176 / 冪 Sy (SI Units)
冤1 − 冢(b / t) 冪 f 冣冥 ≤ b
663t 116
(SI Units) be p (34)
冪f
b / t ≥ 461 / 冪 Sy
where
then b p the actual width, in. (mm), of a stiffened compres-
(U.S. Customary Units) sion element as defined in NF-3322.2(d)(2)
f p computed compressive stress, ksi (MPa), in the
Qs p 20,000 / 关 Sy 共 b / t 兲2 兴 (32) stiffened elements based on the design properties
as specified in NF-3322.2(e)(4). If unstiffened ele-
(SI Units) ments are included in the total cross section for
Qs p 138 000 / 关 Sy 共 b / t 兲2 兴 (32) the stiffened element, f must be such that the
maximum compressive stress in the unstiffened
(d) However, unstiffened elements of channels and element does not exceed FaQs or FbQs , as appli-
tees whose proportions exceed the limits of cable.
NF-3322.2(d)(1) shall conform to the limits given in Table
(b) The allowable stress for axially loaded circular 07
NF-3322.2(e)(2)-1.
tubular members not meeting the requirements of
(3) Stiffened Compression Elements
NF-3322.1(e), but having a diameter-to-thickness ratio of
(a) When the width–thickness ratio of uniformly
less than 13,000 /Sy (For SI units, use 89 000 /Sy.), shall
compressed stiffened elements, except for perforated cover
not exceed either the smaller value determined by
plates, exceeds the applicable limit given in
NF-3322.1(e) or
NF-3322.2(d)(2), a reduced effective width be shall be used
in computing the flexural design properties of the section (U.S. Customary Units)
containing the element and the permissible axial stress,
冤 D / t + 0.4S 冥
except that the ratio be /t need not be taken as less than 662
Fa p y
the applicable value permitted in NF-3322.2(d)(2).
(1) For the flanges of square and rectangular (SI Units)
sections of uniform thickness
冤 D/t 冥
4 560
Fa p + 0.4Sy
冤1 − 冢(b / t) 冪 f 冣冥 ≤ b
253t 50.3 (c) When the allowable stresses are increased for 07
be p (33)
冪f Level C Service Limits, the effective width be shall be
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
53
determined on the basis of 0.75 times the computed com- (b) Cross sections composed entirely of stiffened
pressive stress, f, caused by Level C Service Loadings. elements
(4) Design Properties. Properties of sections shall
be determined in accordance with conventional methods, Q p Qa (i.e., Qs p 1.0)
using the full cross section of the member, except as (c) Cross sections composed of both stiffened and
required in NF-3322.2(e)(4)(a) and (e)(4)(b). unstiffened elements
(a) In computing the moment of inertia and section
modulus of flexural members with respect to the axis of Q p Q s Qa
bending under consideration, the effective width of stiff-
(6) Combined Axial and Flexural Stress. In applying
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ened compression elements parallel to the axis of bending

the provisions of NF-3322.1(e) to members subject to com-
and having a width–thickness ratio in excess of the applica-
bined axial and flexural stress and containing stiffened
ble limit given in NF-3322.2(d)(2), rather than the actual
elements whose width–thickness ratio exceeds the applica-
width, shall be used, and the axis of bending shall be
ble limit given in NF-3322.2(d)(2), the stresses Fa , fbx ,
located accordingly, except that for sections otherwise
and fby shall be calculated on the basis of the section proper-
symmetrical, the properties may conservatively and more
ties as provided in NF-3322.2(e)(4) and (e)(5), as applica-
easily be computed using a corresponding effective area
ble. The allowable bending stress F b for members
on the tension side of the neutral axis as well. That portion
containing unstiffened elements whose width–thickness
of the area that is neglected in arriving at the effective area
ratio exceeds the applicable limit given in NF-3322.2(d)(1)
shall be located at and symmetrical about the center line
shall be the smaller value 0.6Sy Qs or that provided in
of the stiffened element to which it applies.
NF-3322.1(d)(5).
(b) The stress fa due to axial loading, and the radius
of gyration r, shall be computed on the basis of actual NF-3322.3 Plate Girders, Rolled Beams, and Built-
cross-sectional area. However, the allowable axial stress Up Members
Fa , as provided in NF-3322.2(e)(5) shall be subject to the (a) Girders and Rolled Beams. Rolled or welded shapes,
form factor plate girders, and cover-plated beams shall, in general, be
proportioned by the moment of inertia of the gross section.
effective area No deduction shall be made for shop or field bolt or rivet
Qa p
actual area holes in either flange provided that
where the effective area is equal to the actual area less ⌺ 0.5 Su Afn ≥ 0.6 Sy Afg (35a)
(b−be) t.
07 (5) Axially Loaded Compression Members. The where Afg is the gross flange area and Afn is the net flange
allowable stress for axially loaded compression members area, calculated in accordance with the provisions of
containing unstiffened or stiffened elements shall not NF-3322.8.
exceed If
冤冥S
2
(Kl / r) 0.5 Su Afn < 0.6 Sy Afg (35b)
Qs Qa 1 − y
2(C ′c )2
Fa p (35) the member flexural properties shall be based on an effec-
5 3(Kl / r) (Kl / r)3
+ − tive tension flange area Afe
3 8 C ′c 8(C ′c )3
5 Su
when the largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced Afe p A (35c)
6 Sy fn
segment is less than C′c or the value given by eq. (5) when
Kl /r exceeds C′c, where (b) Hybrid Girders. Hybrid girders may be proportioned
by the moment of inertia of their gross section, provided
冪
2␲ 2 E that they are not required to resist an axial force greater
C ′c p
Q Sy than 0.15Sy times the area of the gross section, where Sy
is the yield stress of the flange material. To qualify as
and hybrid girders, the flanges at any given section shall have
the same cross-sectional area and be made of the same
Q p Qs Qa
grade of steel.
(a) Cross sections composed entirely of unstiff- (c) Open Box-Type Beams and Grillages. When two or
ened elements more rolled beams or channels are used side by side to
form a flexural member, they shall be connected together
Q p Qs (i.e., Qa p 1.0) at intervals of not more than 5 ft (1.5 m). Through-bolts
54
and separators may be used, provided that in beams having tie plates shall have a length not less than one-half of this
a depth of 12 in. (300 mm) or more, no fewer than two bolts distance. The thickness of tie plates shall be not less than
shall be used at each separator location. When concentrated one-fiftieth of the distance between the lines of bolts or
loads are carried from one beam to the other or distributed welds connecting them to the segments of the members.
between the beams, diaphragms having sufficient stiffness In bolted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress
to distribute the load shall be bolted or welded between in tie plates shall be not more than six diameters and the
the beams. tie plates shall be connected to each segment by at least
three fasteners. In welded construction, the welding on
NF-3322.4 Compression Members
each line connecting a tie plate shall aggregate not less
(a) Requirements for Fasteners than one-third of the length of the plate.
(1) Transverse Spacing of Fasteners. All parts of (d) Lacing. Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels,
built-up compression members and the transverse spacing or other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced that
of their lines of fasteners shall meet the requirements of the ratio l / r of the flange included between their connec-
NF-3322.2. tions shall not exceed 3⁄4 times the governing ratio for the
(2) End Fasteners. At the ends of built-up compres- member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to resist
sion members bearing on base plates or milled surfaces, a shearing stress normal to the axis of the member equal
all components in contact with one another shall be con- to 2% of the total compressive stress in the member. The
nected by bolts, spaced longitudinally not more than four ratio l / r for lacing bars arranged in single systems shall
diameters apart for a distance equal to 11⁄2 times the maxi- not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not exceed
mum width of the member, or by continuous welds having 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at their intersec-
a length not less than the maximum width of the member. tions. For lacing bars in compression, the unsupported
(3) Intermediate Fasteners. The longitudinal spacing length of the lacing bar shall be taken as the distance
for intermediate bolts or intermittent welds in built-up between fasteners or welds connecting it to the components
members shall be adequate to provide for the transfer of of the built-up member for single lacing, and 70% of that
calculated stress. The maximum longitudinal spacing of distance for double lacing. The inclination of lacing bars
bolts or intermittent welds connecting two rolled shapes to the axis of the member shall preferably be not less than
in contact with one another shall not exceed 24 in. (600 60 deg for single lacing and 45 deg for double lacing.
mm). In addition, for painted members and unpainted mem- When the distance between the lines of fasteners or welds
bers not subject to corrosion where the outside component in the flanges is more than 15 in. (381 mm), the lacing
consists of a plate, the maximum longitudinal spacing shall preferably shall be double or be made of angles.
not exceed: (e) Perforated Cover Plates. The function of tie plates
07 (a) 127 / 冪Sy (For SI units, use 333 / 冪 Sy.) times the and lacing may be performed by continuous cover plates
thickness of the outside plate nor 12 in. (300 mm) when perforated with a succession of access holes. The unsup-
fasteners are not staggered along adjacent gage lines; ported width of such plates at access holes, as defined in
07 (b) 190 / 冪Sy (For SI units, use 500 / 冪 Sy.) times the NF-3322.2(d)(2), is assumed to be available to resist axial
thickness of the outside plate nor 18 in. (450 mm) when stress, provided that
fasteners are staggered along adjacent gage lines. (1) the width–thickness ratio conforms to the limita-
(b) Local Slenderness Ratio. Compression members tions of NF-3322.2(d)(2)
composed of two or more rolled shapes separated by inter- (2) the ratio of length in direction of stress to width
mittent fillers shall be connected at these fillers at intervals of hole shall not exceed 2
such that the slenderness ratio Kl / r of either shape, between (3) the clear distance between holes in the direction
the fasteners, does not exceed 3⁄4 times the governing slen- of stress shall be not less than the transverse distance
derness ratio of the built-up member. The least radius of between nearest lines of connection bolts or welds
gyration r shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio (4) the periphery of the holes at all points connecting
of each component part. At least two intermediate connec- shall have a minimum radius of 11⁄2 in. (38 mm)
tors shall be used along the length of the built-up member.
(c) Tie Plates. Open sides of compression members built NF-3322.5 Built-Up Tension Members
up from plates or shapes shall be provided with lacing (a) Longitudinal Spacing of Connectors. The longitudi-
having tie plates at each end and at intermediate points if nal spacing of connectors between elements in continuous
the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near to the contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates shall
ends as practicable. In main members carrying calculated not exceed
stress, the end tie plates shall have a length of not less (1) 24 times the thickness of the thinner plate, or 12
than the distance between the lines of bolts or welds con- in. (300 mm) for painted members or unpainted members
necting them to the elements of the member. Intermediate not subject to corrosion
55
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(2) 14 times the thickness of the thinner plate, or 7 (2) Web Crippling
in. (175 mm) for unpainted members of weathering steel (a) Local Web Yielding. Webs of beams and
subject to atmospheric corrosion welded plate girders shall be so proportioned that the com-
pressive stress at the web toe of the fillets, resulting from
In a tension member the longitudinal spacing of fasteners concentrated loads not supported by bearing stiffeners,
and intermittent welds connecting two or more shapes in shall not exceed the value of 0.66Sy ; otherwise, bearing
contact shall not exceed 24 in. (600 mm). Tension members stiffeners shall be provided. The governing equations
composed of two or more shapes or plates separated by shall be
intermittent fillers shall be connected to one another at (1) for interior loads
these fillers at intervals such that the slenderness ratio of
either component between the fasteners does not exceed (U.S. Customary Units)
300. R
(b) Perforated Cover and Tie Plates. Either perforated ≤ 0.66Sy (38)
t (N + 5 k)
cover plates or tie plates without lacing may be used on
the open sides of built-up tension members. Tie plates shall (SI Units)
have a length not less than two-thirds the distance between R
the lines of bolts or welds connecting them to the elements ≤ 0.66Sy (38)
t (N + 125 k)
of the member. The thickness of such tie plates shall not
be less than one-fiftieth of the distance between these lines. (2) for end reactions
The longitudinal spacing of bolts or intermittent welds at (U.S. Customary Units)
tie plates shall not exceed 6 in. (150 mm). The spacing of
R
tie plates shall be such that the slenderness ratio of any ≤ 0.66 Sy (39)
t(N + 2.5 k)
component in the length between tie plates shall not
exceed 300. (SI Units)
NF-3322.6 Webs, Flanges, and Stiffeners R
≤ 0.66 Sy (39)
07 (a) Webs. The ratio of the clear distance between flanges t(N + 65 k)
to the web thickness shall not exceed
where N is greater than or equal to k for end reactions.
(U.S. Customary Units) (b) Stress on Compression Edge of Web Plate.
Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs of members
14,000 / 冪 Sy 共 Sy + 16.5兲 (36) under concentrated loads, when the compressive force
exceeds the following limits:
(SI Units)
96 500 / 冪 Sy 共 Sy + 114兲 (36) when the concentrated load is applied at a distance not
less than d / 2 from the end of the member
except that when transverse stiffeners are provided, spaced
not more than 11⁄2 times the girder depth, the limiting ratio (U.S. Customary Units)
may be 2,000 / 冪 Sy (For SI units, use 5 300 / 冪 Sy.), where 1.5
冤冢冣冢冣冥冪S t / t
N tw
Sy is the yield stress of the compression flange. R p 67.5 tw2 1 + 3 y f w (40)
d tf
(1) Combined Shear and Tension Stress. Plate girder
webs which depend upon tension field action, as provided (SI Units)
in eq. (45), shall be so proportioned that bending tensile 1.5
stress due to moment in the plane of the girder web shall N tw
R p 177 tw2 1 + 3 y f w (40)
not exceed 0.6Sy , or d tf
when the concentrated load is applied less than a distance

冢冣
fv
0.825 − 0.375 S (37) d / 2 from the end of the member
Fv y
where
1.5
Fv p p allowable web shear stress, ksi (MPa), according N tw
R p 34 tw2 1 + 3 y f w (41)
to eq. (45) d tf
The allowable shear stress in the webs of girders having (SI Units)
flanges and webs with yield values greater than 65 ksi (450
1.5
MPa) shall not exceed the values given by eq. (44) if the N tw
R p 89 tw2 1 + 3 y f w (41)
flexural stress in the flange fb exceeds 0.75Fb. d tf
56
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
where (c) Flange Development

d p overall depth of the member, in. (mm) (1) High-strength bolts or welds connecting flange to
Sy p specified minimum yield stress of beam web, ksi web or cover plate to flange shall be proportioned to resist
(MPa) the total horizontal shear resulting from the bending forces
tf p flange thickness, in. (mm) on the girder. The longitudinal distribution of these bolts
tw p web thickness, in. (mm) or intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the intensity
of the shear, but the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed
If stiffeners are provided and extend at least one-half the the maximum permitted, respectively, for compression or
web depth, eqs. (40) and (41) need not be checked. tension members in NF-3322.4(a)(3) or NF-3322.5(a).
Bearing stiffeners shall be provided in the webs of mem- Additionally, bolts or welds connecting flange to web shall
bers with flanges not restrained against relative movement be proportioned so as to transmit to the web any loads
by stiffeners or lateral bracing and subject to concentrated applied directly to the flange unless provision is made to
compressive loads, when the compressive force exceeds transmit such loads by direct bearing.
the following limits:
(2) Partial length cover plates shall be extended
If the loaded flange is restrained against rotation and beyond the theoretical cut-off point and the extended por-
(dc / tw ) / (l / bf ) is less than 2.3 tion shall be attached to the beam or girder by high strength
bolts for friction-type joints or fillet welds adequate at the
(U.S. Customary Units) applicable stresses allowed in NF-3324.6(a),
3 NF-3324.5(d), or NF-3332.4, to develop the cover plate
冤冢冣冥
6,800 tw3 d /t portion of the flexural stresses in the beam or girder at
Rp 1 + 0.4 c w (41a)
h l / bf
the theoretical cut-off point. In addition, for welded cover
plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination to
(SI Units)
the beam or girder in the length a′, defined in
3 NF-3322.6(c)(1)(a) through (c)(1)(c), shall be adequate at
冤冢冣冥
46 882 tw3 d /t
Rp 1 + 0.4 c w (41a) the allowed stresses to develop the cover plate portion of
h l / bf
the flexural stresses in the beam or girder at the distance
If the loaded flange is not restrained against rotation and a′ from the end of the cover plate. The length a′ measured
(dc / tw ) (l / bf ) is less than 1.7 from the end of the cover plate, shall be
(a) a distance equal to the width of the coverplate
when there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than
3 three-fourths of the plate thickness across the end of the
冤冢冣冥
6,800 tw3 d /t
Rp 0.4 c w (41b) plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover
h l / bf
plate in the length a′
(SI Units) (b) a distance equal to 11⁄2 times the width of the
3
cover plate when there is a continuous weld smaller than
冤冢冣冥
46 882 tw3 d /t three-fourths of the plate thickness across the end of the
Rp 0.4 c w (41b)
h l / bf plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover
where plate in the length a′
(c) a distance equal to two times the width of the
bf p flange width, in. (mm) cover plate when there is no weld across the end of the
dc p d − 2 k p web depth clear of fillets, in. (mm) plate, but continuous welds along both edges of the cover
l p largest laterally unbraced length along either plate in the length a′
flange at the point of load, in. (mm) (d) Reduction in Flange Stress. When the web depth–
Equations (41a) and (41b) need not be checked providing thickness ratio exceeds 760 / 冪 Fb (2 000 / 冪 Fb), the maxi-
(dc / tw ) / (l / bf ) exceeds 2.3 or 1.7, respectively, or for webs mum stress in the compression flange shall not exceed
subject to uniformly distributed load.
(b) Flanges (U.S. Customary Units)
(1) The thickness of outstanding parts of flanges shall
冤冢冣冥
Aw h 760
conform to the requirements of NF-3322.2(d)(1). F ′b ≤ Fb 1.0 − 0.0005 − (42)
A f t 冪 Fb
(2) Flanges of welded plate girders may be varied in
thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by the
(SI Units)
use of cover plates.
冤冢冣冥
(3) The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of Aw h 2 000
F ′b ≤ Fb 1.0 − 0.0005 − (42)
bolted girders shall not exceed 70% of the total flange area. A f t 冪 Fb
57
where Fb is the applicable bending stress, ksi (MPa), given (3) Intermediate Stiffeners
in NF-3322.1(d). The maximum stress in either flange of (a) Subject to the limitations of NF-3322.6(a),
a hybrid girder shall not exceed the value given in eq. intermediate stiffeners are not required when the ratio h /t
(42) or is less than 260 and the maximum web shear stress fv is
less than that permitted for Fv by eq. (44).
12 + (Aw / Af )(3␣ − ␣ 3 )
F ′b ≤ Fb 冤 12 + 2(Aw / Af ) 冥 (43) (b) The spacing of intermediate stiffeners, when
stiffeners are required, shall be such that the web shear
(e) Stiffeners stress will not exceed the value for Fv given by eq. (44)
(1) Bearing. Bearing stiffeners shall be placed in pairs or (45), as applicable, and the ratio a /h shall not exceed
at unframed ends on the webs of plate girders and, where [260 /(h /t)]2 or 3.
required by NF-3322.6(a)(2), at points of concentrated (c) In girders designed on the basis of tension field
loads. Such stiffeners, when the load normal to the flange action, the spacing between stiffeners at end panels, at
is tensile, shall be welded to the loaded flange and when panels containing large holes, and at panels adjacent to
the load normal to the flange is compressive may be welded panels containing large holes shall be such that fv does not
or bear on the loaded flange. They shall be designed as exceed the value for Fv given by eq. (44).
columns subject to the provisions of NF-3322.1, assuming (4) Moment of Inertia and Gross Area
the column section to comprise the pair of stiffeners and (a) The moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4), of a pair of
a centrally located strip of the web whose width is equal intermediate stiffeners or a single intermediate stiffener,
to not more than 25 times its thickness at interior stiffeners, with reference to an axis in the plane of the web, shall not
or a width equal to not more than 12 times its thickness be less than (h /50)4.
when the stiffeners are located at the end of the web. The (b) The gross area, in.2 (mm2), of intermediate stif-
effective length shall be taken as not less than three-fourths feners spaced as required for eq. (45) (total area, when
of the length of the stiffeners in computing the ratio l /r. stiffeners are furnished in pairs), shall be not less than that
Only that portion of the stiffener outside of the flange computed by eq. (46)
angle fillet or the flange to web welds shall be considered
冤冥
effective in bearing. 1 − Cv a (a / h)2
Ast p − YDht (46)
07 (2) Average Web Shear. Except as provided herein, 2 h 冪 1 + (a / h) 2
the largest average web shear fv , ksi (MPa), computed for
where
any condition of complete or partial loading, shall not
exceed the value given by eq. (44) D p 1.0 for stiffeners furnished in pairs
p 1.8 for single angle stiffeners
(U.S. Customary Units) p 2.4 for single plate stiffeners
Fv p 共 Sy / 2.89兲 Cv ≤ 0.4Sy (44) (c) When the greatest shear stress fv in a panel is
(SI Units) less than that permitted by eq. (45), this gross area require-
ment may be reduced proportionately.
Fv p 共 Sy / 19.9兲 Cv ≤ 0.4Sy (44) (d) Intermediate stiffeners required by eq. (45) 07
where shall be connected for a total shear transfer, kips /linear in.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(N/linear mm) of single stiffener or pair of stiffeners, not
Cv p (45,000 k) / [S y (h / t) 2 ] {(For SI units, use
less than that computed by eq. (47)
310,000k.) /[Sy (h /t)2]}, when Cv is less than 0.8
p [190 /(h /t)] 冪 k /Sy {[For SI units, use 500 /(h /t).] (U.S. Customary Units)
冪 k /Sy }, when Cv is more than 0.8 3⁄
冢冣
k p 4.00 + [5.34 /(a /h)2], when a /h is less than 1.0 Sy 2
fvs p h (47)
340
p 5.34 + [4.00 /(a /h)2], when a /h is more than 1.0
Alternatively, for girders other than hybrid girders and (SI Units)
tapered members, if intermediate stiffeners are provided 3⁄
and spaced to satisfy the provisions of NF-3322.6(e)(3)
冢冣
Sy 2
fvs p h (47)
and if Cv ≤1, the allowable shear given by eq. (45)11 may 647
be used in lieu of the value given in eq. (44)
This shear transfer may be reduced in the same proportion
冤冥
S 1 − Cv that the largest computed shear stress fv in the adjacent
F v p y Cv + ≤ 0.4Sy (45)
2.89 1.15 冪 1 + (a / h)2 panels is less than that permitted by eq. (45). However,
bolts and welds in intermediate stiffeners which are
11
Equation (45) recognizes the contribution of tension field action. required to transmit to the web an applied concentrated
58
load or reaction shall be proportioned for not less than the summing the products of the thickness and the gross width
applied load or reaction. of each element as measured normal to the axis of the
(e) Intermediate stiffness may be stopped short of member. The net area shall be determined by substituting
the tension flange, provided bracing is not needed to trans- the net width, computed in accordance with NF-3322.8(c),
mit a concentrated load or reaction; the weld by which for the gross width.
intermediate stiffeners are attached to the web shall be (b) Net Area and Effective Net Area. Unless otherwise
terminated not closer than four times nor more than six specified, tension members shall be designed on the basis
times the web thickness from the near toe of the web to of net area. Compression members shall be designed on
flange welds. When single stiffeners are used, they shall the basis of gross area. Beams and girders shall be designed
be attached to the compression flange, if it consists of a in accordance with NF-3322.3(a).
rectangular plate, to resist any uplift tendency due to torsion (c) Calculation of Net Area
in the plate. When lateral bracing is attached to a stiffener (1) Parts With Holes
or a pair of stiffeners, these, in turn, shall be connected to (a) In the case of a chain of holes extending across
the compression flange to transmit 1% of the total flange a part in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net width of the
stress, unless the flange is composed only of angles. part shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width
(f) Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web the sum of the diameters of all the holes in the chain and
shall be spaced not more than 12 in. (300 mm) on center. If adding, for each gage space in the chain, the quantity s 2 /4g.
intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear distance between (b) The critical net area An of the part is obtained
welds shall not be more than 16 times the web thickness, from that chain which gives the least net width.
or more than 10 in. (250 mm). (c) In determining the net area across plug or slot
(f) Splices. Groove welded splices in the plate girders welds, the weld metal shall not be considered as adding
and beams shall develop the full strength of the smaller to the net area.
spliced section; other types of splices in cross sections of (d) The effective net area Ae of axially loaded ten-
plate girders and in beams shall develop the strength sion members, where the load is transmitted by
required by the stresses at the point of splice. boltsthrough some but not all of the cross-sectional ele-
(g) Rotational Restraint at Points of Support. Beams, ments of the member, shall be computed from the following
girders, and trusses shall be restrained against rotation equation:
about their longitudinal axis at points of support.
Ae p Ct An
NF-3322.7 Simple and Continuous Spans, and Provi- Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests or
sion for Expansion other recognized criteria, the following values of Ct shall
(a) Design Requirements for Spans be used in computations:
(1) Simple Spans. Beams, girders, and trusses shall (1) W, M, or S shapes with flange widths not
ordinarily be designed on the basis of simple spans whose less than two-thirds of the depth, and structural tees cut
effective length is equal to the distance between centers from these shapes, provided the connection is to the flanges
of gravity of the members to which they deliver their end and has no fewer than three fasteners per line in the direc-
reactions. tion of applied stress
(2) Continuous Spans. When designed on the
assumption of full or partial end restraint, due to continu- Ct p 0.90
ous, semi-continuous, or cantilever action, the beams, gird- (2) W, M, or S shapes not meeting the conditions
ers, and trusses, as well as the sections of the members to of NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), structural tees cut from these
which they connect, shall be designed to carry the shears shapes, and all other shapes, including built-up cross sec-
and moments so introduced, as well as all other forces, tions, provided the connection has not less than three fas-
without exceeding at any point the unit stresses prescribed teners per line in the direction of applied stress
in NF-3321.1, except that some nonelastic but self-limiting
deformation of a part of the connection may be permitted Ct p 0.85
when this is essential to the avoidance of overstressing of (3) all members whose connections have only
fasteners. two fasteners per line in the direction of applied stress
(3) Provision for Expansion. Adequate provision
shall be made for expansion and contraction appropriate Ct p 0.75
to the function of the support structure. When the load is transmitted by welds through some
but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member,
NF-3322.8 Gross and Net Areas
the effective net area Ae shall be computed as
(a) Determination of Gross and Net Areas. The gross
area of a member at any point shall be determined by Ae p U A g
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
59
where a yield stress greater than 70.0 ksi (480 MPa), the diameter
of the pinhole shall not exceed five times the plate
Ag p gross area of member, in.2 (mm2) thickness.
When load is transmitted by transverse welds to some (b) In pin-connected plates other than eyebars, the
but not all of the cross-sectional elements of W, M, or S tensile stress on the net area transverse to the axis of the
shapes and structural tees cut from these shapes, Ae shall member shall not exceed the stress allowed in
be taken as the area of the directly connected elements. NF-3322.1(a), and the bearing stress on the projected area
When the load is transmitted to a plate by longitudinal of the pin shall not exceed the stress allowed in
welds along both edges at the end of the plate, the length NF-3322.1(f)(1). The minimum net area beyond the pin-
of the welds shall not be less than the width of the plate. hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall not be less
The effective net area Ae shall be computed as above. than two-thirds of the net area across the pinhole.
Unless a larger coefficient can be justified by tests or (c) The distance used in calculations, transverse to
other criteria, the following values of U shall be used: the axis of pin-connected plates or any individual element
when l > 2 w, U p 1.0; when 2 w > l > 1.5 w, U p 0.87; of a built-up member, from the edge of the pinhole to the
when 1.5 w > l > w, U p 0.75 edge of the member or element shall not exceed 4 times
the thickness at the pinhole. For calculation purposes, the
where distance from the edge of the pinhole to the edge of the
l p weld length, in. (mm) plate or to the edge of a separated element of a built-up
w p plate width (distance between welds), in. (mm) member at the pinhole, shall not be assumed to be more
than 0.8 times the diameter of the pinhole.
(e) Bolted splice and gusset plates, and other con-
(d) The corners beyond the pinhole may be cut at
nection fittings subject to tensile force shall be designed
45 deg to the axis of the member, provided the net area
in accordance with the provisions of NF-3322.1(a) where
beyond the pinhole, on a plane perpendicular to the cut,
the effective net area shall be taken as the actual net area,
is not less than that required beyond the pinhole parallel
except that for the purpose of design calculations it shall
to the axis of the member.
not be taken as greater than 85% of the gross area.
(e) Thickness limitations on both eyebars and pin-
(2) Size of Bolt Holes. In computing net area, the connected plates may be waived whenever external nuts
diameter of a bolt hole shall be taken as 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) are provided so as to tighten pin plates and filler plates
greater than the nominal dimension of the hole normal to into snug contact. When the plates are thus contained, the
the direction of applied stress. allowable stress in bearing shall be no greater than as
(3) Angles. For angles, the gross width shall be the specified in NF-3322.1(f)(1).
sum of the widths of the legs less the thickness. The gage
for holes in opposite legs shall be the sum of the gages NF-3322.9 Rectangular Tubular Sections. For elec-
from the back of angles less the thickness. tric resistance welded rectangular tubular sections, the
(4) Pin-Connected Members designer shall use a wall thickness of 0.93 times the nomi-
(a) Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness without nal wall thickness for calculating section properties.
reinforcement at the pinholes.12 They shall have circular
heads in which the periphery of the head beyond the pinhole NF-3323 Design Requirements for Steel Castings
is concentric with the pinhole. The radius of transition and Forgings
between the circular head and the body of the eyebar shall NF-3323.1 Allowable Stresses. Allowable stresses for
be equal to or greater than the diameter of the head. The steel castings and forgings shall be the same as those pro-
width of the body of the eyebar shall not exceed eight vided in NF-3322 with the applicable values for yield
times its thickness and the thickness shall not be less than strength of Table Y-1, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1.
1
⁄2 in. (13 mm). The minimum net area beyond the pin
hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall not be less
NF-3324 Design Requirements for Connections
than 2⁄3 of the net area across the pin hole. The thickness
and Joints
may be less than 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) only if external nuts are
provided to tighten pin plates and filler plates into snug NF-3324.1 General Requirements
contact. The diameter of the pin shall not be less than (a) Types of Connections Permitted. Structural Connec-
seven-eighths of the width of the body of the eyebar. The tions of a welded, bolted, or welded and bolted type shall
diameter of the pinhole shall not be more than 1⁄32 in. (0.8 be used.
mm) greater than the diameter of the pin. For steels having Types of bolted connections include
(1) Friction-type connections that are mechanically
12
Members having a different thickness at the pinhole location are fastened structural connections that use high strength bolts
termed built-up. (such as SA-325 and SA-490) and are sufficiently tightened
60
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

FIG. NF-3324.1(a)(1) TYPICAL FRICTION-TYPE CONNECTIONS USING HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS
to reliably produce a high clamping force that prevents (2) Flexible beam connections shall accommodate
slip between faying surfaces. Load is transferred at the end rotations of unrestrained (simple) beams. To accom-
faying surfaces by friction [Fig. NF-3324.1(a)(1)]. plish this, inelastic action in the connection is permitted.
(2) Bearing-type connections that are mechanically (b) Connections for Restrained Members
fastened structural connections that depend on direct shear (1) Fasteners or welds for end connections of beams,
of the fastener to transfer the load from one connected part girders, and trusses shall be designed for the combined
to another. effect of forces resulting from moment and shear induced
(3) Other connections that are not covered by by the rigidity of the connections.
NF-3324.1(a)(1) and (a)(2), such as clamps and U-bolts (2) When flanges or moment connection plates for
shown in Fig. NF-1214-1, are not friction-type connections end connections of beams and girders are welded to the
and shall meet the requirements of NF-3380, unless other- flange of an I or H shaped column, a pair of column web
wise indicated in the design documents. stiffeners having a combined cross-sectional area Ast not
(b) Provision for Eccentric Connections. Axially less than that computed from eq. (48) shall be provided
stressed members meeting at a point shall have their gravity whenever the calculated value of Ast is positive
axes intersect at a point if practicable; if not, provision
shall be made for bending stresses due to the eccentricity. Pbf − Fyc t (tb + 5k)
Ast p (48)
(c) Placement of Bolts and Welds. Except as otherwise Fyst
provided, groups of bolts or welds at the ends of any
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
member transmitting axial stress into that member shall (3) Notwithstanding the requirements of
have their centers of gravity on the gravity axis of the NF-3324.2(b)(2), a stiffener or a pair of stiffeners shall be
member, unless provision is made for the effect of the provided opposite the compression flange when the column
resulting eccentricity. Except in members subject to web depth clear of fillets dc is greater than
repeated variation in stress, as stipulated in NF-3330, dispo-
sition of fillet welds to balance the forces about the neutral (U.S. Customary Units)
axes for end connections of single angle, double angle,
4,100t 3 ⴛ 冪 Fyc
and similar type members is not required. Eccentricity
Pbf
between the gravity axes of such members and the gage
lines for their bolted end connections may be neglected in (SI Units)
statically loaded members, but should be considered in
members subjected to fatigue loading. 10 765t 3 ⴛ 冪 Fyc
Pbf
NF-3324.2 Connection Design
(a) Connections for Unrestrained Members and a pair of stiffeners shall be provided opposite the
(1) Except as otherwise indicated by the design docu- tension flange when the thickness of the column flange tf
ments, connections of beams, girders, or trusses shall be is less than
designed as flexible and may ordinarily be proportioned
for the reaction shears only. 0.4 冪 (Pbf / Fyc )
61
(4) Stiffeners required by the provisions of (3) All of the foregoing joints shall be proportioned
NF-3324.2(b)(2) and (b)(3) shall comply with the follow- to resist any tension that would be developed by design
ing criteria: moments acting in conjunction with 75% of the axial com-
(a) The width of each stiffener plus one-half the pression forces.
thickness of the column web shall not be less than one-
third the width of the flange or moment connection plate NF-3324.3 Design of Lap Joints and Fillers
delivering the concentrated force. (a) Lap Joint Design. The minimum amount of lap on
(b) The thickness of stiffeners shall not be less lap joints shall be five times the thickness of the thinner
than tb /2. part joined but not less than 1 in. (25 mm). Lap joints
(c) When the concentrated force delivered occurs subjected to axial stress shall be fillet welded along the
on only one column flange, the stiffener length need not end of both lapped parts, except where the deflection of
exceed one-half the column depth. the lapped parts is sufficiently restrained to prevent opening
(d) The weld joining stiffeners to the column web of the joint under maximum loading.
shall be sized to carry the force in the stiffener caused by (b) Filler Design
unbalanced moments on opposite sides of the column. (1) Bolted Construction. When bolts carrying com- 07
07 (5) The thickness of column webs within the bound- puted stress pass through fillers thicker than 1⁄4 in. (6 mm),
aries of rigid connections of two or more members whose except in friction-type connections assembled with high-
webs lie in a common plane shall not be less than strength bolts, the fillers shall be extended beyond the
splice material and the filler extension shall be secured by
(U.S. Customary Units) enough bolts to distribute the total stress in the member
uniformly over the combined section of the member and
32M
tmin p the filler or an equivalent number of fasteners shall be
db · dc · Sy
included in the connection. Fillers between 1⁄4 in. (6 mm)
(SI Units) and 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) thick, inclusive, need not be extended
and developed, provided the allowable shear stress in the
2 666M
tmin p bolts is reduced by the factor, 0.4 (t − 0.25) [For SI units,
db · dc · Sy
use 0.016 (t − 6)], where t is the total thickness of the
where fillers, up to 3⁄4 in. (19 mm).
(2) Welded Construction. In welded construction, any
db p the beam depth, in. (mm)
filler 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) or more in thickness shall extend beyond
dc p the column depth, in. (mm)
the edges of the splice plate and shall be welded to the
M p the algebraic sum of clockwise and counter-clock-
part on which it is fitted with sufficient weld to transmit
wise moments, kip-ft (N·mm), applied on opposite
the splice plate stress, applied at the surface of the filler
sides of the connection boundary
as an eccentric load. The welds joining the splice plate to
tmin p the web thickness, in. (mm)
the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the splice plate
When the web thickness is less than tmin doubler plates or stress and shall be long enough to avoid overstressing the
longitudinal stiffeners may be provided to reinforce the filler along the toe of the weld. Any filler less than 1⁄4 in.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
column web. (6 mm) thick shall have its edges made flush with the
(c) Connections of Tension and Compression Members edges of the splice plate, and the weld size shall be the
in Trusses. The connections at ends of the tension or com- sum of the size necessary to carry the splice plate stress
pression member in trusses shall develop the force due to plus the thickness of the filler plate.
the Design Load but not less than 50% of the effective
strength of the member, based upon the kind of stress that NF-3324.4 Joint Combinations
governs the selection of the member. (a) Combinations of Welds. If two or more of the general
(d) Connections for Compression Members With Bear- types of weld (groove, fillet, plug, or slot) are combined
ing Joints in a single joint, the effective capacity of each shall be
(1) For members subjected to compression forces separately computed with reference to the axis of the group,
only, which bear on bearing plates, sufficient bolts or welds in order to determine the allowable capacity of the combi-
shall be provided to hold all parts securely in place. nation.
(2) For members subjected to compression forces (b) Bolts in Combination With Welds. SA-307 bolts or
only, which are finished to bear at splices, the splice mate- high strength bolts used in bearing-type connections shall
rial and its bolting or welding shall be arranged to hold not be considered as sharing the stress in combination with
all parts in line and shall be proportioned for 50% of the welds. Welds, if used, shall be provided to carry the entire
computed stress. stress in the connection. High strength bolts installed as a
62
TABLE NF-3324.5(a)-1
ALLOWABLE STRESS LIMITS FOR CLASS 1 LINEAR-TYPE SUPPORT WELDS
Base Metal Weld Metal Min.
TS Range, TS, ksi (MPa)
Kind of Stress ksi (MPa) [Note (1)] Stress Limits, ksi (MPa)
Tension and compression parallel to ... ... Same as for base metal
axis of any full penetration
groove weld
Tension normal to effective throat of ... ... Same as allowable tensile stress for
full penetration groove weld base metal
Compression normal to effective ... ... Same as allowable compressive
throat of full penetration groove stress for base metal
weld and partial penetration
groove weld
Shear stress on effective throat of 45–60 (310–410) 60 (410) 0.30 ⴛ minimum tensile strength
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
fillet weld, regardless of direction of weld metal [ksi (MPa)],
of application of load; tension nor- 61–70 (411–480) 70 (480) except shear stress on base metal
mal to the axis on the effective shall not exceed 0.40 ⴛ yield
throat of a partial penetration 71–80 (481–550) 80 (550) stress of base metal
groove weld and shear stress on
effective area of a plug or slot 81–90 (551–620) 90 (620)
weld. The given stresses shall also
apply to such welds made with the 91–100 (621–690) 100 (690)
specified electrode on steel having
a yield stress greater than that of 101–120 (691–830) 120 (830)
the matching base metal.
NOTE:
(1) Weld metal one nominal strength level stronger than shown will be permitted (e.g., E70xx for E60xx applications).
friction-type connection prior to welding may be consid- (c) Service Limits, Level A Through D, and Test. The
ered as sharing the stress with the welds. rules and stress limits which must be satisfied for welds
NF-3324.5 Design of Welded Joints for any Level A through D Service and Test Loading stated
(a) Permissible Types of Welded Joints in Linear Sup- in the Design Specification are those given in NF-3324.5(b)
ports. All welded joints in Linear Supports shall be as multiplied by the appropriate base material stress limit
described in NF-3256.1 except that intermittent or lap joints factor given in Table NF-3623(b)-1 for piping supports
using fillet welds may not be used for the support of Class and Table NF-3523(b)-1 for component supports.
1 Components or Class 2 vessels designed to NC-3200. (d) Fillet Welds
The allowable stress limits shall be as defined in (1) Minimum Size of Fillet Welds and Partial Pene-
NF-3324.5(b) and (c). tration Welds. Fillet and partial penetration welds shall not
(b) Design Limits. The allowable stress limits that must be specified less than 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) (NF-4427). When fillet
be satisfied for welds for Design Loadings stated in the or partial penetration welds less than 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) are
Design Specification shall be as follows: used to join heavy section members, the designer shall
(1) Full Penetration Groove Welds. The stress limits consider specifying preheat and special requirements for
for full penetration groove welds shall not exceed the appli- fit-up of members to ensure adequate weld deposition.
cable stress value for the base metal being joined, as speci-
(2) Maximum Effective Size of Fillet Welds. The max-
fied in NF-3321.1 and Table NF-3324.5(a)-1.
imum size of a fillet weld that may be assumed in the
(2) Partial Penetration Groove Welds
design of a connection shall be such that the stresses in
(a) Compression Normal to Effective Throat or
the adjacent base material do not exceed the values allowed
Shear on Effective Throat. The stress limits shall be the
in Tables NF-3324.5(a)-1 and NF.3321.1. The maximum
same as those for the base metal, as required by NF-3321.1.
size that may be used along edges of connected parts shall
(b) Tension Normal to the Axis on the Effective
be as stipulated in NF-3324.5(d)(2)(a) and (d)(2)(b)
Throat. The stress limits shall be as specified in TableNF-
3324.5(a)-1. (a) along edges of material less than 1⁄4 in. (6 mm)
(3) Fillet Welds. The allowable stress limits for fillet thick, the maximum size may be equal to the thickness of
welds shall be as specified in Table NF-3324.5(a)-1. the material
63
(b) along edges of material 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) or more than twice the nominal size of the weld. This provision
in thickness, the maximum size shall be 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) shall apply to side and top fillet welds connecting brackets,
less than the thickness of the material, unless the weld is beam seats, and similar connections, on the plane about
especially designated on the drawings to be built up to which bending moments are computed. For framing angles
obtain full throat thickness and simple end-plate connections which depend upon flex-
(3) Length of Fillet Welds ibility of the outstanding legs for connection flexibility,
(a) The effective length of a fillet weld shall be end returns shall not exceed four times the nominal size
the overall length of a full-size fillet, including returns. of the weld. Fillet welds which occur on opposite sides of
(b) The minimum effective length of a strength a common plane shall be interrupted at the corner common
fillet weld shall be not less than four times the nominal to both welds. End returns, when required by the designer,
size, or else the size of the weld shall be considered not shall be indicated on the drawings.
to exceed one-fourth of its effective length. (9) Fillet Welds in Holes and Slots. Fillet welds in
(c) If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in holes or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap joints
end connections of tension members, the length of each or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts
fillet weld shall be not less than the perpendicular distance and to join elements of built-up members. Such fillet welds
between them. The transverse spacing of longitudinal fillet may overlap, subject to the provisions of NF-3324.5(d)(6).
welds used in end connections shall not exceed 8 in. (200 Fillet welds in holes or slots are not to be considered plug
mm), unless the design otherwise prevents excessive trans- or slot welds.
verse bending in the connection. (e) Plug and Slot Welds
(4) Effective Throat Thickness of Fillet Welds. The (1) Use of Plug and Slot Welds. Plug and slot welds
effective throat thickness of a fillet weld joining members may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint or to prevent
at angles between 60 deg and 135 deg, inclusive (Fig. NF- buckling of lapped parts and to join component parts of
4427-1), shall be the shortest distance from the root to the built-up members.
face of the diagrammatic weld, except that for fillet welds (2) Diameter of Holes for Plug Welds. The diameter
made by the submerged arc process the effective throat of the holes for a plug weld shall be not less than the
thickness shall be taken equal to the leg size for 3⁄8 in. (10 thickness of the part containing it plus 5⁄16 in. (8 mm),
mm) and smaller fillet welds, and equal to the theoretical rounded to the next greater odd 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm), nor greater
throat plus 0.11 in. (2.8 mm) for fillet welds over 3⁄8 in.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
than the minimum diameter plus 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) or 21⁄4 times
(10 mm). For fillet welds joining members at angles less the thickness of the weld metal.
than 60 deg use the rules for partial penetration groove
(3) Spacing of Plug Welds. The minimum center-to-
welds, NF-3324.5(f)(3).
center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the diame-
(5) Effective Area of Fillet Welds. The effective area
ter of the hole.
of fillet welds shall be considered as the effective length
of the weld times the effective throat thickness. (4) Length of Slot Welds. The length of slot for a slot
weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of the weld.
(6) Effective Area of Fillet Welds in Holes and Slots.
The effective area of fillet welds in holes and slots shall The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness
be computed as specified in NF-3324.5(d)(5) for fillet of the part containing it plus 5⁄16 in. (8 mm), rounded to
welds using for effective length the length of center line the next greater odd 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm), nor shall it be greater
of the weld through the center of the plane through the than 21⁄4 times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the
throat. However, in the case of overlapping fillets the effec- slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded
tive area shall not exceed the nominal cross-sectional area to a radius not less than the thickness of the part containing
of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface. it, except for those ends which extend to the edge of the
(7) Intermittent Fillet Welds. Intermittent fillet welds part.
may be used to transfer calculated stresses across a joint (5) Spacing of Slot Welds. The minimum spacing of
or faying surface, when the strength required is less than lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length
that developed by a continuous fillet weld of the smallest shall be four times the width of the slot. The minimum
permitted size, and to join elements of built-up members. center to center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any
The effective length of any segment of intermittent fillet line shall be two times the length of the slot.
welding shall not be less than four times the weld size (6) Thickness of Plug and Slot Welds. The thickness
with a minimum of 11⁄2 in. (38 mm). of plug and slot welds in material 5⁄8 in. (16 mm) or less
(8) End Returns to Fillet Welds. Side or end fillet in thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material.
welds terminating at ends or sides, respectively, of parts or In material over 5⁄8 in. (16 mm) in thickness, it shall be at
members shall, when required by the designer, be returned least one-half the thickness of the material but not less
continuously around the corners for a distance not less than 5⁄8 in. (16 mm).
64
(7) Effective Shearing Area of Plug and Slot Welds. may reduce the susceptibility of the joint to experience
The effective shearing area of plug and slot welds shall lamellar tearing and provide documentation, including fab-
be considered as the nominal cross-sectional area of the rication requirements, in the Design Output Documents:
hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface. (1) Reduce volume of weld metal to the extent
(f) Full Penetration and Partial Penetration Joints. The practical.
effective area shall be the effective weld length multiplied (2) Select materials that are resistant to lamellar
by the effective throat thickness. tearing.
(1) The effective weld length for any groove weld, (3) Invoke any of the special fabrication require-
square or skewed, shall be the length of weld throughout ments of NF-4441.
which the correct proportioned cross section exists. In a
curved weld it shall be its true length measured along its NF-3324.6 Design Requirements for Bolted Joints.
curvature. The rules and stress limits for bolting shall be as given in
(2) The effective throat thickness of a full penetration this paragraph. The stress limits which must be satisfied
groove weld which shall conform to the requirements of for any Design, Levels A through D, and Test Loadings,
NF-4000 shall be the thickness of the thinner part joined. shall be those given in this paragraph, multiplied by the
No increase is permitted for weld reinforcement. appropriate stress limit factors given in Table NF-3225.2-
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(3) The effective throat of partial penetration groove 1 for the particular Loading specified in the Design Speci-
welds is dependent upon the type of groove. fication (NCA-3250). This product shall not exceed the
(a) For square, U, and J groove welds, the effective yield strength of the material at temperature.
throat is equal to the depth of preparations. (a) Allowable Stresses. Allowable tensile, shearing, and
(b) For V and bevel groove welds with an included bearing stresses in bolts and threaded parts shall be as
angle at the root equal to or greater than 60 deg, the given in the paragraphs below. All allowables are expressed
effective throat shall be the minimum distance from the in ksi (MPa) acting on the actual bolt area available in the
root to the face of the weld. shear planes of the connected parts. All are expressed in
(c) For V and bevel groove welds with an included terms of the ultimate tensile strength at temperature (Table
angle at the root less than 60 deg but equal to or greater U, Section II, Part D, Subpart 1). The shear capacity of
than 45 deg, the effective throat shall be the minimum bolts is directly proportional to the shear area available in
distance from the root to the face of the weld less 1⁄8 in. the shear planes. Shear strength is unaffected by shear
(3 mm). plane location.
(d) For V and bevel groove welds, with an included (1) Tensile Stress Only. Bolts loaded in direct tension
angle at the root less than 45 deg but equal to or greater shall be so proportioned that their average tensile stress
than 30 deg, the effective throat shall be the minimum Ftb , computed on the basis of the actual tensile stress area
distance from the root to the face of the weld less 1⁄8 in. available (independent of any initial tightening force), shall
(3 mm) and multiplied by 0.75. The required effective not exceed
throat must be specified on the drawing.
(e) For V and bevel groove welds, angles less than For ferritic steels
30 deg at the root are not allowed.
Su
(f) For flare bevel groove welds, when filled flush Ftb p
2
to the surface, the effective throat shall be 0.31 times the
outside radius of the curved section forming the groove. For austenitic steels
For formed rectangular tubing, the outside radius may be
considered as two times the wall thickness. Su
Ftb p
(g) For flare V groove welds, when filled flush to 3.33
the surface, the effective throat shall be 0.5 (except use
0.375 for GMAW when R ≥ 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) times the The applied load shall be the sum of the external load
outside radius when the outside radius is less than 1 in. and any tension resulting from prying action produced by
(25 mm). For flare bevel groove welds, the effective throat deformation of the connected parts.
shall be 0.312 times the outside radius. (2) Shearing Stress Only
(h) Consideration of Lamellar Tearing. Welded (a) Bearing-Type Joints
joint configurations causing significant through-thickness (1) Threads Excluded From Shear Planes. The
tensile stress [as defined in NF-1215(b)] during fabrication allowable shear Fvb in bolts and threaded parts loaded in
and/or service on rolled product forms should be avoided. direct shear, expressed in ksi (MPa) of actual shear stress
However, if this type of construction is used, the designer area available (applicable to the total nominal bolt area in
should consider one or several of the following factors that the shear planes in this case), shall not exceed
65
For ferritic steels TABLE NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1

EFFECTIVE SLIP COEFFICIENT VERSUS
0.62Su SURFACE CONDITION
Fvb p
3
Slip Coefficient,
Surface Condition ks
For austenitic steels
Clean mill scale 0.25
0.62Su
Fvb p
5 Grit-blasted carbon and low 0.41
alloy high-strength steel
(2) Threads Not Excluded From Shear Planes.
The allowable shear stress Fvb in bolts and threaded parts Grit-blasted, heat-treated steel 0.25
loaded in direct shear, expressed in ksi (MPa) of actual
Hot dip galvanized wire, 0.31
shear stress area available (applicable to the total bolt root
brushed, scored, or blasted
area in the shear planes in this case), shall not exceed
Blast cleaned, zinc rich paint 0.31
For ferritic steels
Blast cleaned, zinc silicate paint 0.45
0.62Su
Fvb p
3
For austenitic steels LSu

Fp p ≤ 1.5Su
2d
0.62Su
Fvb p
5 (b) Minimum Edge Distance
(3) Combined Tensile and Shear Stresses (1) Minimum Edge Distance in Line of Load. In both
(a) Bearing-Type Joints. Bolts subjected to com- bearing- and friction-type joints the minimum distance
bined shear and tension shall be so proportioned that either from the center of the end bolt in a connection to that edge
the shear or the tensile stress, ksi (MPa) of actual cross- of the connected part toward which the load is directed
sectional area, shall not exceed the value derived from the shall be determined in accordance with either
ellipse equation below when the corresponding computed NF-3324.6(b)(1)(a) or (b)(1)(b).
tensile or shearing stress is substituted (a) The edge distance shall satisfy all of the fol-
lowing:
ft2 fv2
+ p1 (1) L /d ≥ 0.5 + 1.43 (fp /Su)
Ftb2 Fvb2
(2) L /d ≥ 1.2
The allowable tensile and shear stress values shall be those (3) fp /Su ≤ 1.5
derived from the equations given in NF-3324.6(a)(1) and where
(a)(2). fp p P /dt
(b) Friction-Type Joints. A bolt in a connection
(b) The edge distance shall be as shown in Table
designed as a friction-type joint is not subjected to shear
NF-3324.6(b)(1)-1.
(provided the joint does not slip into bearing); it experi-
(c) Maximum Edge Distance. The maximum distance
ences tension only. Friction-type joints shall be designed
from the center of any rivet or bolt to the nearest edge of
as given in NF-3324.6(a)(4).
parts in contact shall be 12 times the thickness of the
(4) Slip Resistance — Friction-Type Joints. The max-
connected part under consideration, but shall not exceed
imum slip resistance to which a friction-type joint may be
6 in. (150 mm). Bolted joints in unpainted steel exposedto
designed shall not exceed the value of Ps , calculated in
atmospheric corrosion require special limitations on pitch
the following equation [see Table NF-3324.6(a)(4)-1]:
and edge distance.
Ps p mnTi ks For unpainted, built-up members made of weathering
steel which will be exposed to atmospheric corrosion, the
If the joint clamping force will be reduced by any direct spacing of fasteners connecting a plate and a shape or two-
tension load on the joint, the Ti value shall be reduced by plate components in contact shall not exceed 14 times the
an equivalent amount before substituting in the aboveequa- thickness of the thinnest part nor 7 in. (175 mm), and the
tion. SA-307 and austenitic steel bolting shall not be used maximum edge distance shall not exceed eight times the
for friction-type joints. thickness of the thinnest part, or 5 in. (125 mm).
(5) Bearing Stress. Allowable bearing stress on the (d) Minimum Spacing. The distance between centers of
projected area of bolts in bearing type connections shall be standard, oversized, or slotted fastener holes shall be not
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 66
TABLE NF-3324.6(b)(1)-1 TABLE NF-3332.2-1

MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCES CLASSIFICATION OF LOADING CONDITIONS
Minimum Edge Distance for Punched, Reamed, Number of Loading Cycles
or Drilled Holes, in. (mm)
Loading Condition From To
At Rolled Edges of
Plates, Shapes, or 1 20,000 100,000
Bolt Bars, or Gas Cut [Note (1)] [Note (2)]
Diameter, At Sheared Edges 2 100,000 500,000
in. (mm) Edges [Note (1)] [Note (3)]
3 500,000 2,000,000
1 7 3
⁄2 (12.7) ⁄8 (22.2) ⁄4 (19.1) [Note (4)]
5
⁄8 (15.9) 11⁄8 (28.6) 7
⁄8 (22.2) 4 >2,000,000
3
⁄4 (19.1) 11⁄4 (31.8) 1 (25.4)
7
⁄8 (22.2) 11⁄2 (38.1) [Note (2)] 11⁄8 (28.6) NOTES:
1 (25.4) 13⁄4 (44.5) [Note (2)] 11⁄4 (31.8) (1) Approximately equivalent to two applications every day for 25
11⁄8 (28.6) 2 (50.8) 11⁄2 (38.1) years.
11⁄4 (31.8) 21⁄4 (57.2) 15⁄8 (41.3) (2) Approximately equivalent to ten applications every day for 25 years.
>11⁄4 (31.8) 13⁄4 ⴛ diam. 11⁄4 ⴛ diam. (3) Approximately equivalent to 50 applications every day for 25 years.
(4) Approximately equivalent to 200 applications every day for 25
NOTES: years.
(1) All edge distances in this column may be reduced 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm)
when the hole is at the point where stress does not exceed 25% of
the maximum allowed stress in the element.
(2) These may be 11⁄4 in. (32 mm) at the ends of beam connection angles.
NF-3331.2 Definitions. High cycle fatigue, as used in
this Subsubarticle, is defined as the damage that may result
less than three times the nominal diameter of the bolt. in fracture after a sufficient number of fluctuations of stress.
Along a line of transmitted force, the distance between Stress range is defined as the numerical sum of maximum
centers of holes shall be not less than the following: repeated tensile and compressive stresses or the sum of
Standard Holes: 2P /Sut + d /2 maximum shearing stresses of opposite direction at a given
(e) Effective Bearing Area. The effective bearing area point, resulting from differing arrangements of live load.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
of bolts shall be the diameter multiplied by the length in

bearing, except that for countersunk bolts one-half the
depth of the countersink shall be deducted. NF-3332 Design Requirements
(f) Long Grips. SA-307 bolts, which carry calculated NF-3332.1 Design Considerations. In the design of
stress and the grip of which exceeds five diameters, shall members and connections subject to repeated variation of
have their number increased 1% for each additional 1⁄16 in. live load stress, consideration shall be given to the number
(1.5 mm) in the grip. of stress cycles, the expected range of stress, and the type
(g) Anchor Bolts. Anchor bolts shall be designed to and location of member or detail.
provide resistance to all conditions of tension and shear at
the bases of columns, including the net tensile components NF-3332.2 Classification of Loading Conditions.
of any bending moments which may result from fixation Loading conditions shall be classified as shown in Table
or partial fixation of columns. NF-3332.2-1.
NF-3324.7 Design Requirements for Column Bases. NF-3332.3 Stress Categories. Stress categories for use
Proper provision shall be made to transfer thecolumn loads in establishing the maximum range of stress in relation to
and moments, if any, to the footings and foundations. the type of member or part, material, and location shall be
as stipulated in Table NF-3332.3-1. For illustrations of the
members and parts, see Fig. NF-3332.3-1.
NF-3330 HIGH CYCLE FATIGUE DESIGN
FOR CLASS 1 NF-3332.4 Allowable Stresses. The maximum stress
shall not exceed the basic allowable stress permitted by
NF-3331 Introduction
NF-3322 and the maximum range of stress shall not exceed
NF-3331.1 Scope. Members and their connections, sub- that given in Table NF-3332.4-1.
ject to a number of cycles (>20,000) of fatigue loading
resulting in damage as defined in NF-3331.2, shall be pro- NF-3332.5 Provisions for Mechanical Fasteners.
portioned to satisfy the stress range limitations provided Range in tensile stress in properly tightened ASTM A325
therein. or ASTM A490 bolts need not be considered, but the
67
TABLE NF-3332.3-1
STRESS CATEGORIES
Kind of Stress Category Illustrative Example
General Stress (See Table [Note (2)] Sketch Nos.
Condition Situation [Note (1)] NF-3332.4-1) (See Fig. NF-3332.3-1)
Plain material Base metal with rolled or cleaned surfaces T or Rev. A (1), (2)
Built-up members Base metal and weld metal in members, with- T or Rev. B (3) through (6)
out attachments, built up plates or shapes
connected by continuous full or partial pene-
tration groove welds, or continuous fillet
welds parallel to the direction of applied
stress
Base metal in members without attachments, T or Rev. B′ (3) through (6)

built-up plates or shapes connected by con-
tinuous full-penetration groove welds or by
continuous fillet welds parallel to the direc-
tion of applied stress
Calculated flexural stress fb in base metal at T or Rev. C (7)

toe of welds on girder webs or flanges adja-
cent to welded transverse stiffeners
Base metal at ends of partial length welded

cover plates narrower than the flange hav-
ing square or tapered ends, with or without
welds across the ends or wider than flange
with welds across the ends
Flange thickness ≤ 0.8 in. (20 mm) T or Rev. E (5)
Flange thickness > 0.8 in. (20 mm) T or Rev. E′ (5)
Base metal at end of partial length welded E′ (5)

cover plates wider than the flange without
welds across the ends
Mechanically fas- Base metal at gross section of high-strength T or Rev. B (8)
tened connec- bolted slip-critical connections, except axi-
tions ally loaded joints which induce out-of-plane
bending in connected material
Base metal at net section of other mechani- T or Rev. D (8), (9)

cally fastened joints [Note (3)]
Base metal at net section of fully tensioned T or Rev. B (8), (9)

high-strength, bolted-bearing connections
Fillet welded con- Base metal at intermittent fillet welds T or Rev. E
nections
Base metal at junction of axially loaded mem-
bers with fillet-welded end connections.
Welds shall be disposed about the axis of
the member so as to balance weld stresses
b ≤ 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E (17), (18)
b > 1 in. (25 mm) T or Rev. E′ (17), (18)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
68
TABLE NF-3332.3-1
STRESS CATEGORIES (CONT’D)
Stress (See Table [Note (2)] Sketch Nos.
General Condition Situation [Note (1)] NF-3332.4-1) (See Fig. NF-3332.3-1)
Fillet welded con- Base metal at members connected with trans-

nections verse fillet welds
(cont’d) b ≤ 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) T or Rev. C (20), (21)
b > 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) [Note (4)] (20), (21)
Fillet welds Weld metal of continuous or intermittent longi- S F (15), (17), (18), (20),
tudinal or transverse fillet welds [Note (4)] (21)
Groove welds Base metal and weld metal at full penetration T or Rev. B (10)
groove welded splices of parts of similar
cross section ground flush, with grinding in
the direction of applied stress and with weld
soundness established by radiographic or
ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Table 9.25.3 of AWS
D1.1-77
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration T or Rev. B (12), (13)
groove welded splices at transitions in width
or thickness, with welds ground to provide
slopes no steeper than 1 to 21⁄2, with grind-
ing in the direction of applied stress, and
with weld soundness established by radio-
graphic or ultrasonic inspection in accor-
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
dance with the requirements of Table
9.25.3 of AWS D1.1-77
Base metal and weld metal at full penetration T or Rev. C (10) through (13)
groove welded splices, with or without tran-
sitions having slopes no greater than 1 to
21⁄2, when reinforcement is not removed and
with weld soundness established by radio-
graphic or ultrasonic inspection in accor-
dance with the requirements of Table
9.25.3 of AWS D1.1-77
Partial penetra- Weld metal of partial penetration transverse T or Rev. F (16)
tion groove groove welds, based on effective throat area [Note (4)]
welds of the weld or welds
Plug or slot welds Base metal at plug or slot welds T or Rev. E (27)
Shear on plug or slot welds S F (27)
69
TABLE NF-3332.3-1
Attachments Base metal at details attached by full-penetra-

tion groove welds subject to longitudinal
and/or transverse loading when the detail
embodies a transition radius R with the
weld termination ground smooth and for
transverse loading, the weld soundness estab-
lished by radiographic or ultrasonic inspec-
tion in accordance with 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of
AWS D1.1
Longitudinal loading
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. B (14)
24 in. (600 mm) > R > 6 in. (150 mm) T or Rev. C (14)
6 in. (150 mm) > R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14)
Detail base metal for transverse loading:
equal thickness and reinforcement
removed
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. B (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
equal thickness and reinforcement not
removed
R > 24 in. (600 mm) T or Rev. C (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse load-
ing: unequal thickness and reinforce-
ment removed
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (14)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
unequal thickness and reinforcement
not removed
all R T or Rev. E (14), (15)
Detail base metal for transverse loading
R > 6 in. (150 mm) T or Rev. C (19)
2 in. (50 mm) > R T or Rev. E (19)
Base metal at detail attached by full-penetra-

tion groove welds subject to longitudinal loa-
ding
2 < a < 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) T or Rev. D (15)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b ≤ 1 T or Rev. E (15)
in. (25 mm)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b > 1 T or Rev. E′ (15)
in. (25 mm)
70
TABLE NF-3332.3-1
Attachments Base metal at detail attached by fillet welds or

(cont’d) partial-penetration groove welds subject to
longitudinal loading
a ≤ 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. C (15), (23) through (26)
2 in. (50 mm) < a ≤ 12b or 4 in. (100 T or Rev. D (15), (23), (24), (26)
mm)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b ≤ 1 T or Rev. E (15), (23), (24), (26)
in. (25 mm)
a > 12b or 4 in. (100 mm) when b > 1 T or Rev. E′ (15), (23), (24), (26)
in. (25 mm)
Base metal attached by fillet welds or partial-

penetration groove welds subjected to longi-
tudinal loading when the weld termination
embodies a transition radius with the weld
termination ground smooth:
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (19)
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. E (19)
Fillet-welded attachments where the weld ter-

mination embodies a transition radius, weld
termination ground smooth, and main mate-
rial subject to longitudinal loading:
R > 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. D (19)
R ≤ 2 in. (50 mm) T or Rev. E (19)
Base metal at stud-type shear connector T or Rev. C (22)

attached by fillet weld or automatic end
weld
Shear stress on nominal area of stud-type S F

shear connectors
NOTES:
(1) T signifies range in tensile stress only; Rev. signifies a range involving reversal of tensile or compressive stress; S signifies range in shear,
including shear stress reversal.
(2) These examples are provided as guidelines and are not intended to exclude other reasonably similar situations.
(3) When stress reversal is involved, use of SA-307 bolts is not recommended.
(4) Allowable fatigue stress range for transverse partial penetration and transverse fillet welds is a function of the effective throat, depth of
penetration and plate thickness. See Frank and Fisher, “Fatigue Strength of Fillet Welded Cruciform Joints,” Journal of the Structural
Division, ASCE, Vol. 105, No. 519, 1979.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
71
FIG. NF-3332.3-1 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
(1)
(8)
(2)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(3)
(9)
Groove or fillet weld
(4) (10)
Plate as shown
or wider than B E or E' Category
flange (11)
(5)
(12)
(6)
(13)
(7)
72
FIG. NF-3332.3-1 ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES (CONT’D)
Groove weld
(14) (21)
(15) a
(22)
(16)
b (avg.)
(23)
b = thickness
(17) a
b
(18) (24)
a
b
Groove or fillet weld
(19)
(25)
a a
(26)
b
(20) b
(27)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 73
maximum computed stress, including prying action, shall including areas within the boundaries of the connections,
not exceed the values given in NF-3332.4 subject to the shall be so proportioned that
following stipulations:
Vu ≤ 0.555Sytd (1)
(a) Connections subject to more than 20,000 cycles, but
not more than 500,000 cycles of direct tension may be where Vu is the shear, kips (N), that would be produced
designed for the stress produced by the sum of applied and by the required factored loading.
prying loads if the prying load does not exceed 10% of (b) Combined Loads. When the interaction method of
the externally applied load. If the prying force exceeds calculation (Section III, Division 1, Appendices, A-9000)
10%, the allowable tensile stress given in NF-3324.6(a)(1) is used, members shall be so proportioned that the interac-
shall be reduced 40%, applicable to the external load alone. tion of factored loads at a section shall satisfy the interac-
(b) Connections subject to more than 500,000 cycles of tion equations of Table A-9210(d)-1 (Section III, Division
direct tension may be designed for the stress produced by 1, Appendices), except that columns subjected to combined
the sum of applied and prying loads if the prying load does bending and compression shall be governed by the require-
not exceed 5% of the externally applied load. If the prying ments of NF-3342.2(b)(3).
force exceeds 5%, the allowable tensile stress given in (c) Depth–Thickness Ratio of Webs. The depth–thick-
NF-3324.6(a)(1) shall be reduced 50%, applicable to the ness ratio of webs of members subjected to plastic bending
external load alone. The use of other bolts andthreaded shall not exceed the value given by eqs. (2) and (3), as
parts subject to tensile fatigue loading is not recommended. applicable
Bolts and threaded parts subjected to cyclic loading in
shear may be designed for the bearing-type shear stresses
冤冢冣冥 when P ≤ 0.27
given in NF-3324.6(a)(2) insofar as the fatigue strength of d 412 P P
p 1 − 1.4 (2)
the fasteners is concerned. t 冪 Sy Py y
(SI Units)
NF-3340 LIMIT ANALYSIS DESIGN FOR
冤冢冣冥 when P ≤ 0.27
d 1 080 P P
CLASS 1 p 1 − 1.4 (2)
t 冪 Sy P y y
NF-3341 Introduction
NF-3341.1 Scope (U.S. Customary Units)
(a) Subject to the limitation of this Subsubarticle, simple d 257 P
or continuous beams, rigid frames, and similar portions of p when > 0.27 (3)
t 冪 Sy Py
structures rigidly constructed so as to be continuous over
at least one interior support13 may be proportioned on the (SI Units)
basis of plastic design, namely, on the basis of low bound d 673 P
p when > 0.27 (3)
collapse load. This strength, as determined by rational anal- t 冪 Sy P y
ysis, shall not be less than that required to support a factored
(d) Web Crippling. Web stiffeners are required on a
load equal to 1.7 times those of the level A and Level B
member at a point of load application where a plastic hinge
Service Limits or 1.3 times that of the Level C Service
would form. At points on a member where the concentrated
Limits.
load delivered by the flanges of a member framing into it
(b) Connections joining a portion of a structure designed
would produce web crippling opposite the compression
on the basis of plastic behavior with a portion not so
flange or high tensile stress in the tension flange, web
designed need be no more rigid than ordinary seat and cap
stiffeners are required in accordance with the provisions
angle or ordinary web connections.
of NF-3324.2(b).
(c) When plastic design is used as the basis for propor-
(e) Width–Thickness Ratios of Flanges
tioning continuous beams and structural frames, the provi-
(1) The width–thickness ratio for flanges of rolled W
sions relating to allowable working stress contained in
shapes and similar built-up single web shapes that would
NF-3320 are waived. Except as modified by these rules,
be subjected to compression involving hinge rotation under
all other provisions of NF-3320 shall govern.
ultimate loading shall not exceed the following values:
NF-3342 Design Requirements Sy bf / 2tf
NF-3342.1 General Design Requirements 36 (248) 8.5
(a) Shear. Unless reinforced by diagonal stiffeners or 42 (290) 8.0
a doubler plate, the webs of column, beams, and girders, 45 (310) 7.4
50 (345) 7.0
13
As used here, interior support may be taken to include a rigid frame 55 (380) 6.6
knee formed by the junction of a column and a sloping or horizontal 60 (413) 6.3
beam or girder. 65 (448) 6.0
74
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

TABLE NF-3332.4-1
ALLOWABLE STRESS RANGES
Allowable Range of Stress, Fsr , ksi (MPa)
Stress Category Loading Loading Loading Loading
Used in Table Condition 1, Condition 2, Condition 3, Condition 4,
NF-3332.3-1 Fsr 1 Fsr 2 Fsr 3 Fsr 4
A 63 (430) 37 (255) 24 (165) 24 (165)

B 49 (340) 29 (200) 18 (125) 16 (110)
B′ 39 (270) 23 (160) 15 (100) 12 (85)
C 35 (240) 21 (145) 13 (90) 101 (70)
D 28 (195) 16 (110) 10 (70) 7 (50)
E 22 (150) 13 (90) 8 (55) 5 (35)
E′ 16 (110) 9 (60) 6 (40) 3 (20)
F 15 (100) 12 (85) 9 (60) 8 (55)
NOTE:
(1) Flexural stress range of 12 ksi (83 MPa) permitted at toe of stiffener welds on webs or flanges.
The thickness of sloping flanges may be taken as their Cm p coefficient defined in NF-3322.1(e)
average thickness. The right-hand side of eq. (7) may be replaced by 1.5 when
(2) The width–thickness ratio of similarly com- it can be shown that the bending moment results only in
pressed flange plates in box sections and cover plates shall secondary stress.
not exceed 190 / 冪 Sy (500 / 冪 Sy). For this purpose the width (4) For columns braced in the weak direction
of a cover plate shall be taken as the distance between
longitudinal lines of connecting high strength bolts or Mm p Mp
welds.
(5) For columns unbraced in the weak direction
NF-3342.2 Specific Design Requirements
(a) Beams. The maximum bending strength of a flexural
(l / ry ) 冪 Sy
member shall be
Mm p Mp 1.07 − 冤 3,160 冥
≤ Mp (8)
Mp p Sy Zx (4)
(SI Units)
(b) Columns
(l / ry ) 冪 Sy
(1) In the plane of bending of columns which would
develop a plastic hinge at ultimate loading, the slenderness
Mm p Mp 1.07 − 冤 8 280 冥
≤ Mp (8)
ratio l /r shall not exceed Cc defined in NF-3322.1(c). (c) Basis for Maximum StrengthDetermination. For one
(2) The maximum strength of an axially loaded com- or two story frames, the maximum strength may be deter-
pression member shall be taken as mined by a routine plastic analysis procedure, and the
frame instability effect P⌬ may be ignored. For braced
Pcr p 1.7AFa (5)
multistory frames, provisions should be made to include
where A is the gross area of the member, and Fa , as defined the frame instability effect in the design of the bracing
by eq. (4) in NF-3322.1(c)(1), is based upon the applicable system and frame members. For unbraced multistory
slenderness ratio. frames, the frame instability effect should be included
(3) Members subject to combined axial load and directly in the calculations for maximum strength. The
bending moment, including moment resulting in secondary vertical bracing system for a plastically designed braced
stress, shall be proportioned so as to satisfy the following multistory frame shall be shown to be adequate, as deter-
interaction formulas: mined by a rational analysis, to prevent buckling of the
structure under factored gravity load, and maintain the
P Cm M lateral stability of the structure, including consideration of
+ ≤ 1.0 (6)
Pcr [1 − (P / Pe )] Mm the overturning effects of drift, under factored horizontal
P M and gravity loads.
+ ≤ 1.0; M ≤ Mp (7) (1) Stability of Braced Frames. The vertical bracing
Py 1.18Mp
system may be considered to function together with in-
where plane shear-resisting exterior and interior walls, floor slabs,
Pe p 1.92 AF′e , where F′e is defined in NF-3322.1(e) and roof decks, if these walls, slabs, and decks are secured
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
75
to the structural frames. The columns, girders, beams, and where

diagonal members, when used as the vertical bracing sys-
tems, may be considered to comprise a cantilever, simply M ′/Mp p the end moment ratio, positive when the seg-
connected truss in the analysis for frame buckling and ment is bent in reverse curvature and negative
lateral stability. Axial deformation of all members in the when bent in single curvature
vertical bracing system shall be included in the lateral
stability analysis. The axial force in these members, caused (2) The provisions of NF-3342.2(d)(1) need not apply
by factored horizontal and gravity loads, shall not exceed in the region of the last hinge to form, in the failure mecha-
0.85Py , where Py is the product of yield stress times area nism assumed as the basis for proportioning a given mem-
of the member. Girders and beams included in the vertical ber, nor in members oriented with their weak axis normal
bracing system of a braced multistory frame shall be pro- to the plane of bending. However, in the region of the last
portioned for axial force and moment caused by the concur- hinge to form and in regions not adjacent to a plastic hinge,
rent factored horizontal and gravity loads, in accordance the maximum distance between points of lateral support
with eq. (5) with Pcr taken as the maximum axial strength shall be such as to satisfy the requirements of eq. (17),
of the beam, based on the actual slenderness ratio between (18), or (19) of NF-3322.1(d)(5), or eq. (20) or (21) of
braced points in the plane of bending. NF-3322.1(e)(1). For this case, the value of fa and fb shall
(2) Stability of Unbraced Frames. The strength of an be computed from the moment and axial force at factored
unbraced multistory frame shall be determined by a rational loading, divided by the applicable load factor.
analysis which includes the effects of frame instability and (3) Members built into a masonry wall and having
column axial deformation. Such a frame shall be designed their web perpendicular to this wall can be assumed to
to be stable under the following conditions: be laterally supported with respect to their weak axis of
(a) factored gravity loads bending.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(b) factored gravity plus factored horizontal loads

(e) Connections
The axial force in the column at factored load levels shall (1) General Requirements. All connections, the rigid-
not exceed 0.75Py. ity of which is essential to the continuity assumed as the
(d) Lateral Bracing basis for the analysis, shall be capable of resisting the
(1) Members shall be adequately braced to resist lat- moments, shears, and axial loads to which they would be
eral and torsional displacements at the plastic hinge loca- subjected by the full factored loading, or any probable
tions associated with the failure mechanism. The laterally partial distribution thereof.
unsupported distance lcr from such braced hingelocations
(2) Corner Connections. Corner connections
to similarly braced adjacent points on the member or frame
(haunches) that are tapered or curved for architectural rea-
shall not exceed the value determined from eq. (9) or (10),
sons shall be so proportioned that the full plastic bending
as applicable
strength of the section adjacent to the connection can be
(U.S. Customary Units) developed, if required.
lcr / ry p 1,375 / Sy + 25 (9) (3) Stiffeners. Stiffeners shall be used, as required,

to preserve the flange continuity of interrupted members
(SI Units) at their junction with other members in a continuous frame.
lcr / ry p 9 470 / Sy + 25 (9)
Such stiffeners shall be placed in pairs on opposite sides
of the web of the member which extends continuously
when through the joint.
+1.0 > M ′ / Mp > −0.5 (4) Stress in Bolts and Welds. High strength bolts,
SA-307 bolts, and welds shall be proportioned to resist the
or forces produced at factored load, using stresses equal to
1.7 times those given in NF-3324.6(a) for bolts and Table
NF-3324.5(a)-1 for welds. In general, groove welds are
lcr / ry p 1,375 / Sy (10) preferable to fillet welds, but their use is not mandatory.
(SI Units) (5) Joints With Painted Contact Surfaces. High
strength bolts may be used in joints having painted contact
lcr / ry p 9 470 / Sy (10) surfaces when these joints are of such size that the slip
when required to produce bearing would not interfere with the
formation, at factored loading, of the plastic hinges
−0.5 ≥ M ′ / Mp > −1.0 assumed in the design.
76
NF-3350 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 Level A, B, or C Limits have been designated shall be
AND MC determined by means of the equations in the following
subparagraphs. For Level D Limits, see Appendix F of
The design by analysis of Class 2 and MC supports shall
Section III, Division 1, Appendices. The load rating for
be in accordance with NF-3320 and NF-3340.
Test Loadings shall be determined in accordance with the
requirements for Service Level B limits.
NF-3360 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 3 NF-3382.1 Nomenclature. The symbols used in this
paragraph are defined as follows:
The design by analysis of Class 3 supports shall be in
accordance with NF-3320 and NF-3340. Fall p allowable value for the type of stress in
NF-3310, ksi (MPa)
K l p load rating coefficient for supports in com-
NF-3370 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS pression
Su(act) p actual tensile strength of the material used in
Supports of all types may be designed by experimental the part or support which had reached ultimate
stress analysis in accordance with Appendix II of Section capacity during the test, ksi (MPa)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
III, Division 1, Appendices. Sy(act) p actual yield strength of the material used in
the part or support which yielded during the
test, ksi (MPa)
NF-3380 DESIGN BY LOAD RATING
TLu p support test load at which a substantial increase
NF-3381 Procedure for Load Rating in load displacement results in zero or negative
The procedure for load rating shall consist of imposing increase in actual support load
a total load on one or more duplicate full-size samples for TLy p support test load at or below yield
a support equal to or less than the load under which the NF-3382.2 Linear-Type Supports. The load ratings
support fails to perform its required function. Full-size for Linear-Type Supports for the Service Loadings shall
samples composed of various parts may have each part or be determined by the following equations:
a number of parts load rated provided that all parts in the Design and Level A Limits (lower of the two values)
load path are either load rated or otherwise qualified per
Fall
NF-3300 or by experimental stress analysis. When parts load rating(yield) p TLy ⴛ 1.0 (1)
Sy (act)
are connected by bolting or welding, the connection shall
be either load rated or qualified per NF-3225 or NF-3226. Fall
Should more than one part be load rated in a single load Su(act)
test, then the load rating equations of NF-3380 shall be Test and Level B Limits (lower of the two values)
evaluated for each part using the part’s Sy(act) and Su(act)
Fall
values. The part having the lowest load rating shall estab- load rating(yield) p TLy ⴛ 1.33 (2)
Sy (act)
lish the load rating for the combination of parts. A single
test sample is permitted, but in that case, the load ratings Fall
shall be decreased by 10%. Otherwise, tests shall be run Su(act)
on a statistically significant number of samples. The per- Level C Limits (lower of the two values)
missible types of welded joints shall be as permitted for
the specific class of construction in NF-3226.1, NF-3256.1, Fall
NF-3266,NF-3324. The requirements of NF-3324.5(b) for Sy (act)
size of fillet and partial penetration welds do not apply, Fall
provided the full-size sample is fabricated for testing using Su(act)
the minimum weld stipulated in the Design Drawings. NF-3382.3 Supports Loaded in Compression. The
Bolted joints in the test sample shall be made up using the load rating for the supports loaded in compression shall
lowest strength bolt material and minimum edge distance be determined for Service Level A, B, and C by the methods
allowed by the specification. of NF-3382.2. In addition, for cases where buckling gov-
erns, TLu shall be corrected for the ratio of Young’s Modu-
NF-3382 Load Ratings in Relation to Design lus at the Design Temperature to Young’s Modulus at the
Service and Test Loadings test temperature. The load rating shall be determined by
the following equations:
The load rating for Design Loadings shall be determined
in accordance with the requirements for Service Level A Design and Level A Limits
limits. The load ratings for Service Loadings for which load rating p 0.52 K l ⴛ TLu
77
Test and Level B Limits NF-3411.2 Standard Supports Used as Piping Sup-
ports. Standard Supports may be used as piping supports,
load rating p 0.67 K l ⴛ TLu as defined in NF-3600.
Level C Limits NF-3411.3 Loads
(a) Standard Supports shall be capable of carrying all
load rating p 0.67 K l ⴛ TLu
concurrently acting loads listed in NF-3111 and stipulated
K l p 1.0 for elastic buckling in the Design Specification. The supports shall be designed
to provide the required supporting effort and to permit the
Sy designed piping or component movement.
Kl p for inelastic buckling
Sy(act) (b) Spring supports shall be capable of exerting a sup-
porting force equal to the load, as determined by weight–
NF-3382.4 Alternate Load Rating Method Using TLy
balance calculations, plus the weight of all hanger parts
or TLu Test Results Only. Either TLy or TLu test results
such as clamps and rods that will be supported by a spring
may be used to establish a support load rating provided
at the point of attachment to a pressure retaining component
the load rating as determined by the method of NF-3382.2
or to an integral attachment.
or NF-3382.3 is modified as follows:
(1) The design shall be such as to prevent complete
(a) For load rating based on TLy test results only
release of the piping or component load in the event of
(1) for supports constructed of materials having defi-
spring failure or misalignment.
nitely determinable yield points and specified minimum
(2) When springs are to be enclosed in spaces where
Sy /Su ratios not greater than 0.625, the load rating shall be
high ambient temperatures occur, the spring material shall
multiplied by 0.83. If Sy (act) of the material is not known,
be such that the spring constants will not be significantly
150% of the material specified minimum yield strength
changed at the temperature to be experienced.
shall be assumed as the Sy /Sy (act) in place of multiplier 0.83
(c) Snubbers shall meet the requirements of
(2) for supports constructed of carbon steel with spec-
NF-3411.3(a), (c)(1), and (c)(2).
ified minimum tensile strengths of not over 70,000 psi (480
(1) The following occasional loads shall be con-
MPa), Sy (act) shall be increased by 5,000 psi (34 MPa) prior
sidered:
to determining the load rating
(a) seismic inertial
(3) for all other materials the determined load rating
(b) seismic anchor displacement
shall be multiplied by 0.67
(c) hydraulic transient loads resulting from, but not
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
For supports loaded in compression, a TLu test shall be limited to, water hammer, steam hammer, pump startup,
performed with the compressive load rating determined in pump shutdown, and safety and safety relief valve dis-
accordance with NF-3382.3. charges, as specified in the Design Specification
(b) For load rating based on TLu test results, the deter- (2) Thermal Expansion and Thermal Anchor Dis-
mined load rating shall be multiplied by 0.50. placement. The snubber shall not resist the effects of ther-
mal growth of the component, the piping system, or the
anchorage to the degree where it imposes a significant load
or stress on the piping or component.
NF-3400 DESIGN RULES FOR STANDARD
SUPPORTS
NF-3412 Standard Support Items
NF-3410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NF-3412.1 Constant Support Spring Hangers. Con-
The following requirements apply in addition to the stant support spring hangers may be used to support piping
requirements of NF-3100, NF-3200, and NF-3300. or components at those locations requiring a substantially
uniform supporting force throughout the travel range but
which, while subject to thermal movement, cannot tolerate
NF-3411 General Design Requirements appreciable variability of the supporting force. They shall
Standard Supports (NF-1214) shall conform to the have a mean variability (deviation), including friction, of
design considerations of NF-3120, the design rules of no more than 6% throughout the travel range. Deviation is
NF-3200 or NF-3300, and the following additional require- the sum of kinematic friction and manufacturing tolerance
ments. factors. Determination of deviation is by load test machine
and is calculated as follows:
NF-3411.1 Standard Supports Used as Component
Supports. Standard Supports may be used as component deviation p (maximum reading moving down
supports, as defined in NF-3500. − minimum reading moving up)
78
⫼ (maximum reading moving down (c) The Design Specification shall contain, as a mini-
+ minimum reading moving up) mum, the following:
(1) the Design Loadings for loading conditions and
07 NF-3412.2 Variable Support Spring Hangers. Vari-
transients, and combinations of loadings for which the
able support spring hangers may be used to support piping
snubber is designed to accommodate
or components at those locations subject to vertical move-
(2) required force, time, and displacement rela-
ment due to temperature differences. The variability factor
tionship
of the supporting force is calculated by the following
(3) the environmental conditions that the snubber will
equation:
be exposed to, such as
variability factor p (travel ⴛ spring rate) /load (a) temperature
(b) irradiation
The recommended maximum variability factor is 0.25. (c) corrosive atmosphere
(a) The variability factor of the supporting force (d) moisture
resulting from movement of the piping or component shall (e) airborne particles
be considered in the loadings used in the stress analysis (4) consideration of material characteristics, such as
of the piping or component. (a) compatibility
(b) Variable support spring hangers shall be provided (b) stability
with means to limit misalignment, buckling, and eccentric (c) fire resistance
loading and to prevent overstressing of the spring. (d) wear
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(c) It is recommended that all hangers employing (e) aging

springs be provided with means to indicate at all times the (5) tests which are required prior to installation
compression of the spring with respect to the appropriate (d) Design of functional members such as interconnec-
hot and cold positions of the piping or component. tions, tubing and fittings reservoirs, and flow distributors
NF-3412.3 Hanger Rods. Design loads for threaded shall consider the effect of internal pressure, thermal expan-
hanger rods shall be based on the root area of the threads. sion, and vibration loading.
In no case shall hanger rods less than 3⁄8 in. (10 mm)
diameter be used for supporting pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller, or less than 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) diameter rod for sup- NF-3420 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1
porting pipe NPS 21⁄2 (DN 65) and larger. Pipe, structural NF-3421 General Design Requirements
shapes, or bars may be used instead of hanger rods. Hanger The design of Class 1 Standard Supports shall be in
rods, structural shapes, etc., shall be designed to permit accordance with the requirements of NF-3420 using one
the free movement of piping as indicated in the thermal of the design procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1
stress analysis. The possibility of moment loading of for Class 1 construction.
hanger rods or shapes as a result of pipe motion shall be
considered and avoided unless the support is specifically
designed for such loading. NF-3422 Design of Plate- and Shell-Type
Standard Supports
NF-3412.4 Snubbers14
(a) Snubbers may be incorporated in the system design The requirements of NF-3200 shall be met.
to accommodate Design Mechanical Loads or conditions
of a vibratory or dynamic nature. Snubbers may be attached NF-3423 Design of Linear-Type Standard
to a piping or component to protect it against dynamic type Supports
loading. Snubbers shall allow essentially free movement of
The requirements of NF-3300 shall be met.
the piping or component to which they are attached during
nondynamic application of load such as that imposed by
expansion and contraction. NF-3425 Design of Bolting
(b) Snubbers shall be carefully applied to ensure that The requirements of NF-3225 and NF-3324.6 shallbe
they will perform their intended function without placing met.
unacceptable loads on the piping system or other compo-
nents.
NF-3426 Design of Welded Joints
14 NF-3426.1 Permissible Types. The permissible types
For qualification and inservice testing information pertaining to
snubbers, refer to ASME QME-1 subsection QDR and ASME OM Code of welded joints for Standard Supports are described in
subsection ISTD. paragraphs NF-3226.1 and NF-3256.1. Additional types of
79
FIG. NF-3426.1-1 ADDITIONAL PERMISSIBLE WELDED JOINTS FOR CLASS 1 STANDARD SUPPORTS
joints are as follows. Typical examples of the types are (2) Fillet welds between the edge of a plate and the
shown in Fig. NF-3426.1-1. end surface of a closed tubular section or partially closed
(a) Tee Joints. Tee joints shall be one of the following: tubular section or partially closed formed section, sketches
(1) fillet, double welded, sketch (a-1). (b), (c), and (d). In addition, weld joints (b) and (d) may
(2) fillet, single welded, when double members are be used only if the lengths of the respective legs of the
used, sketch (a-2). fillet weld are equal to the exposed thickness of the plate
(3) fillet, single welded, between a flat surface and and shell elements. Partially closed tubular sections or
the end surface of a closed tubular section or a closed partially closed formed sections as well as the total length
formed section, sketch (f). Partially closed tubular sections of their respective welds shall encompass a minimum of
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
or partially closed formed sections and the total length of 270 deg of the circumference and provide symmetrical
their respective welds shall encompass a minimum of 270 loadings on closure plates.
deg of the circumference and provide symmetrical loadings
(3) The use of welded joints permitted by
on closure plates.
NF-3426.1(a)(3) and (b) is limited to housings for spring
(b) Corner Joints. Corner joints shall be one of the
encapsulation of standard supports.
following:
(1) Partial penetration, without a fillet weld between
the edge of a plate and the end surface of a closed tubular NF-3426.2 Design Stress Intensity and Allowable
section or partially closed formed section, sketch (e). Par- Stress Limits for Welded Joints. The limit of design
tially closed tubular sections or partially closed formed stress intensity or of allowable stress for welded joints for
sections as well as the total length of their respective welds Standard Supports shall not exceed the applicable design
shall encompass a minimum of 270 deg of the circumfer- stress intensity value or allowable stress value for the base
ence and provide symmetrical loadings on closure plates. metal being joined.
80
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 2007 SECTION III, DIVISION 1 — NF
NF-3450 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2 NF-3520 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1
NF-3451 General Design Requirements NF-3521 General Design Requirements
The design of Class 2 Standard Supports shall be in This Subsubarticle provides stress limits for elements
accordance with the requirements of NF-3450 using one of Class 1 component supports. For general requirements
of the design procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1. as to stress determinations, definitions, derivations of stress
intensities, and classification of stresses, refer to NF-3120.
NF-3452 Design of Plate- and Shell-Type
Standard Supports NF-3522 Design of Plate- and Shell-Type
Component Supports
The requirements of NF-3200 shall be met.
(a) The design rules and stress intensity limits which
must be satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are
NF-3453 Design of Linear-Type Standard
given in NF-3220.
Supports
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit
The requirements of NF-3300 shall be met. factors for each loading and stress category are specified
in Table NF-3522(b)-1.
NF-3455 Design of Bolting
The requirements of NF-3225 and NF-3324.6 shall be NF-3523 Design of Linear-Type Component
met. Supports
(a) The design rules and stress limits which must be
NF-3456 Design of Welded Joints satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
NF-3320.
The requirements of NF-3426 shall be met, except that
for groove welded and fillet welded T-joints, the welds
factors for each loading and stress category are specified
may be intermittent instead of continuous.
NF-3460 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 3 NF-3524 Design of Standard Component Supports
The design of Class 3 Standard Supports shall be in (a) The design rules and stress limits which must be
accordance with the requirements of NF-3450, using one satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
of the design procedures indicated in Table NF-3131(a)-1. NF-3420.
factors for each loading and stress category are specified in
NF-3470 DESIGN BY EXPERIMENTAL Table NF-3522(b)-1 or Table NF-3523(b)-1, as applicable.
STRESS ANALYSIS
Standard Supports may be designed by experimental NF-3525 Design of Bolting
stress analysis in accordance with the requirements of The number and cross-sectional area of bolts required
NF-3270 for Plate- and Shell-Type Standard Supports and for the Design Loadings of NF-3112 shall be determined
NF-3370 for Linear-Type Standard Supports. in accordance with the procedures of NF-3324.6.
NF-3480 PROCEDURE FOR LOAD RATING NF-3526 Design of Welded Joints

Standard Supports may be designed by the procedurefor (a) Welded joints in Plate- and Shell-Type Component
load rating in accordance with the requirements of NF-3280 Supports shall be as stipulated in NF-3226.
for Plate- and Shell-Type Standard Supports and NF-3380 (b) Welded joints used in Linear-Type ComponentSup-
for Linear-Type Standard Supports. ports shall be as stipulated in NF-3324.5.
NF-3550 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS

NF-3500 DESIGN RULES FOR 2, 3, AND MC
COMPONENT SUPPORTS NF-3552 Design of Plate- and Shell-Type
NF-3510 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Component Supports
The design of component supports shall be in accordance (a) The design rules and stress limits which must be
with this Subarticle and the applicable general requirements satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
of NF-3110, NF-3210, NF-3310, and NF-3410. NF-3250 and NF-3260.
81
TABLE NF-3522(b)-1
ELASTIC ANALYSIS STRESS CATEGORIES AND STRESS LIMIT FACTORS FOR CLASS 1 PLATE- AND SHELL-TYPE
SUPPORTS DESIGNED BY ANALYSIS — COMPONENT SUPPORTS
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Stress Limit Factors for Loading Categories [Note (1)]

Service Level Service Level B Service Level C Service Level Test
Stress Category Design A [Note (2)] [Note (3)] D Loadings
Primary stresses Km p 1.0 Km p 1.0 Km p 1.33 Km p 1.5 ... Km p 1.33

[Notes (4), (5)]
Kv p 1.0 Kv p 1.0 Kv p 1.33 Kv p 1.5 ... Kv p 1.33
Use
Kbk p 1.0 Kbk p 1.0 Kbk p 1.33 Kbk p 1.5 Appendix Kbk p 1.33
F
but stress ≤ 1⁄2 but stress ≤ 1⁄2 but stress ≤ 1⁄2 but stress ≤ 1⁄2 ... but stress ≤ 1⁄2
of critical of critical of critical of critical of critical
buckling stress buckling stress buckling stress buckling stress buckling stress
Primary plus secon- Evaluation is required for critical buckling for all loading categories. The requirements of this Subarticle shall be
dary stresses met for this evaluation.
[Note (5)]
Peak stresses Evaluation not required.
GENERAL NOTE:
Kbk p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress intensity or membrane plus bending stress intensity (compression only)
Km p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress intensity or membrane plus bending stress intensity (see NF-3221.1
and NF-3221.2)
Kv p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stress (see NF-3223.2)
NOTES:
(1) Control of deformation is not assured by these stress limit factors. When required by Design Specification, deformation control must be
considered separately.
(2) Km , Kv , and Kbk p 1.0 for design of snubbers.
(3) Stress shall not exceed 0.7Su .
(4) For Service Levels A, B, C, and D, stresses induced on the supports by restraint of free-end displacement and anchor motions of piping shall
be considered as primary stresses.
(5) Thermal stresses within the support as defined by NF-3121.11 need not be evaluated. For Service Levels A and B, primary plus secondary
stresses shall be limited to a range of 2Sy or Su at temperature, whichever is less.
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit (b) Welded joints in Linear-Type Component Supports
factors for each loading and stress category are specified shall be as stipulated in NF-3324.5.
NF-3553 Design of Linear-Type Component

Supports
The design rules and stress limits which must be satisfied NF-3570 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS
for the Design and Service Loadings are given in NF-3523.
Component supports of all types may be designed by
NF-3554 Design of Class 2 and 3 Standard experimental stress analysis in accordance with Appendix
Component Supports II of Section III, Division 1, Appendices.
The design of Standard Component Supports shall be
in accordance with NF-3524.

The provision of NF-3525 shall be met.
Component supports of all types may be designed by
NF-3556 Design of Welded Joints load rating in accordance with the requirements of NF-3280
(a) Welded joints in Plate- and Shell-Type Component for Plate- and Shell-Type, NF-3380 for Linear-Type, and
Supports shall be as stipulated in NF-3256 for Class 2 and the applicable Subsubarticle for Standard Component Sup-
MC and NF-3266 for Class 3. ports.
82
TABLE NF-3523(b)-1
ELASTIC ANALYSIS STRESS CATEGORIES AND STRESS LIMIT FACTORS FOR CLASS 1, 2, 3, AND MC LINEAR-
TYPE SUPPORTS DESIGNED BY ANALYSIS — COMPONENT SUPPORTS

[Notes (4), (5)]
[Note (6)] [Note (6)] Use [Note (6)]
Appendix
Kbk p 1.0 Kbk p 1.0 Kbk p 1.33 Kbk p 1.5 F Kbk p 1.33
... ... but stress ≤ 2⁄3 but stress ≤ 2⁄3 ... but stress ≤ 2⁄3
of critical of critical of critical
buckling stress buckling stress buckling stress
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

[Note (6)]
GENERAL NOTE:
Kbk p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable compressive axial and bending stresses to determine buckling limit
Ks p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable tensile and bending stresses (see NF-3321.1, NF-3322.1, NF-3350, and NF-3360)
Kv p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stresses (see NF-3321.1, NF-3322.1, NF-3350, and NF-3360)
NOTES:
(2) Ks , Kv , and Kbk p 1.0 for design of snubbers.
(5) Thermal stresses within the support as defined by NF-3121.11 need not be evaluated. For Service Levels A and B, primary plus secondary
stresses shall be limited to a range of 2 Sy or Su at temperature, whichever is less.
(6) Shear stress shall not exceed 0.42Su .
NF-3600 DESIGN RULES FOR PIPING NF-3612 Vibration

SUPPORTS Piping shall be arranged and supported so that vibration
will be minimized.
NF-3610 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The design of piping supports shall be in accordance with NF-3613 Anchors, Guides, Pivots, and Restraints
this Subarticle and the applicable general requirements of
NF-3110, NF-3210, NF-3310, and NF-3410. Anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints shall be designed
to secure the desired points of piping in a relatively fixed
position. They shall permit the piping to expand and con-
NF-3611 Spacing of Piping Supports tract freely as directed from the anchored or guided point
and shall be structurally capable of withstanding the thrusts,
Supports for piping with a longitudinal axis in approxi- moments, and other imposed loads.
mately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent
excessive shear stresses resulting from sag and bending in
the piping, with special consideration given when compo- NF-3614 Support Adjustments
nents such as pumps and valves impose concentrated loads. (a) Screwed adjustments shall have threaded parts to
The suggested maximum spans for spacing of weight sup- conform to ANSI B1.1 coarse threaded series, Class 2 fit.
ports for standard weight and heavier piping are given in Alternatively, other thread forms, series, and fits may be
Table NF-3611-1. used which permit adjustment after erection, and are
83
TABLE NF-3552(b)-1
ELASTIC ANALYSIS STRESS CATEGORIES AND STRESS LIMIT FACTORS FOR CLASS 2, 3, AND MC PLATE- AND
SHELL-TYPE SUPPORTS DESIGNED BY ANALYSIS — COMPONENT SUPPORTS

[Notes (4), (5)]
Appendix
GENERAL NOTE:
Kbk p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress or membrane plus bending stress (compression only)
Km p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress or membrane plus bending stress (see NF-3251.1 and NF-3261)
Kv p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stress (see NF-3252.2 and NF-3261)
NOTES:
(2) Km and Kbk p 1.0 for design of snubbers.
(5) Thermal stresses within the support as defined by NF-3121.11 need not be evaluated.
TABLE NF-3611-1
SUGGESTED PIPING SUPPORT SPACING
Suggested Maximum Span, ft (m)
Nominal
Pipe Size, Steam, Gas, or
in. (DN) Water Service Air Service
1 (25) 7 (2.1) 9 (2.7)

2 (50) 10 (3.0) 13 (3.9)
3 (80) 12 (3.6) 15 (4.5)
4 (100) 14 (4.2) 17 (5.1)
6 (150) 17 (5.1) 21 (6.4)
8 (200) 19 (5.7) 24 (7.3)
12 (300) 23 (7.0) 30 (9.1)
16 (400) 27 (8.2) 35 (10.6)
20 (500) 30 (9.1) 39 (11.8)
24 (600) 32 (9.7) 42 (12.8)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Suggested maximum spacing between piping supports for horizontal
straight runs of standard and heavier piping with a maximum
operating temperature of 750°F (400°C).
(b) Does not apply where span calculations are made or where there
are concentrated loads between supports such as flanges, valves,
specialties, etc.
(c) The spacing is based on a maximum combined bending and shear
stress of 1.5 ksi (10 MPa) and insulated piping filled with water
or the equivalent weight of steel pipe for steam, gas, or air service,
and the pitch of the line is such that a sag of 0.1 in. (2.5 mm)
between supports is permissible.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
84
designed to withstand the forces, moments, and other NF-3626 Design of Welded Joints
imposed loads acting on the support, considering the worst (a) Welded joints in Plate- and Shell-Type Piping Sup-
combination of thread tolerances. ports shall be as stipulated in NF-3226. In addition, tee
(b) Turnbuckles and adjusting nuts shall have the full joints, double fillet welded, sketch (a) [Fig. NF-3626(a)-
length of thread in engagement. Means shall be provided 1] and single welded, when double members, sketch (b),
for determining that full thread length is engaged. All screw are permitted.
and equivalent adjustments shall be provided withsuitable
(b) Welded joints used in Linear-Type Piping Supports
locking devices.
shall be as stipulated in NF-3324.5.
NF-3615 Piping Clamps
(a) When clamps are used to support vertical piping NF-3650 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 2
lines, it is recommended that shear lugs be welded to the AND 3
piping to prevent slippage. NF-3652 Design of Plate- and Shell-Type Piping
(b) In addition to the provision of NF-3615(a), clamps Supports
to support vertical piping lines shall be designed to support
the total load on either arm in the event the load shifts
satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are given in
because of piping or hanger movement, or both.
NF-3250 and NF-3260.
NF-3616 Hanger Rods (b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit
factors for each loading and stress category are specified
The provisions for hanger rods of NF-3412.3 apply. in Table NF-3652(b)-1.
NF-3620 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR CLASS 1 NF-3653 Design of Linear-Type Piping Supports
NF-3622 Design of Plate- and Shell-Type Piping
Supports The design rules and stress limits which must be satisfied
for the Design and Service Loadings are given in NF-3623.
(a) The design rules and stress intensity limits which
must be satisfied for the Design and Service Loadings are
given in NF-3220. NF-3654 Design of Standard Piping Supports
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress intensity The design of Standard Piping Supports shall be in accor-
limit factors for each loading and stress category are speci- dance with NF-3624.
fied in Table NF-3622(b)-1.
NF-3623 Design of Linear-Type Piping Supports
The provisions of NF-3625 shall be met.
NF-3320. NF-3656 Design of Welded Joints
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit (a) Welded joints in Plate- and Shell-Type Piping Sup-
factors for each loading and stress category are specified ports shall be as stipulated in NF-3256 for Class 2 and
in Table NF-3623(b)-1. NF-3266 for Class 3.
(b) Welded joints used in Linear-Type Piping Supports
NF-3624 Design of Standard Piping Supports shall be as stipulated in NF-3324.5.
NF-3420. NF-3670 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS
(b) When design by analysis is used, the stress limit Piping supports of all types may be designed by experi-
factors for each loading and stress category are specified in mental stress analysis in accordance with Appendix II of
Table NF-3622(b)-1 or Table NF-3623(b)-1, as applicable. Section III, Division 1, Appendices.

The number and cross-sectional area of bolts required
for the Design Loadings of NF-3112 shall be determined Piping supports of all types may be designed by load
in accordance with the procedures of NF-3324.6. The rating in accordance with the requirements of NF-3280 for
allowable bolt design stress value shall be determined in Plate- and Shell-Type, NF-3380 for Linear-Type, and the
accordance with NF-3324.6. applicable Subsubarticle for Standard Piping Supports.
85
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

TABLE NF-3622(b)-1
ELASTIC ANALYSIS STRESS CATEGORIES AND STRESS LIMIT FACTORS
FOR CLASS 1 PLATE- AND SHELL-TYPE SUPPORTS DESIGNED BY ANALYSIS — PIPING SUPPORTS

[Notes (4), (5)]
Use
Kbk p 1.0 Kbk p 1.0 Kbk p 1.33 Kbk p 1.5 Appendix Kbk p 1.33
F
[Note (5)]
GENERAL NOTE:
Kbk p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress intensity or membrane plus bending stress intensity (compression only)
Km p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress intensity or membrane plus bending stress intensity (see NF-3221.1
and NF-3221.2)
Kv p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stress (see NF-3223.2)
NOTES:
(1) Control of deformation is not insured by these stress limit factors. When required by Design Specification, deformation control must be
(2) Km , Kv , and Kbk p 1.0 for design of snubbers.
86 --``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

TABLE NF-3623(b)-1
ELASTIC ANALYSIS STRESS CATEGORIES AND STRESS LIMIT FACTORS
FOR CLASS 1, 2, AND 3 LINEAR-TYPE SUPPORTS DESIGNED BY ANALYSIS — PIPING SUPPORTS

[Notes (4), (5)]
Appendix
... ... but stress ≤ 2⁄3 but stress ≤ 2⁄3 ... but stress ≤ 2⁄3
of critical of critical of critical
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
buckling stress buckling stress buckling stress
[Note (6)]
GENERAL NOTE:
Kbk p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable compressive axial and bending stresses to determine buckling limit
Ks p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable tensile and bending stresses (see NF-3623 and NF-3653)
Kv p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stresses (see NF-3623 and NF-3653)
NOTES:
(2) Ks , Kv , and Kbk p 1.0 for design of snubbers.
FIG. NF-3626(a)-1 ADDITIONAL PERMISSIBLE

WELDED JOINTS FOR CLASS 1 PIPING SUPPORTS
87
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE NF-3652(b)-1
ELASTIC ANALYSIS STRESS CATEGORIES AND STRESS LIMIT FACTORS FOR CLASS 2 AND 3 PLATE-
AND SHELL-TYPE SUPPORTS DESIGNED BY ANALYSIS — PIPING SUPPORTS

[Notes (4), (5)]
Appendix
GENERAL NOTE:
Kbk p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress or membrane plus bending stress (compression only)
Km p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable membrane stress or membrane plus bending stresses (see NF-3251.1 and NF-3261)
Kv p stress limit factor applicable to the Design allowable shear stress (see NF-3252.2 and NF-3261)
NOTES:
(2) Km and Kbk p 1.0 for design of snubbers.
(3) Stress shall not exceed 0.7Su.
(4) For Service Limits A, B, C, and D, stresses induced on the supports by restraint of free-end displacement and anchor motions of piping shall
88
ARTICLE NF-4000
FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
NF-4100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NF-4121.2 Repetition of Tensile or Impact Tests. If

during the fabrication or installation of the support the
NF-4110 INTRODUCTION material is subjected to heat treatment that has not been
NF-4111 Fabrication and Installation covered by treatment of the test coupons (NF-2200) and
that may reduce either the tensile or impact properties
Supports shall be fabricated and installed in accordance
below the required values, the tensile and impact tests shall
with the requirements of this Article and shall be manufac-
be repeated by the Certificate Holder on test specimens
tured from material which meets the requirements of
taken from test coupons which have been taken and treated
NF-2000.
in accordance with the requirements of NF-2000.
NF-4112 Reassembly of Subsection NF Supports NF-4122 Material Identification

The Certificate Holder may reassemble supports from Material for supports shall carry identification markings
completed supports that have not been in operating service which will remain distinguishable until the support is fabri-
or from parts and material of disassembled supports that cated or installed. If the original identification markings
have not been in operating service, provided all required are cut off or the material is divided, the marks shall be
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
documentation is available and the applicable Code accurately transferred to the parts or a coded marking shall
requirements are met. be used to assure identification of each piece of material
The program for maintaining identification of material during subsequent fabrication or installation, unless other-
and parts, including material documentation and certifica- wise provided by NF-2150. Material supplied with a Cer-
tion documents (Certificate of Compliance and NS-1 Cer- tificate of Compliance and welding and brazing material
tificate of Conformance) shall be described in a written shall be identified and controlled so that they can be traced
procedure. to each support, or else a control procedure shall be
employed which ensures that the specified material is used.
NF-4123 Visual Examinations

NF-4120 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIALS
AND FABRICATION BY SUPPORT Visual examination activities that are not referenced for
CERTIFICATE HOLDER examination by other specific Code paragraphs, and are
performed solely to verify compliance with requirements
NF-4121 Means of Certification of NF-4000, may be performed by the persons who perform
The NS Certificate Holder for a support shall certify or supervise the work. These visual examinations are not
Code compliance by the furnishing of an NS-1 Certificate required to be performed by personnel and procedures
of Conformance (NCA-3687) for welded supports or a qualified to NF-5500 and NF-5100, respectively, unless so
Certificate of Compliance (NCA-3689) for nonwelded sup- specified.
ports.
NF-4125 Testing of Welding and Brazing
NF-4121.1 Certification of Treatments, Tests, and Materials
Examinations. If the Certificate Holder performs treat-
All welding and brazing materials shall meet the require-
ments, tests, repairs, or examinations required by other
ments of NF-2400.
Articles of this Section, he shall certify that he has fulfilled
that requirement [NCA-3861(c)]. Reports of all required
treatments and the results of all required tests, repairs, and NF-4130 REPAIR OF MATERIAL
examinations performed by the NS Certificate Holder shall NF-4131 Elimination and Repair of Defects
be available to the Authorized Nuclear Inspector Super- Material originally accepted on delivery in which defects
visor. exceeding the limits of NF-2500 are known or discovered
89
during the process of fabrication or installation is unaccept- using specimens taken from material of the same material
able. The material may be used provided the condition is specification, grade or class, heat treatment, and with simi-
corrected in accordance with the requirements of NF-2500 lar impact properties as required for the material in the
for the applicable product form, except support. These specimens shall be subjected to the equiva-
(a) weld repair is not required if the defect is removed lent forming or bending process and heat treatment as the
by mechanical means and does not reduce the section below material in the support. Applicable tests shall be conducted
the minimum thickness required by NF-3000 to determine that the required impact properties of NF-2300
(b) when weld repair is performed are met after straining.
(1) the weld repair restores the section to the mini-
NF-4213.1 Exemptions. Procedure qualification tests
mum thickness required by NF-3000
are not required for material listed in NF-4213.1(a)
(2) the limitation on the depth of weld repair does
through (f)
not apply
(a) hot-formed material, such as forgings, in which the
(3) the time of examination of weld repairs to weld
hot forming is completed by the Material Organization
edge preparations and to material shall be in accordance
prior to removal of the impact test specimens
with NF-5120
(b) hot-formed material represented by test coupons
(4) the provisions of NF-2610(e) for weld repair of
which has been subjected to heat treatment representing
structural material apply
the hot forming procedure and the heat treatments to be
applied to the parts
NF-4200 FORMING, FITTING, AND (c) material which does not require impact tests in accor-
ALIGNING dance with NF-2300
NF-4210 CUTTING, FORMING, AND BENDING (d) material which has final strain less than 0.5%
NF-4211 Cutting (e) material where the final strain is less than that of a
previously qualified procedure for that material
Material may be cut to shape and size by mechanical (f) material from which the impact testing required by
means such as machining, shearing, or chipping, or by NF-2300 is performed on each heat and lot, as applicable,
grinding or thermal cutting. Thermally cut edges that are after forming
to be welded shall be smooth and free of all loose scale
and slag accumulations. NF-4213.2 Procedure Qualification Test. The proce-
dure qualification test shall be performed in the manner
NF-4211.1 Preheating Before Thermal Cutting.
stipulated in NF-4213.2(a) through (f).
When thermal cutting is performed to prepare weld joints
(a) The tests shall be performed on three different heats
or edges, to remove attachments or defective material,
of material both before and after straining to establish
or for any other purpose, consideration shall be given to
the effects of the forming and subsequent heat treatment
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
preheating the material using preheat schedules, such as

operations.
suggested in Appendix D (Section III, Division 1, Appen-
(b) Specimens shall be taken in accordance with the
dices).
requirements of NF-2000 and shall be taken from the ten-
sion side of the strained material.
NF-4212 Forming and Bending Processes
(c) The percent strain shall be established by the follow-
Any process may be used to hot or cold form or bend ing equations:
materials, including weld metal, provided the required
dimensions are attained (see NF-4214 and NF-4220), and For cylinders:
provided the specified impact properties of the material,
when required, are not reduced below the minimum spec- % strain p 50t / Rf [1 − (Rf / Ro )]
ified values or they are effectively restored by heat treat- For spherical or dished surfaces
ment following the forming operation. Hot forming is
defined as forming with the material temperature higher % strain p 75t / Rf [1 − (Rf / Ro )]
than 100°F (56°C) below the lower transformation temper-
ature of the material. When required, the process shall be For pipe
qualified for impact properties as outlined in NF-4213.
% strain p 100r / R
NF-4213 Qualification of Forming Processes for where

Impact Property Requirements R p nominal bending radius to the center line of the
When impact testing is required by the Design Specifi- pipe, in. (mm)
cations, a procedure qualification test shall be conducted Rf p final radius to center line of shell, in. (mm)
90
Ro p original radius (equal to infinity for a flat part), NF-4220 SUPPORT TOLERANCES
in. (mm)
Tolerances not specified in this subsection shall be speci-
r p nominal radius of the pipe, in. (mm)
fied by the designer in accordance with NF-3134.
t p nominal thickness, in. (mm)
(d) The procedure qualification shall simulate the maxi-
mum percent surface strain, employing a bending process NF-4221 Tolerances for Plate- and Shell-Type
similar to that used in the fabrication of the material or by Supports
direct tension on the specimen. (a) The outer surface of a plate- and shell-type support
(e) Sufficient Charpy V-notch specimens shall be taken shall not deviate from the specified shape by more than
from each of three heats of material to establish a transition 11⁄4% of the overall design dimension. Such deviations
curve showing in both the upper and lower shelves. On shall not include abrupt changes.
each of these three heats, tests consisting of three impact (b) For plate- and shell-type supports which are skirts,
specimens shall be conducted at a minimum of five differ- the difference between the maximum and minimum outside
ent temperatures distributed throughout the transition diameters shall not exceed 1% of the nominal outside
region. The upper and lower shelves may be established diameter.
by the use of one test specimen each, depending on the
product form.
(f) Using the results of the impact test data from each NF-4230 FITTING AND ALIGNING
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
of three heats, taken both before and after straining, deter-

NF-4231 Fitting and Aligning Methods
mine either
(1) the maximum change in NDT temperature Parts that are to be joined may be fitted, aligned, and
along with retained in position during the joining operation by the use
(a) the maximum change of lateral expansion and of bars, jacks, clamps, drift pins, tack welds, or temporary
energy of the temperature under consideration or attachments. Mechanical devices shall be carefully used
(b) the maximum change of temperature at the lat- to avoid damage to surfaces of the parts and to avoid
eral expansion and energy levels under consideration or enlargement of bolt holes.
(2) when lateral expansion is the acceptance criterion
NF-4231.1 Tack Welds. Tack welds used to secure
(NF-2300), either the maximum change in temperature or
alignment shall either be removed completely, when they
the maximum change in lateral expansion
have served their purpose, or their stopping and starting
NF-4213.3 Acceptance Criteria for Formed Mate- ends shall be properly prepared by grinding or other suit-
rial. To be acceptable, the formed material used in the able means so that they may be satisfactorily incorporated
support shall have impact properties before forming suffi- into the final weld. Tack welds shall be made by qualified
cient to compensate for the maximum loss of impact prop- welders using qualified welding procedures. When tack
erties due to the qualified forming procedure used. welds are to become part of the finished weld, they shall
NF-4213.4 Requalification. A new procedure qual- be visually examined and defective tack welds removed.
ification test is required when any of the following changes NF-4231.2 Column Bases
are made:
(a) Column bases shall be set level and to correct eleva-
(a) the actual postweld heat treatment time at tempera- tion with full bearing on the masonry.
ture is greater than previously qualified considering
(b) Column bases shall be finished in accordance with
NF-2211; if the material is not postweld heat treated, the
the requirements of NF-4231.2(b)(1) through (b)(3).
procedure must be qualified without postweld heat
(1) Rolled steel bearing plates 2 in. (50 mm) or less
treatment
in thickness may be used without milling, provided a satis-
(b) the maximum calculated strain of the material
factory contact bearing is obtained. Rolled steel bearing
exceeds the previously qualified strain by more than 0.5%
plates over 2 in. (50 mm) but not over 4 in. (100 mm) in
(c) where preheat over 250°F (120°C) is used in the
thickness may be straightened by pressing or, if presses
forming or bending operation but not followed by a subse-
are not available, by milling for all bearing surfaces except
quent postweld heat treatment
those noted in NF-4231.2(b)(3) to obtain satisfactory con-
tact bearing. Rolled steel bearing plates over 4 in. (100
NF-4214 Minimum Thickness of Fabricated mm) in thickness shall be milled for all bearing surfaces
Material except as noted in NF-4231.2(b)(3).
If any fabrication operation reduces the thickness below (2) Column bases other than rolled steel bearing
the minimum required to satisfy the rules of NF-3000, the plates shall be planed for all bearing surfaces, except as
material may be repaired in accordance with NF-4130. noted in NF-4231.2(b)(3).
91
07 TABLE NF-4232-1 qualification requirements of Section IX and this Subsec-

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OFFSET IN tion shall be used for welding support material or attach-
FINAL BUTT WELDED JOINTS ments thereto. Any process used shall be such that the
Section Thickness, in. (mm) Maximum Allowable Offset records required by NF-4320 can be prepared except that
records for stud welds shall be traceable to the welders
Up to 3⁄4 (19), incl. 1
⁄4t
Over 3⁄4 to 11⁄2 (19 to 38), incl. 3
⁄16 in. (5 mm)
and welding operators, and not necessarily to each spe-
Over 11⁄2 to 6 (38 to 150), incl. 1
⁄8t cific weld.
3
Over 6 (150) ⁄4 in. (19 mm)
NF-4311.1 Stud Welding Restrictions. Stud welding
is acceptable for insulation supports, nameplates, and locat-
ing lugs. Studs shall be limited to 1 in. (25 mm) maximum
(3) The bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column diameter for round studs or an equivalent cross-sectional
bases which are grouted to ensure full bearing contact on area for studs of other shapes when welding in the flat
foundation need not be planed. position and 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) diameter for all other welding
positions. When studs are 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) in diameter or less,
postweld heat treatment, qualified welding procedures, and
NF-4232 Maximum Offset of Aligned Sections
certified welding materials are not required.
Alignment of butt joints shall be such that the maximum
NF-4311.2 Capacitor Discharge Welding. Capacitor
offset of the finished weld will not be greater than the
discharge welding may be used for welding temporary
applicable amount listed in Table NF-4232-1, where t is
attachments and permanent nonstructural attachments pro-
the nominal thickness of the thinner section of the joint.
vided
NF-4232.1 Fairing of Offsets. Any offset within the (a) temporary attachments are removed in accordance
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
allowable tolerance of Table NF-4232-1 shall be blended with the provisions of NF-4435(b)
uniformly over the width of the finished weld or, if neces- (b) the energy output for permanent nonstructural
sary, by adding additional weld metal beyond what would attachments such as strain gages and thermocouples is
otherwise be the edge of the weld. limited to 125 W-sec and the minimum thickness of the
material to which the attachment is made is greater than
0.09 in. (2.3 mm)
NF-4240 REQUIREMENTS FOR WELDED (c) a Welding Procedure Specification is prepared
JOINTS describing the capacitor discharge equipment, the combina-
tion of materials to be joined, and the technique of applica-
Butt welds may be made with or without backing or
tion; qualification of the welding procedure is not required
consumable insert rings. When the use of permanent back-
ing rings is undesirable [NF-3226.1(a) or NF-3256.1(a)] NF-4311.4 Inertia and Continuous Drive Friction
(a) the backing ring shall be removed and the inside of Welding
the joint ground smooth (a) Inertia and continuous drive friction welding shall
(b) the joint shall be welded without backing rings or not be used for fabrication of Class 1 Plate- and Shell-
(c) consumable insert rings shall be used Type Component Supports.
(b) The weld between the two members shall be a full
penetration weld.
NF-4245 Complete Joint Penetration Welds
Complete joint penetration is considered to be achieved
when the acceptance criteria for the examinations specified NF-4320 WELDING QUALIFICATIONS AND
by this Subsection have been met. No other examination RECORDS
is required to assess that complete penetration has been NF-4321 Required Qualifications
achieved.
(a) Each Certificate Holder is responsible for the weld-
ing done by his organization and shall establish the proce-
dure and conduct the tests required by this Article and
NF-4300 WELDING QUALIFICATIONS Section IX in order to qualify both the welding procedures
NF-4310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and the performance of welders and welding operators who
apply these procedures.
NF-4311 Types of Processes Permitted
(b) Procedures, welders, and welding operators used
Only those welding processes which are capable of pro- to join permanent or temporary attachments to support
ducing welds in accordance with the welding procedure elements and to make permanent or temporary tack welds
92
used in such welding shall also meet the qualification NF-4322.2 Identification of Other Joints. For all types
requirements of this Article. of Class 2, 3, and MC component supports and for all
(c) When making procedure test plates for butt welds, classes of piping supports and Standard Supports, the Cer-
consideration shall be given to the effect of angular, lateral, tificate Holder shall certify that only welders and welding
and end restraint on the weldment. This applies particularly operators qualified in accordance with NF-4321 were used
to material and weld metal of 80 ksi (550 MPa) tensile in making all welds.
strength or higher and heavy sections of both low and high NF-4322.3 Identification of Tack Welds. The identi-
tensile strength material. The addition of restraint during fication of welder or welding operator is not required for
welding may result in cracking difficulties that otherwise tack welds.
might not occur.
(d) NCA-3131 provides specific additional require-
ments when welding services are subcontracted to or NF-4323 Welding Prior to Qualification
through organizations not holding an appropriate Certifi- No welding shall be undertaken until after the welding
cate of Accreditation. procedures which are to be used have been qualified. Only
welders and welding operators who are qualified in accor-
dance with NF-4320 and Section IX shall be used.
NF-4322 Maintenance and Certification of
Records
NF-4324 Transferring Qualifications
The Certificate Holder shall maintain a record of his
qualified welding procedures and of the welders and weld- The welding procedure qualifications and the perform-
ing operators qualified by him, showing the date and results ance qualification tests for welders and welding operators
of tests and the identification mark assigned to each welder. conducted by one Certificate Holder shall not qualify weld-
These records shall be reviewed, verified, and certified by ing procedures and shall not qualify welders or welding
the Certificate Holder by signature or some other method of operators to weld for any other Certificate Holder, except
control in accordance with the Certificate Holder’s Quality as provided in Section IX, QW-201 and QW-300.2.
Assurance Program and shall be available to the Authorized
Nuclear Inspector.
NF-4330 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
NF-4322.1 Identification of Joints for Class 1 Com- WELDING PROCEDURE
ponent Supports QUALIFICATION TESTS
(a) For Class 1 Plate- and Shell-Type, and Linear-Type
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NF-4331 Conformance to Section IX
Component Supports, the welder or welding operator shall Requirements
apply the identification mark assigned to him by the Cer-
All welding procedure qualification tests shall be in
tificate Holder on or adjacent to all permanent welds,
accordance with the requirements of Section IX as supple-
including fillet welds, at 3 ft (1 m) intervals or less, except
mented by the requirements of this Article.
as noted in NF-4322.1(b). The marking shall be done with
either blunt nose continuous or blunt nose interrupted dot
die stamps. As an alternative, the Certificate Holder shall NF-4334 Preparation of Test Coupons and
keep a record of permanent welded joints in a component Specimens
support, and of the welders and welding operators used in (a) Removal of test coupons from the test weld and the
making each of the joints. dimensions of specimens made from them shall conform
(b) For partial penetration welds with a depth less than to the requirements of Section IX, except that the removal
1 in. (25 mm) and fillet welds with a throat dimension less of impact test coupons and the dimensions of impact test
than 1 in. (25 mm) in primary members, and for all welds specimens shall be in accordance with NF-4334(b).
in secondary members, the Certificate Holder need not (b) Weld deposit of each process in a multiple process
identify the welder or welding operator who welded each weld shall, where possible, be included in the impact test
joint provided specimens. When each process cannot be included in the
(1) the Certificate Holder maintains a system that will full-size impact test specimen at the 1⁄4t location required
identify the welders or welding operators who made such by this Section, additional full-size specimens shall be
welds on each item so that the Inspector can verify that obtained from locations in the test weld that will ensure
the welders or welding operators were all properly qualified that at least a portion of each process has been included
(2) the welds in each category are all of the same type in full-size test specimens. As an alternative, additional
and configuration and are welded with the same Welding test welds can be made with each process so that full-size
Procedure Specification specimens can be tested for each process.
93
NF-4334.1 Coupons Representing the Weld Depos- zone shall be performed in accordance with the following
its. Impact test specimen and testing methods shall conform subparagraphs. Exemptions from impact testing under
to NF-2321. The impact specimen shall be located so that NF-2311(b)(9) and (b)(10) do not apply to weld metal
the longitudinal axis of the specimen is at least 1⁄4t, and unless the specific weld metal used is included in Table NF-
where the thickness of the test assembly permits, not less 2311(b)-1 (weld metal exemptions are being developed).
than 3⁄8 in. (10 mm) from the weld surface of the test Exemption from impact testing of the heat-affected zone of
assembly. In addition, when the postweld heat treatment those base materials which are exempted by NF-2311(b)(9)
temperature exceeds the maximum temperature specified and (b)(10) is not permitted. The welding procedure quali-
in NF-4620, and the test assembly is cooled at an acceler- fication impact test specimens shall be prepared and tested
ated rate, the longitudinal axis of the specimen shall be a in accordance with the applicable requirements of NF-2330
minimum of t from the edge of the test assembly. The and NF-4334. Retests in accordance with the provisions
specimen shall be transverse to the longitudinal axis of the of NF-2350 are permitted.
weld with the area of the notch located in the weld. The
NF-4335.1 Impact Tests of Weld Metal
length of the notch of the Charpy V-notch specimen shall
be normal to the surface of the weld. (a) Impact tests of the weld metal shall be required for
welding procedure qualification tests for production weld
NF-4334.2 Coupons Representing the Heat-Affected joints exceeding 5⁄8 in. (16 mm) in thickness when the weld
Zone. Where impact tests of the heat-affected zone are is made on the surface or penetrates the base material that
required by NF-4335.2, specimens shall be taken from the requires impact testing in accordance with NF-2310. In
welding procedure qualification test assemblies in accor- addition, such testing of the weld metal is required for the
dance with NF-4334.2(a) through (c). welding procedure qualification tests for any weld repair
(a) If the qualification test material is in the form of a to base material that requires impact testing in accordance
plate or a forging, the axis of the weld shall be oriented with NF-2310, regardless of the depth of the repair. Exemp-
either parallel to or perpendicular to the principal direction tion from impact testing under NF-2311(b)(9) and (b)(10)
of rolling or forging. does not apply to weld metal of the welding procedure
(b) The heat-affected zone impact test specimens and qualification test for either production weld joints or base
testing methods shall conform to NF-2321. The specimens material repairs unless the specific weld metal used is
shall be removed from a location as near as practical to a included in Table NF-2311(b)-1 (weld metal exemptions
depth midway between the surface and center thickness. are being developed).
The coupons for heat-affected zone impact specimens shall (b) The impact test requirements and acceptance stan-
be taken transverse to the axis of the weld and etched to dards for welding procedure qualification weld metal shall
define the heat-affected zone. The notch of the Charpy V- be the same as specified in NF-2330 for the base material
notch specimen shall be cut approximately normal to the to be welded or repaired. Where two materials which have
material surface in such a manner as to include as much different fracture toughness requirements are to be joined
heat-affected zone as possible in the resulting fracture. by welding, the test requirements and acceptance standards
Where the material thickness permits, the axis of a speci- of either material may be used for the weld metal, except
men may be inclined to allow the root of the notch to align where otherwise specified by NCA-1280 or other parts of
parallel to the fusion line. When a grain refining heat this Section.
treatment is not performed on welds made by the electro- (c) A Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) qualified
slag or electrogas welding process, the notch for the impact to the impact testing requirements of Subsection NB, NC,
specimens shall be located in the grain coarsened region. or NE may be accepted as an alternative to the WPS impact
(c) For the comparison of heat-affected zone values with testing requirements of this Subsection.
base material values [NF-4335.2(b)], Charpy V-notch spec-
imens shall be removed from the unaffected base material NF-4335.2 Impact Tests of Heat-Affected Zone
at approximately the same distance from the base material (a) Charpy V-notch tests of the heat-affected zone of the
surface as the heat-affected zone specimens. The axis of welding procedure qualification test assembly are required
the unaffected base material specimens shall be parallel to whenever the thickness of the weld exceeds 5⁄8 in. (16 mm),
the axis of the heat-affected zone specimens, and the axis and either of the base materials requires impact testing in
of the notch shall be normal to the surface of the base accordance with the rules of NF-2310. Exemption of base
material. materials by NF-2311(b)(9) or (b)(10) does not apply to
the welding procedure qualification of the heat-affected
zone or unaffected base material for such materials. The
NF-4335 Impact Test Requirements only exceptions to the requirements are the following:
When materials are required to be impact tested per (1) the qualification for welds in P-Nos. 1 and 3 and
NF-2300, impact tests of the weld metal and heat-affected SA-336 F12 materials that are postweld heat treated and
94
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

are made by any process other than electroslag, electrogas, the average applicable toughness value of the unaffected
or thermit base material, TADJ may be taken as 15°F (8°C).
(2) the qualification for weld deposit cladding or (6) As a second alternative to NF-4335.2(b)(4), if the
hard-facing on any base material applicable toughness values of the heat-affected zone are
(3) that portion of the heat-affected zone associated no less than those specified in Table NF-2331 for the
with GTAW root deposits with a maximum of two layers applicable Class and acceptance category, the difference
or 3⁄16 in. (5 mm) thickness, whichever is less between the average applicable toughness value of the
(b) Charpy V-notch testing shall be performed as speci- heat-affected zone and the unaffected base material shall
fied in NF-4335.2(b)(1) through (b)(6). be calculated and used as described in NF-4335.2(c)(3).
(1) Charpy V-notch test specimens representing both (c) At least one of the following methods shall be used
the heat-affected zone and the unaffected base material to compensate for the heat-affected zone toughness
shall be tested. The unaffected base material shall be tested decrease due to the welding procedure.
at a temperature equal to or below that specified in (1) The lowest service temperature specified in the
NF-2311(c). Design Specification for all of the material to be welded
(2) The Charpy V-notch tests of the unaffected base in production Welding Procedure Specifications supported
material shall meet the applicable requirements of Table by this Welding Procedure Qualification Record shall be
NF-2331 for the applicable Class and acceptance category. increased by the adjustment temperature TADJ.
If the requirements are not met at the test temperature, (2) The specified testing temperature for the produc-
additional testing shall be performed at higher temperatures tion material may be reduced by TADJ.
until the above requirements are met. (3) The materials to be welded may be welded using
(3) The heat-affected zone specimens shall be tested the Welding Procedure Specification, provided they exhibit
at the test temperature determined in NF-4335.2(b)(2). If toughness values that are no less than the minimum
the average applicable toughness value of the heat-affected required toughness values specified in NF-2300 plus the
zone specimens equals or exceeds the average applicable difference in the average applicable toughness values estab-
toughness value of the unaffected base material, the quali- lished in NF-4335.2(b)(6).
fication test is acceptable for the essential and supplemental (d) The Charpy V-notch testing results shall be recorded
essential variables recorded on the Welding Procedure on the Welding Procedure Qualification Record and any
Qualification Record. If the heat-affected zone average offsetting TADJ or increased toughness requirements shall
applicble toughness value is less than the unaffected base be noted on the Welding Procedure Qualification Record
material average applicable toughness value, the adjust- and on the Welding Procedure Specification. More than one
ment given in NF-4335.2(b)(4) through (b)(6) shall be compensation method may be documented on the Welding
determined and applied as provided in NF-4335.2(c). Alter- Procedure Qualification Record.
natively, another test coupon may be welded and tested. (e) A Welding Procedure Specification qualified to the
(4) Additional Charpy V-notch tests shall be per- impact testing requirements of Subsection NB, NC, or NE
formed on either the heat-affected zone or the unaffected may be accepted as an alternative to the Welding Procedure
base material, or both, at temperatures where the applicable Specification impact testing requirements of this Sub-
toughness values of all three specimens tested are not less section.
than that specified in NF-4335.2(b)(2). The average appli-
cable toughness value for each test meeting this require-
ment shall be plotted on a property-temperature graph. The
difference in temperature THAZ and TUBM where the heat- NF-4400 RULES GOVERNING MAKING
affected zone and the unaffected base material average AND REPAIRING WELDS
applicable toughness values are the same and not less than NF-4410 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN
that specified in NF-4335.2(b)(2) shall be used to determine BEFORE WELDING
the adjustment temperature TADJ where
NF-4411 Identification, Storage, and Handling of
TADJ p THAZ − TUBM Welding Materials
If TADJ ≤ 0, then TADJ p 0. Each Certificate Holder is responsible for control of the
(5) As an alternative to NF-4335.2(b)(4), if the appli- welding electrodes and other materials which are used
cable toughness values of the heat-affected zone are no in the fabrication and installation of supports (NF-4120).
less than those specified in Table NF-2331 for the applica- Suitable identification, storage, and handling of electrodes,
ble Class and acceptance category and the average applica- flux, and other welding material shall be maintained. Pre-
ble toughness value of the heat-affected zone specimens cautions shall be taken to minimize absorption of moisture
is not less than 7 ft-lb (10 J) or 5 mils (0.13 mm) below by electrodes and flux.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
95
NF-4412 Cleanliness and Protection of Weld NF-4427 Shape and Size of Welds
Surfaces (a) Fillet welds may vary from convex to concave. The
The method used to prepare the base metal shall leave shape and size of the weld shall be in accordance with the
the weld preparation with reasonably smooth surfaces. The requirements of Fig. NF-4427-1. Convexity of fillet welds
surfaces for welding shall be free of scale, rust, oil, grease, is not a criteria for acceptance and need not be measured.
and other deleterious material. The work shall be protected (b) The faces of groove welds may be flat or convex.
from deleterious contamination and from rain, snow, and The thickness of groove welds shall be no less than 1⁄32 in.
wind during welding. Welding shall not be performed on (0.8 mm) less than the thickness of the thinner of the
wet surfaces. members joined.
(c) On web-to-flange welds on girders, no underrun is
permitted at the ends for a length equal to twice the width
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
of the flange.
NF-4420 RULES FOR MAKING WELDED
JOINTS
NF-4429 Plug Welds
NF-4421 Backing Strips
When plug welds are used on supports, a fillet weld
The materials for backing strips, when used, shall be shall first be deposited around the circumference at the
compatible with the base metal. bottom of the hole.
NF-4430 WELDING OF ATTACHMENTS

NF-4422 Peening
NF-4435 Welding of Nonstructural and
The weld metal may be peened when it is deemed neces- Temporary Attachments, and Their
sary or helpful to control distortion. Removal
(a) Nonstructural attachments such as insulation sup-
ports, nameplates, locating lugs, and temporary attach-
NF-4423 Double Welded Joints
ments may be noncertified material and may be welded to
Before applying weld metal on the second side to be the support or parts thereof with continuous or intermittent
welded, the root of full penetration double welded joints fillet or partial penetration welds, provided the require-
shall be prepared by suitable methods, such as chipping, ments of NF-4435(a)(1) through (a)(5) are met
grinding, or thermal gouging, except for those processes (1) the welding procedure and the welders have been
of welding by which proper fusion and penetration are qualified in accordance with NF-4321
otherwise obtained and demonstrated to be satisfactory by (2) the material is identified and is suitable for
welding procedure qualification. welding
(3) the material is compatible with the material to
which it is attached
NF-4424 Surfaces of Welds (4) the welding material is identified and compatible
(a) The surface condition of the finished weld shall be with the materials joined
sufficiently free from coarse ripples, grooves, overlaps, (5) the welds are postweld heat treated when required
abrupt ridges, and valleys for the proper interpretation of by NF-4620
radiographic and other required nondestructive examina- (b) Removal of nonstructural temporary attachments
tions of the welds. In those cases where there is a question shall be accomplished as follows:
regarding the surface condition on the interpretation of a (1) the temporary attachment shall be completely
radiographic film, the film shall be compared to the actual removed in accordance with the procedures of NF-4211
weld surface for interpretation and determination of accept- (2) as an alternative to NF-4435(a)(5), postweld heat
ability. treatment may be deferred until after removal of the
(b) Concavity on the root side of a single welded circum- attachment
ferential butt weld is permitted when the resulting thickness (3) the surface of the support shall be visually exam-
of the weld meets the requirements of NF-3000. ined after removal of the temporary attachment
(c) Fusion shall exist between adjacent layers of weld
metal and between weld metal and base metal except as NF-4440 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
provided in NF-5360(c). WELDING
(d) For inertia and continuous drive friction welding, NF-4441 Through-Thickness Loading
the weld upset shall meet the specified amount within Welded joint configurations causing significant through-
±10%. Flash shall be removed to sound metal. thickness tensile stress [as defined in NF-1215(b)] during
96
FIG. NF-4427-1 FILLET WELD DIMENSIONS
Theoretical throat Theoretical throat

Surface of
intersecting Surface of
member intersecting
member
Convex fillet weld Concave

fillet weld
Size of
weld Surface of through member
Size of
weld
(a) Equal Leg Fillet Weld [Note (1)]
Theoretical throat
Theoretical throat
Surface of Surface of
intersecting intersecting
member member
Convex fillet weld Concave

fillet weld
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Surface of through member
(b) Unequal Leg Fillet Weld [Note (2)]
135 deg max.

60 deg min. [Note (3)]
Intersecting
member
Through member
Theoretical
throat
Theoretical
throat
(c) Skewed T-Joints [Note (3)]

NOTES:
(1) The “size” of an equal leg fillet weld is the leg length of the largest inscribed right isosceles triangle. Theoretical throat p 0.7 X size of weld.
(2) The “size” of an unequal leg fillet weld is the shorter leg length of the largest right triangle, which can be inscribed within the fillet weld
cross section.
(3) When the intersecting member is less than 60 deg, the weld shall be considered a partial penetration groove weld [NF-3324.5(d)(4)].
97
fabrication or service on rolled product forms should be FIG. NF-4441-1 WELD JOINT PRODUCING
avoided. When this type of construction is used, weld THROUGH-THICKNESS LOADING
volume and welding heat input on the rolled surfaces
T
should be limited to the extent practical. When identified (typ.)
by the Design Output Documents [NF-3226.3, NF-3256.4,
and NF-3324.5(f)(3)(h)], weld joints in primary members
1 in. (25 mm) or greater in thickness in component supports 3/
8 in. min.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
subjected to significant through-thickness tensile loads and (typ.)

any other weld joints identified in the Design Output Docu- (10 mm)
ments shall meet one of the following requirements:
Step 2
(a) After completion of welding, the base material
directly underneath the attachment shall be ultrasonically
w
examined in accordance with the requirements of NF-5214,
NF-5224, or NF-5234, as appropriate to the component
t
support class.
(b) A weld metal inlay or overlay shall be made in
accordance with Fig. NF-4441-1 and ultrasonically exam-
w
ined in accordance with NF-5214, NF-5224, or NF-5234,
prior to making the weld joining the attachment member Step 2
to the inlay or overlay.
Step 1
(c) The material shall meet the acceptance standards
of SA-770, Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel
Plates for Special Applications. 3/
8 in. min.
(typ.)
(10 mm)
NF-4450 REPAIR OF WELD METAL DEFECTS
NF-4451 General Requirements
Step 1: Inlay or overlay weldment
Defects in weld metal detected by the examinations
required by NF-5000 shall be eliminated or repaired. Step 2: Completion of weldment
GENERAL NOTES:
NF-4452 Elimination of Surface Defects (a) T is the width of the welded zone measured on the primary member
surface.
Weld metal surface defects may be removed by grinding (b) Members may be welded on one side only or from both sides.
or machining and need not be repaired by welding, pro- (c) Inlay or overlay thickness shall be 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) min. for t p 1 in.
vided that the requirements of NF-4452(a) through (c) (25 mm) and shall be increased 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) for each additional
3
are met. ⁄8 in. (10 mm) of t but need not exceed 1⁄2 in. (13 mm).
(a) The remaining thickness of the section is not reduced (d) When T exceeds t, w shall be increased by an additional 1⁄16 in.
(1.5 mm) for each 3⁄8 in. (10 mm) of T over t, to a maximum of
below that required by NF-3000. 1
⁄2 in. (13 mm).
(b) The depression, after defect elimination, is blended (e) The minimum specified tensile strength of the electrodes used for
uniformly into the surrounding surface. inlay or overlay shall not exceed the minimum specified tensile
(c) The area is examined after blending by a magnetic strength of the base metal by more than 12 ksi (83 MPa).
particle or liquid penetrant method in accordance with
NF-5110 and meets the acceptance standards of NF-5300
to ensure that the defect has been removed or the indication NF-4453.1 Defect Removal. Defects may be removed
reduced to an acceptable limit. Defects detected by the by mechanical means or by thermal gouging processes.
visual or volumetric method and located on an interior The area prepared for repair shall be examined by a liquid
surface need only be reexamined by the method which penetrant or magnetic particle method in accordance with
initially detected the defect when the interior surface is NF-5110 and shall meet the acceptance standards of
inaccessible for surface examination. NF-5340 or NF-5350. This examination is not required
where defect elimination removes the full thickness of
NF-4453 Requirements for Making Repairs to the weld and where the backside of the weld joint is not
Welds accessible for removal of examination materials.
Excavations in weld metal, when repaired by welding, NF-4453.2 Requirements for Welding Materials,
shall meet the requirements of the following subpara- Procedures, and Welders. The weld repair shall be made
graphs. using welding material, welders, and welding procedures
98
qualified in accordance with NF-4125 and NF-4300. (g) Brazing alloy shall be preplaced on one side of the
joint only. Each production joint shall be visually examined
NF-4453.3 Blending of Repaired Areas. After repair,
after brazing. Brazing metal must be continuous on the
the surface shall be blended uniformly into the surrounding
preplaced brazing metal side and 85% continuous on the
surface.
other side.
NF-4453.4 Examination of Repair Welds. The exami-
nation of a weld repair shall be repeated as required for
the original weld, except that it need only be reexamined NF-4512 Brazing Material
by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method when Where brazing is permitted, the brazing filler material
the unacceptable indication was originally detected by the and fluxes shall conform to the rules covering identification
liquid penetrant or magnetic particle method and when the in NF-2150 and to the following requirements:
repair cavity does not exceed the following: (a) The filler material used in brazing shall be a nonfer-
(a) 1⁄3 tw for tw ≤ 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) rous metal or alloy with a solidus temperature above 800°F
(b) 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) for 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) <tw ≤ 21⁄2 in. (425°C) and at least 500°F (278°C) above the highest
(64 mm) temperature of the joint in service.
(c) the lesser of 3⁄8 in. (10 mm) or 10% tw for tw >21⁄2 in. (b) The filler material shall melt and flow freely by
(64 mm) capillary action within the desired temperature range, and
where tw equals the nominal thickness of the original weld. in conjunction with a suitable flux or controlled atmosphere
the filler material shall wet and adhere to the surfaces to
NF-4453.5 Heat Treatment of Repaired Areas. The be joined.
repaired area shall be heat treated when required by (c) Fluxes that are fluid and chemically active at the
NF-4620. brazing temperature shall be used, when necessary, to pre-
vent oxidation of the filler metal and the surfaces to be
joined and to promote free flowing of the filler material.
NF-4500 BRAZING
NF-4510 RULES FOR BRAZING
NF-4511 Where Brazing May Be Used NF-4600 HEAT TREATMENT
Furnace brazing is permitted for the construction of sup- NF-4610 WELDING PREHEAT AND
ports in accordance with the rules of this Subsection pro- INTERPASS REQUIREMENTS
vided the following additional requirements are met:
NF-4611 When Preheat Is Necessary
(a) Brazing procedures and brazing operators shall be
qualified in accordance with Section IX. The need for and temperature of preheat are dependent
(b) Clearance or interference between mating parts shall on a number of factors, such as the chemical analysis,
be in accordance with the Brazing Procedure Specification. degree of restraint of the parts being joined, elevated tem-
(c) Base material shall be limited to material permitted perature, physical properties, and material thicknesses.
by NF-2120 and Section IX, P-Nos. 101 and 102 ferritic Some practices used for preheating are given in Appendix
material. D (Section III, Division 1, Appendices) as a general guide
(d) Brazing alloys shall be limited to Section IX, for the materials listed by P-Numbers of Section IX. It is
F-No. 105. cautioned that preheating suggested in Appendix D (Sec-
(e) The allowable shear stress shall be 15 ksi (105 MPa) tion III, Division 1, Appendices) does not necessarily
or 0.4 ⴛ yield strength of base material [NF-3322.1(b)], ensure satisfactory completion of the welded joint and that
whichever is less, and the joint shall be loaded principally the preheat requirements for individual materials within
in shear only. the P-Number listing may be more or less restrictive. The
(f) Postbrazing heat treatment to develop or restore base Welding Procedure Specification for the material being
material mechanical properties shall be qualified by test welded shall specify the minimum preheating requirements
specimens which meet the thickness requirements of Sec- under the welding procedure qualification requirements of
tion IX, QB-451. The base material test specimens shall Section IX.
be exposed to the same thermal treatment as a brazed
part but need not contain a brazed joint. Postbrazing heat
NF-4612 Preheating Methods
treatment of actual parts or test specimens may be per-
formed in the same heat cycle as the brazing operation or Preheat for welding or thermal cutting, when employed,
in a separate heat cycle. Postbrazing heat treatment shall may be applied by any method which does not harm the
not exceed 1,850°F (1 010°C). base material or any weld metal already applied or which
99
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

does not introduce deleterious material into the welding (3 mm). For fillet welds, the nominal thickness is the throat
area which is harmful to the weld. thickness and, for partial penetration and material repair
welds, the nominal thickness is the depth of the weld groove
or preparation.
NF-4613 Interpass Temperatures
NF-4622.4 Holding Times at Temperature
Consideration should be given to limitations of interpass (a) The holding time at temperature as specified in Table
temperatures for quenched and tempered material to avoid NF-4622.1-1 shall be based on the nominal thickness of
detrimental effects on the mechanical properties. the weld. The holding time need not be continuous. It may
be an accumulation of the times of multiple postweld heat
treatment cycles.
NF-4620 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT
(b) Holding time at temperature in excess of the mini-
NF-4621 Heating and Cooling Methods mum requirements of Table NF-4622.1-1 may be used,
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) may be accomplished provided that specimens so heat treated are tested in accor-
by any suitable methods of heating and cooling, provided dance with NF-2200, NF-2400, and NF-4300.
the required heating and cooling rates, metal temperature, (c) Alternatively, when it is impractical to postweld heat
metal temperature uniformity, and temperature control are treat at the temperature range specified in Table NF-4622.1-
maintained. 1, it is permissible to perform the postweld heat treatment
of certain materials at lower temperatures for longer periods
of time in accordance with Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 and sub-
NF-4622 PWHT Time and Temperature paras. NF-4622.4(c)(1) through (c)(3).
Requirements (1) Except for P-No. 1 materials, when welds in the
NF-4622.1 General Requirements.1 Except as other- materials listed in Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 are to be postweld
wise permitted in NF-4622.7, all welds, including repair heat treated at these lower minimum temperatures, the
welds, shall be postweld heat treated. During postweld heat impact test specimens for the welding procedure qualifica-
treatment, the metal temperature shall be maintained within tion required by NF-4300 shall be made using the same
the temperature ranges and for the minimum holding times minimum temperatures and increased minimum holding
specified in Table NF-4622.1-1, except as otherwise per- time. Welding procedures, qualified at the temperature
mitted in NF-4622.4(c). P-Number groups in Table NF- range and minimum holding time specified in Table NF-
4622.1-1 are in accordance with Section IX, QW-420. 4622.1-1 and at the lower minimum temperature and
Except as provided in NF-4624.3, PWHT shall be per- increased minimum holding time permitted by Table NF-
formed in temperature-surveyed and -calibrated furnaces, 4622.4(c)-1, are also qualified for any temperature in
or PWHT shall be performed with thermocouples in contact between. When such an in-between temperature is used,
with the material or attached to blocks in contact with the the minimum holding time shall be interpolated from Table
material. In addition, the requirements of the following NF-4622.1-1 and the alternative requirements of Table NF-
subparagraphs shall apply. 4622.4(c)-1.
NF-4622.2 Time–Temperature Recordings. Time– (2) Except for P-No. 1 materials, when welds in the
temperature recordings of all postweld heat treatments shall materials listed in Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 are to be postweld
be made available for review by the Authorized Inspector. heat treated at these lower minimum temperatures, the
Identification on the time–temperature recording shall be welding material certification required by NF-2400 shall be
to the weld, part, or support. A summary of the time– made using the same minimum temperatures and increased
temperature recording may be provided for permanent rec- minimum holding time. Welding material certified at the
ords in accordance with NCA-4134.17. temperature range and minimum holding time specified in
Table NF-4622.1-1, and at the lower minimum tempera-
NF-4622.3 Definition of Nominal Thickness Gov- tures and increased minimum holding time permitted by
erning PWHT. The nominal thickness in Table NF- Table NF-4622.4(c)-1 is also certified for any temperature
4622.7(b)-1 is the thickness of the weld, the base material, in between.
or the thinner of the base materials being joined, whichever (3) Base material certified in accordance with
is least. It is not intended that nominal thickness include NF-2210 may be postweld heat treated at these lower mini-
material provided for forming allowance, thinning, or mill mum temperatures and increased minimum holding times
overrun when the excess material does not exceed 1⁄8 in. without recertification. Postweld heat treatment at these
lower minimum temperatures and increased minimum
1
Any postweld heat treatment time which is anticipated to be applied holding times may also be the tempering operation, pro-
Design Specification. The Certificate Holder shall include this time in vided a higher tempering temperature is not required by
the total time at temperature specified to be applied to the test specimens. the material specification.
100
TABLE NF-4622.1-1 07
MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (PWHT) OF WELDS
Holding Minimum Holding Time at Temperature for Weld Thickness (Nominal)
Temperature
1
Range, °F (°C) ⁄2 in. (13 mm) Over 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) Over 2 in. (50 mm)
P-Number (Sect. IX, QW-420) [Note (1)] or Less to 2 in. (50 mm) to 5 in. (125 mm) Over 5 in. (125 mm)
1, 3 1,100–1,250 30 min 1 hr/in. 2 hr plus 15 min 2 hr plus 15 min each
(595–675) (2 min/mm) each additional additional inch (2
inch (25 mm) hr plus 0.5 min/mm
over 2 in. (50 over 50 mm)
mm)
4 1,100–1,250 30 min 1 hr/in. 1 hr/in. 5 hr plus 15 min each
(595–675) (2 min/mm) (2 min/mm) additional inch (5
hr plus 0.5 min/mm
over 125 mm)
5A, 5B, 5C, 6 except P-No. 5B 1,250–1,400
Gr. 2 and P-No. 6 Gr. 4 (675–760)
5 hr plus 15 min each
5B Gr. 2 1350–1425 1 hr/in. 1 hr/in. additional inch (5
30 min.
(730–775) (2 min/mm) (2 min/mm) hr plus 0.5 min/mm
over 125 mm)
6 Gr. 4 1,100–1,150
(595–620)
7 1,300–1,400 30 min 1 hr/in. 1 hr/in. 5 hr plus 15 min each
(700–760) (2 min/mm) (2 min/mm) additional inch (5
hr plus 0.5 min/mm
over 125 mm)
9A Gr.1 1,100–1,250 5 hr plus 15 min each
(595–675) additional inch (5
1 hr/in. 1 hr/in.
30 min hr plus 0.5 min/mm
9B Gr. 1 1,100–1,175 (2 min/mm) (2 min/mm)
over 125 mm)
(595–635)
10A Gr. 1, 1,100–1,250 5 hr plus 15 min each
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10C Gr. 1, (595–675) additional inch (5

10F Gr. 1 1 hr/in. 1 hr/in. hr plus 0.5 min/mm
30 min
(2 min/mm) (2 min/mm) over 125 mm)
10I Gr. 1 1,300–1,400
(705–760)
11A Gr. 1 1,025–1,085
(550–585)
11A Gr. 4 1,000–1,050 1 hr/in. 1 hr/in. 1 hr/in.

30 min
(540–565) (2 min/mm) (2 min/mm) (2 min/mm)
11A Gr. 5 1,100–1,150

(595–620)
P-Nos. 8, 10H Gr. 1, 34, 42, 43,

45 and hard surfacing on
P-No. 1 base metal whose PWHT neither required nor prohibited
reported carbon content is not
more than 0.30%
GENERAL NOTE: Exemptions to the mandatory requirements of this Table are defined in NF-4622.7.
NOTE:
(1) All temperatures are metal temperatures.
101
TABLE NF-4622.4(c)-1 being heat treated, but shall not exceed 400°F (220°C) and
ALTERNATIVE HOLDING TEMPERATURES need not be less than 100°F (56°C) in any hourly interval.
AND TIMES During the heating and cooling period there shall not be
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Alternative Minimum a greater variation in temperature than 250°F (140°C)

Material Holding Temperatures, Alternative Minimum within any 15 ft (4.5 m) interval of weld length. The
P-Numbers °F (°C) Holding Times exceptions of NF-4623(a) and (b) are permitted.
1, 3, 9A Gr. 1, 1,050 (565) 2 hr/in. (4 min/mm) thick (a) P-No. 6 material may be cooled in air from the
9B Gr. 1 postweld heat treatment holding temperature specified in
1, 3, 9A Gr. 1, 1,000 (540) 4 hr/in. (8 min/mm) thick Table NF-4622.1-1.
10A Gr. 1, (b) For P-No. 7 materials, the cooling rate at tempera-
9B Gr. 1
tures above 1,200°F (650°C) shall not exceed 100°F /hr
GENERAL NOTE: All other requirements of NF-4622 shall apply. (56°C/hr) after which the rate of cooling shall be suffi-
ciently rapid to prevent embrittlement.
NF-4622.5 PWHT Requirements When Different P- NF-4624 Methods of Postweld Heat Treatment
Number Materials Are Joined. When materials of two
The postweld heat treatment shall be performed in accor-
different P-Number groups are joined by welding, the
dance with the requirements of one of the following sub-
applicable postweld heat treatment shall be that specified
paragraphs.
in Table NF-4622.1-1 for the material requiring the higher
PWHT temperature range. NF-4624.1 Furnace Heating — One Heat. Heating
the support or item in a closed furnace in one heat is the
NF-4622.6 PWHT Requirements for Nonpressure-
preferred procedure and should be used whenever practical.
Retaining Parts. When nonpressure-retaining material is
The furnace atmosphere shall be controlled so as to avoid
welded to pressure retaining material, the postweld heat
excessive oxidation, and direct impingement of flame on
treatment temperature range of the pressure retaining mate-
the support or item is prohibited.
rial shall control.
NF-4624.2 Furnace Heating — More Than One
NF-4622.7 Exemptions to Mandatory Requirements. Heat. The support or item may be heated in more than
Postweld heat treatment in accordance with this Subarticle one heat in a furnace, provided the furnace atmosphere
is not required for control requirements of NF-4624.1 apply and overlap of
(a) nonferrous materials the heated sections of the support or item is at least 5 ft
(b) welds exempted in Table NF-4622.7(b)-1 (1.5 m). When this procedure is used, the portion of the
(c) welds subjected to temperatures above the PWHT support or item outside the furnace shall be shielded so
temperature range specified in Table NF-4622.1-1, pro- that the temperature gradient is not harmful. The cross
vided the Welding Procedure Specification is qualified in section where the support or item projects from the furnace
accordance with Section IX and the base material and the shall not interesect a structural discontinuity.
deposited weld material has been heat treated at the higher
temperature NF-4624.3 Local Heating. Welds may be locally post-
(d) postweld heat treatment is not required for supports weld heat treated when it is not practical to heat treat the
constructed of Type 405 material or of Type 410 material entire support or item. Local postweld heat treatment shall
with carbon content not to exceed 0.08%, welded with consist of heating a circumferential band around the support
electrodes that produce an austenitic chromium–nickel or item at temperatures within the ranges specified in this
weld deposit or a non-air-hardening nickel–chromium–iron Subarticle. The minimum width of the controlled band at
weld deposit, provided the plate nominal thickness at the each side of the weld, on the face of the greatest weld
welded joint does not exceed 3⁄8 in. (10 mm), and for width, shall be the thickness of the weld or 2 in. (50 mm),
thicknesses over 3⁄8 in. to 11⁄2 in. (10 mm to 38 mm), whichever is less. The temperature of the support or item
provided a preheat of 450°F (230°C) is maintained during from the edge of the controlled band outward shall be
welding and the joints are completely radiographed gradually diminished so as to avoid harmful thermal gradi-
ents. This procedure may also be used for postweld heat
treatment after repairs.
NF-4623 PWHT Heating and Cooling Rate
NF-4624.4 Internal Heating. The support or item may
Requirements
be heated internally by any appropriate means and with
Above 800°F (425°C), the rate of heating and cooling adequate indicating and recording temperature devices to
in any hourly interval shall not exceed 400°F (220°C) aid in the control and maintenance of a uniform distribution
divided by the maximum thickness in inches of the material of temperature in the support or item. Previous to this
102
TABLE NF-4622.7(b)-1
EXEMPTIONS TO MANDATORY PWHT
Max.
P-Number Reported
(Sect. IX, Nominal Thickness Carbon, % Min. Preheat
QW-420) Type of Weld [Note (1)] (NF-4622.3) [Note (2)] Req’d, °F (°C)
1 All welds where the materials being joined 11⁄4 in. (32 mm) and less 0.30 or less ...
are 11⁄2 in. (38 mm) and less Over 11⁄4 in. (32 mm) to 11⁄2 in. 0.30 or less 200 (95)
(38 mm) Over 0.30 ...
3
⁄4 in. (19 mm) or less Over 0.30 200 (95)
Over 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) to 11⁄2 in.
(38 mm)
3
Fillet, partial penetration, and repair welds ⁄4 in. (19 mm) or less ... 200 (95)
in material over 11⁄2 in. (38 mm)
1
3 except All welds ⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
Gr. 3
1
4 All welds in pipes NPS 4 (DN 100) or less ⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 250 (120)
or tubes with nominal O.D. 4.5 in.
(114 mm) or less and attachment welds
1
5A, 5B, 5C All welds in pipes or tubes with maximum ⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 300 (150)
specified chromium 3.00% or less, NPS 4
(DN 100) or less pipe, and nominal O.D.
4.5 in. (114 mm) or less tubes
3
6 or 7 Gr. 1 Type 405 and 410S welded with A-No. 8, ⁄8 in. (10 mm) or less 0.08 or less ...
(For Type A-No. 9, or F-No. 43 filler metal
405)
5
9A Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure qualifica- ⁄8 in. (16 mm) or less ... 200 (95)
tion is made using equal or greater thick-
ness base material than the production
weld
1
Attachment welds joining nonpressure- ⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less ... 200 (95)
retaining material to pressure-retaining
material over 5⁄8 in. (16 mm)
1
All welds in pipes NPS 4 (DN 100) or less ⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.15 or less 250 (120)
or tubes with nominal O.D. 4.5 in.
(114 mm) and less
5
9B Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure qualifica- ⁄8 in. (16 mm) or less ... 200 (95)
weld
1
retaining material to pressure retaining
5
10A Gr. 1 All welds, provided the procedure qualifica- ⁄8 in. (16 mm) or less ... 200 (95)
weld
1
Attachment welds joining nonpressure- ⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
103
07 TABLE NF-4622.7(b)-1
EXEMPTIONS TO MANDATORY PWHT (CONT’D)
Max.
P-Number Reported
(Sect. IX, Nominal Thickness Carbon, % Min. Preheat
QW-420) Type of Weld [Note (1)] (NF-4622.3) [Note (2)] Req’d, °F (°C)
1
10A Gr. 1 All welds in pipes or tubes to pressure ⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less 0.25 or less 200 (95)
(cont’d) retaining material over 5⁄8 in. (16 mm)
10C Gr. 1 All welds in materials 11⁄4 in. (32 mm) and ... ...
11⁄2 in. (38 mm) and less less
Over 11⁄4 in. (32 mm) ... 200 (95)
to 11⁄2 in. (38 mm)
1
1
Groove or fillet welds attaching nozzle con- ⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less ... 200 (95)
nections not over 2 in. (50 mm) finished
I.D. in material over 11⁄4 in. (32 mm), pro-
vided ligaments do not require an
increased shell or head thickness
10I Gr. 1 All welds in material 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) and 1
⁄2 in. (13 mm) or less ... ...
less
11A Gr. 1 All welds in material 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) and 1
⁄2 in. (13 mm) and ... ...
less less
11A Gr. 4 All welds in material 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) and 1
⁄2 in. (13 mm) and ... 250 (120)
less less
GENERAL NOTE: The exemptions noted in this table do not apply to the following:
(a) electron beam welds in ferritic materials over 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) in thickness
(b) inertia and friction welds in material of any thickness of P-No. 3, P-No. 4, P-No. 5, P-No. 7 (except for Types 405 and 410S), P-No. 10,
and P-No. 11 materials
NOTES:
(1) Where the thickness of material is identified in the Type of Weld column, it is the thickness of the base material at the welded joint.
(2) Carbon level of the materials being joined.
operation, the support or item should be fully enclosed NF-4712 Thread Lubricants
with insulating material.
Any lubricant or compound used in threaded joints shall
be suitable for the service conditions and shall not react
unfavorably with any support element material. Contact
NF-4660 HEAT TREATMENT OF
surfaces within friction-type joints shall be free of lubri-
ELECTROSLAG WELDS
cants.
Electroslag welds in ferritic material over 11⁄2 in. (38
mm) in nominal thickness at the joints shall be given a
NF-4713 Removal of Thread Lubricants
grain refining heat treatment.
All threading lubricants or compounds shall be removed
from surfaces which are to be welded.
NF-4700 REQUIREMENTS FOR BOLTED
CONSTRUCTION NF-4720 BOLTING
NF-4710 BOLTING AND THREADING NF-4721 Bolt Holes
NF-4711 Thread Engagement
For the purpose of this Article, high strength bolts shall
The threads of all bolts or studs shall be engaged for be considered those with specified minimum yield strength
the full length of thread in the load carrying nut unless greater than 80 ksi (550 MPa). Bolt holes shall meet the
otherwise specified in the Design Documents. requirements of NF-4721(a) through (e).
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
104
TABLE NF-4721(a)-1 in NF-3000. In bearing-type connections, the long diameter

BOLT HOLE SIZES of the slot shall be normal to the direction of loading. Long-
Bolt Size Hole Size slotted holes may be used in only one of the connected parts
of either a friction-type or bearing-type connection at an
≤1 in. (25 mm) Bolt diameter plus 1⁄16 in.
individual faying surface. Structural plate washers or a
(1.5 mm)
continuous bar not less than 5⁄16 in. (8 mm) in thickness
11⁄8 in. to 2 in. (28 to 50 mm) Bolt diameter plus 1⁄8 in. shall be used to cover long slots that are in the outer plies
(3 mm) of joints. These washers or bars shall have a size sufficient
to cover the slot completely after installation and shall
>2 in. (50 mm) Bolt diameter plus 3⁄16 in. meet the requirements of NF-3000.
(5 mm)
(c) Except as specified in NF-4721(d), holes may be
punched, provided the thickness of the material is not
greater than the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1⁄8 in.
TABLE NF-4721(b)-1 (3 mm). When the thickness of the material is greater than
TOLERANCES ON OVERSIZED HOLES the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1⁄8 in. (3 mm), holes
Bolt Size Hole Size shall be drilled, subpunched, and reamed, or thermally cut.
Thermal cutting shall not be used unless the load bearing
≤ 7⁄8 in. (22 mm) Bolt diameter plus
3 surfaces are machined or ground smooth. For subpunched
⁄16 in. (5 mm)
holes, the die shall be at least 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) smaller
1 in. (25 mm) Bolt diameter plus than the nominal diameter of the bolt.
1
⁄4 in. (6 mm)
(d) Bolt holes in material over 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) thick
> 1 in. (25 mm) Bolt diameter plus having a specified minimum yield strength greater than 80
5
⁄16 in. (8 mm) ksi (550 MPa) shall be drilled.
(e) For bolts not subjected to shear, the limits for over-
sized and slotted holes in NF-4721(d) may be increased if
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(a) Holes for nonfitted bolts shall meet the requirements structural plate washers or continuous bars which meet the
of Table NF-4721(a)-1. For anchor bolts set in concrete requirements of NF-3000 are provided.
or concrete expansion anchor, the hole sizes indicated in
this Subsection may be increased by 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm). NF-4722 Bolted Connections
When the bolt hole size is 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) larger than the
(a) Surfaces of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head
bolt, and the bolt is 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) or smaller, standard
and nut shall not have a slope of more than 1:20 with
washers shall be used.
respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Where the surface
(b) Oversized or slotted bolt holes may be used with
of high strength bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20,
high strength bolts 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) in diameter and larger,
a beveled washer shall be used to compensate for the lack
except as restricted in NF-4721(b)(1), (b)(2), and (b)(3).
of parallelism.
(1) Oversized holes shall not exceed the requirements
(b) Bolts loaded in pure shear shall not have threads
of Table NF-4721(b)-1. They may be used in any or all
located in the load bearing part of the shank unless permit-
plies of friction-type connections. Hardened washers shall
ted by the Design Specifications.
be installed over exposed oversized holes.
(2) Short-slotted holes shall not be wider than permit-
ted by NF-4721(a) and shall not have a length exceeding NF-4723 Precautions Before Bolting
the oversize diameter allowed in NF-4721(b)(1) by more All parts assembled for bolting shall have contact sur-
than 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm). They may be used in any or all plies faces free from scale, chips, or other deleterious material.
of friction-type or bearing-type connections. The slots may Surfaces and edges to be joined shall be smooth, uniform,
be used without regard to direction of loading in friction- and free from fins, tears, cracks, and other defects which
type connections, but shall be normal to the direction of would degrade the strength of the joint.
the load in bearing-type connections. Hardened washers
shall be installed over exposed short-slotted holes.
NF-4724 Bolt Tension
(3) Long-slotted holes shall not be wider than permit-
ted by NF-4721(a) and shall not have a length which All high strength structural bolts shall be preloaded to
exceeds 21⁄2 times the bolt diameter. In friction-type con- a value not less than that given in the Design Specifications.
nections, the long-slotted holes may be used without regard Preloading shall be monitored by the turn of nut method,
to direction of loading, provided the stress on the bolts by properly calibrated wrenches, by load indicating wash-
does not exceed 75% of the allowable working stress given ers, or by direct extension indicators. Bolts preloaded by
105
means of a calibrated wrench shall be installed with a NF-4725.2 Preloading of High Strength Fasteners.
hardened washer under the nut or bolt head, whichever is Preloading threaded fasteners made of material with a yield
the element turned in preloading. Hardened washers are strength of 80 ksi (550 MPa) or greater, loaded in tension,
required under the bolt head and the nut when the direct to a value at least 20% above the maximum load on the
extension or load indicating washer method is used. Hard- fastener for the specified loading conditions, limited to 70%
ened washers are not required when bolts are preloaded of the specified minimum tensile strength of the fastener
by the turn of nut method, except that hardened washers material satisfies the requirement for locking.
are required under the nut and bolt head when the bolts NF-4725.3 Preloading of Non-High Strength Fasten-
are used to connect material having a specified yield ers. When locking devices cannot be installed because of
strength less than 40 ksi (270 MPa). assembly geometry, preloading of the threaded fasteners
in an assembly with fastener material of a yield strength
below 80 ksi (550 MPa) is an acceptable method for locking
NF-4725 Locking Devices provided the resulting preload is at least 20% above the
NF-4725.1 Types of Locking Devices. Threaded fas- maximum load on the fastener for the specified loading
teners shall be provided with locking devices to prevent conditions, but is limited to 70% of the specified minimum
loosening during service. Elastic stop nuts and thread lock- tensile strength of the fastener. The threaded assembly shall
ing compounds (when compatible with service conditions), be tested for the dynamic loading conditions specified in
lock nuts, including full or jam, slotted, drilled and wired, the Design Specification, and the established preload shall
free spinning and prevailing torque are all acceptable lock- be verified on the assembly by properly calibrated
ing devices. Upset threads by cold working or tack welding wrenches, direct extension indicators, or the turn of the
may serve as locking devices. Internally and externally nut method. The results of the test, required preload, and
toothed washers, and disk and helical spring lock washers specified thread lubrication shall be provided in the Design
shall not be used as locking devices. Report.
106
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

ARTICLE NF-5000
EXAMINATION
NF-5100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with applicable
EXAMINATION material or procedure specifications.
NF-5110 PROCEDURES, QUALIFICATIONS,
AND EVALUATIONS NF-5114 Rounding-Off of Weld Measurements
NF-5111 General Requirements
In order to properly evaluate specified dimensional sizes,
Nondestructive examinations shall be conducted in
measurements shall be rounded off to the nearest 1⁄32 in.
accordance with the examination methods of Section V,
(0.8 mm) for undercut and 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) for weld size.
except as they may be modified by the requirements of
Other dimensions of welds shall be rounded off to the
this Article. Radiographic examination shall be in accor-
nearest 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) or as otherwise specified in the design
dance with Section V, Article 2, except that the geometric
documents.
unsharpness shall not exceed the limits of T-274.2. Ultra-
sonic examination shall be in accordance with Section
V, Article 4; magnetic particle examination shall be in
NF-5120 TIME OF EXAMINATION OF WELDS
accordance with Section V, Article 7; liquid penetrant
examination shall be in accordance with Section V, Article Examinations of welds required by NF-5200 shall be
6; and visual examination shall be in accordance with performed at the times stipulated in NF-5120(a) and (b)
Section V, Article 9. The examinations required by this during fabrication and installation.
Article or by reference to this Article shall be performed (a) Radiography of welds may be performed prior to
by personnel who have been qualified as required by this any postweld heat treatment.
Article. The results of the examinations shall be evaluated (b) Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination
in accordance with the acceptance standards of this Article. shall be performed after any postweld heat treatment,
except that welds in P-No. 1 material may be examined
NF-5112 Nondestructive Examination Procedures before or after postweld heat treatment.
All nondestructive examinations required by this Article
shall be performed in accordance with detailed written
procedures which have been proven by actual demonstra-
tion to the satisfaction of a Level III Examiner. The proce- NF-5200 REQUIRED EXAMINATION OF
dures shall comply with the appropriate Article of Section WELDS
V for the particular examination method. The digitization NF-5210 EXAMINATION OF CLASS 1
of radiographic film and radioscopic images shall meet the SUPPORT WELDS
requirements of Section V, Article 2, Mandatory Appendix
NF-5211 Scope
III, “Digital Image Acquisition, Display and Storage for
Radiography and Radioscopy.” Written procedures and The requirements of this subsubarticle shall apply to all
records of demonstration of procedure capability and per- Class 1 supports except that supports for Class 1 piping,
sonnel qualification shall be maintained on file as detailed NPS 2 (DN 50) and less, may be examined by the rules
in the Certificate Holder’s Quality Program. At least one of NF-5220.
copy of the procedure shall be readily available to all
applicable nondestructive examination personnel for refer-
ence and use. NF-5212 Primary Member Welded Joints
(a) All full penetration butt welded joints in primary
NF-5113 Post-Examination Cleaning members shall be examined by the radiographic method.
Following any nondestructive examination in which (b) All other welded joints in primary members shall
examination material is applied to the piece, the piece be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
107
method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only acceptance standards of NF-5332, except that a calibration
be visually examined. block representative of the primary member shall be used.
The block for straight beam examination shall have 1⁄4 in.
(6 mm) diameter flat-bottomed holes at one-fourth, one-
NF-5213 Secondary Member Welded Joints
half, and three-fourths of the thickness of the member being
All welded joints in secondary members shall be exam- welded, from which a distance amplitude curve shall be
ined by the visual method. established.
NF-5214 Special Requirements

NF-5230 EXAMINATION OF CLASS 3
For weldments that impose loads in the through thick- SUPPORT WELDS
ness direction of primary members 1 in. and greater in NF-5231 Primary Member Welded Joints
thickness, the base material beneath the weld shall be ultra-
sonically examined, when required by NF-4440, over 100% (a) Primary member welded joints that have a groove
of the referenced area using the procedure of SA-577 or depth or throat dimension greater than 1 in. (25 mm) shall
SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the acceptance stan- be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle
dards of NF-5332, except that a calibration block represen- method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only
tative of the primary member shall be used. The block for be visually examined.
straight beam examination shall have 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) diame- (b) Primary welded joints exclusive of those described
ter flat-bottomed holes at one-fourth, one-half, and three- in NF-5231(a) shall be examined by the visual method.
fourths of the thickness of the member being welded, from
which a distance amplitude curve shall be established.
All welded joints in secondary members shall be exam-
NF-5220 EXAMINATION OF CLASS 2 AND ined by the visual method.
MC SUPPORT WELDS
NF-5221 Primary Member Welded Joints NF-5234 Special Requirements
(a) All butt welded joints in primary members shall For weldments that impose loads in the through thick-
be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle ness direction of primary members 1 in. (25 mm) and
method. greater in thickness, the base material beneath the weld
(b) All partial penetration or fillet welds in primary shall be ultrasonically examined, when required by
members that have a groove depth or throat dimensions NF-4440, over 100% of the referenced area using the proce-
greater than 1 in. (25 mm) and T-welded joints welded dure of SA-577 or SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the
with throat dimensions of 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) or greater shall acceptance standards of NF-5332, except that a calibration
be examined by the liquid penetrant or magnetic particle block representative of the primary member shall be used.
method, except that the exposed ends of welds need only The block for straight beam examination shall have 1⁄4 in.
be visually examined. (6 mm) diameter flat-bottomed holes at one-fourth, one-
(c) All primary welds exclusive of those described in half, and three-fourths of the thickness of the member being
NF-5221(a) and (b) shall be examined by the visual welded, from which a distance amplitude curve shall be
method. established.

NF-5240 INERTIA AND CONTINUOUS DRIVE
All welded joints in secondary members shall be exam- FRICTION WELDS
ined by the visual method.
(a) When radiographic examination is required by this
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Article, inertia and continuous drive friction welds shall

NF-5224 Special Requirements also be examined by the ultrasonic method to verify bond-
For weldments that impose loads in the through thick- ing over the entire area.
ness direction of primary members 1 in. (25 mm) and (b) The materials used shall be those assigned a P-
greater in thickness, the base material beneath the weld Number by Section IX, but shall not include rimmed or
shall be ultrasonically examined, when required by semikilled steel.
NF-4440, over 100% of the referenced area using the proce- (c) One of the two parts to be joined must be held in a
dure of SA-577 or SA-578, as detailed in Section V to the fixed position and the other part rotated. The two faces to
108
be joined must be symmetrical with respect to the axis of where t is the thickness of the weld being examined; if a
rotation. weld joins two members having different thicknesses at
(d) The weld between the two members shall be a full the weld, t is the thinner of these two thicknesses.
penetration weld. (b) Indications characterized as cracks, lack of fusion,
or incomplete penetration are unacceptable regardless of
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
length.
NF-5300 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
NF-5332 Acceptance Standards for Laminar
NF-5320 RADIOGRAPHIC ACCEPTANCE
Indications
STANDARDS
NF-5321 Evaluation of Indications Any indication detected in the base material beneath the
weld which is of a laminar type is unacceptable if the
Indications shown on the radiographs of welds and char- indication cannot be contained within a circle having a
acterized as imperfections are unacceptable under the fol- diameter equal to one-half of the thickness of the thinner
lowing conditions: of the members joined.
(a) any indication characterized as a crack or zone of
incomplete fusion or penetration
(b) any other elongated indication which has a length NF-5340 MAGNETIC PARTICLE
greater than ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
(1) 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) for t up to 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), inclusive
NF-5341 Evaluation of Indications
(2) 1⁄3t for t from 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) to 21⁄4 in. (56 mm),
inclusive (a) Mechanical discontinuities at the surface are
(3) 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21⁄4 in. (56 mm) revealed by the retention of the examination medium. All
indications are not necessarily defects, however, since cer-
where t is the thickness of the thinner portion of the weld tain metallurgical discontinuities and magnetic permeabil-
(c) internal root weld conditions are acceptable when ity variations may produce similar indications which are
the density change as indicated in the radiograph is not not relevant.
abrupt; elongated indications on the radiograph at either (b) Any indication which is believed to be nonrelevant
edge of such conditions shall be unacceptable, as provided shall be reexamined by the same or other nondestructive
in NF-5321(b) examination methods to verify whether or not actual defects
(d) any group of aligned indications having an aggregate are present. Surface conditioning may precede the reexami-
length greater than t in a length of 12t unless the minimum nation. After an indication has been verified to be nonrele-
distance between successive indications exceeds 6L, in vant, it is not necessary to reinvestigate repetitive
which case the aggregate length is unlimited, L being the nonrelevant indications of the same type. Nonrelevant indi-
length of the largest indication cations which would mask defects are unacceptable.
(e) rounded indications are not a factor in the acceptabil- (c) Relevant indications are indications which result
ity of welds that are radiographed from imperfections. Linear indications are indications in
which the length is more than three times the width.
Rounded indications are indications which are circular or
NF-5330 ULTRASONIC ACCEPTANCE elliptical with the length equal to or less than three times
STANDARDS the width.
All imperfections which produce a response greater than
20% of the reference level shall be investigated to the NF-5342 Acceptance Standards
extent that the operator can determine the shape, identity,
and location of all such imperfections and evaluate them (a) Only imperfections producing indications with
in terms of the acceptance standards as given in NF-5330(a) major dimensions greater than 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be
and (b). considered relevant imperfections.
(a) Imperfections are unacceptable if the indications (b) Imperfections producing the following indications
exceed the reference level amplitude and have lengths are unacceptable:
exceeding (1) any cracks or linear indications
(1) 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) for t up to 3⁄4 in. (19 mm), inclusive (2) rounded indications with dimensions greater than
3
(2) 1⁄3t for t from 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) to 21⁄4 in. (56 mm), ⁄16 in. (5 mm)
inclusive (3) four or more rounded indications in a line sepa-
(3) 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) for t over 21⁄4 in. (56 mm) rated by 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) or less edge to edge
109
(4) ten or more rounded indications in any 6 in.2 of the weld. Oversized fillet welds are acceptable if the
(4 000 mm2) of surface with the major dimension of this oversized weld does not interfere with mating parts.
area not to exceed 6 in. (150 mm), with the area taken in (c) In fillet welds, incomplete fusion of 3⁄8 in. (10 mm)
the most unfavorable location relative to the indications in any 4 in. (100 mm) segment, and 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) in welds
being evaluated less than 4 in. (100 mm) long, is acceptable. For groove
welds, incomplete fusion is not acceptable. For fillet and
groove welds, rounded end conditions that occur in welding
NF-5350 LIQUID PENETRANT ACCEPTANCE (starts and stops) shall not be considered indications of
STANDARDS incomplete fusion and are irrelevant.
NF-5351 Evaluation of Indications (d) Overlap is acceptable provided the criteria for weld
size and fusion can be satisfied. When fusion in the overlap
(a) Mechanical discontinuities at the surface are length cannot be verified, an overlap length of 3⁄8 in. (10
revealed by bleeding out of the penetrant; however, local- mm) in any 4 in. (100 mm) segment, and 1⁄4 in. (6 mm)
ized surface discontinuities such as may occur from in welds less than 4 in. (100 mm) long, is acceptable.
machining marks or surface conditions may produce simi-
(e) Craters are acceptable when the criteria for weld
lar indications which are not relevant.
size are met. Craters that occur outside the specified weld
(b) Any indication which is believed to be nonrelevant length are irrelevant provided there are no cracks.
shall be reexamined to verify whether or not actual defects
(f) Requirements for acceptability of undercuts are as
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
are present. Surface conditioning may precede the reexami-
follows:
nation. Nonrelevant indications and broad areas of pigmen-
(1) For material 3⁄8 in. (10 mm) and less nominal
tation which would mask defects are unacceptable.
thickness, undercut depth of 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) on one side
(c) Relevant indications are indications which result
of the member for the full length of the weld, or 1⁄32 in.
from imperfections. Linear indications are indications in
(0.8 mm) on one side for one-half the length of the weld,
which the length is more than three times the width.
and 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) for one-fourth the length of the weld
Rounded indications are indications which are circular or
on the same side of the member is acceptable. For members
elliptical with the length equal to or less than three times
welded on both sides where undercut exists in the same
the width.
plane of a member, the cumulative lengths of undercut are
limited to the lengths of undercut allowed on one side.
NF-5352 Acceptance Standards Melt-through that results in a hole in the base metal is
unacceptable.
(a) Only imperfections producing indications with
(2) For material greater than 3⁄8 in. (10 mm) nominal
major dimensions greater than 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be
thickness, undercut depth of 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) for the full
considered relevant imperfections.
length of the weld and 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) for one-fourth the
(b) Imperfections producing the following indications
length of the weld on both sides of the member is accept-
are unacceptable:
able. When either welds or undercut exist only on one side
(1) any cracks or linear indications
of the member or are not in the same plane, the allowable
(2) rounded indications with dimensions greater than undercut depth of 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) may be increased to
3
⁄16 in. (5 mm) 1
⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) for the full length of the weld.
(3) four or more rounded indications in a line sepa- (g) Only surface porosity whose major surface dimen-
rated by 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) or less edge to edge sion exceeds 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be considered relevant.
(4) ten or more rounded indications in any 6 in.2 Fillet and groove welds that contain surface porosity are
(4 000 mm2) of surface with the major dimensions of this unacceptable if
area not to exceed 6 in. (150 mm), with the area taken in (1) the sum of diameters of random porosity exceeds
the most unfavorable location relative to the indications 3
⁄8 in. (10 mm) in any linear inch of weld or 3⁄4 in. (19
being evaluated mm) in any 12 in. (300 mm) of weld or
(2) four or more pores are aligned and the pores are
separated by 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) or less, edge to edge
NF-5360 VISUAL ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
(h) The length and location of welds shall be as specified
When visual examination is performed in accordance on the detail drawing, except that weld lengths may be
with NF-5200, the acceptance standards shall be in accor- longer than specified. For weld lengths less than 3 in. (75
dance with the following: mm), the permissible underlength is 1⁄8 in. (3 mm), and
(a) Cracks are unacceptable. for welds 3 in. (75 mm) and longer, the permissible
(b) A fillet weld is permitted to be less than the size underlength is 1⁄4 in. (6 mm). Intermittent welds shall be
specified by 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) for one-fourth the length spaced within 1 in. (25 mm) of the specified location.
110
(i) Arc strikes and associated blemishes on the weld or shall be considered minimun requirements except as modi-
in the base material are acceptable provided no cracking fied in NF-5521(a)(1) through (a)(5).
is visually detected. (1) Qualification of level III nondestructive examina-
(j) Slag whose major surface dimension is 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) tion personnel shall be by examination.
or less is irrelevant. Isolated surface slag that remains after (a) The basic and method examinations, paras.
weld cleaning and does not exceed 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) in its 8.8(1) and 8.8(2) of SNT-TC-1A, may be prepared and
major surface dimension is acceptable. [Slag is considered administered by the Employer, ASNT, or an outside
to be isolated when it does not occur more frequently than agency.
once per weld or more than once in a 3 in. (75 mm) weld (b) The specific examinations, para. 8.8(3) of SNT-
segment.] Spatter remaining after the cleaning operation TC-1A, shall be prepared and administered by the
is acceptable. Employer or an outside Agency. The employer or outside
agency administering the specific examination shall iden-
tify the minimum grade requirement in a written program
NF-5500 QUALIFICATIONS AND when the basic and method examinations have been admin-
istered by ASNT which issues grades on a pass /fail basis.
CERTIFICATION OF
In this case, the minimum grade for the specific examina-
NONDESTRUCTIVE
tion may not be less than 80%.
EXAMINATION PERSONNEL
(2) The written practice identified in paragraph 5 of
NF-5510 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SNT-TC-1A and the procedures used for examination of
personnel shall be referenced in the Employer’s Quality
Organizations performing Code required nondestructive
Program.
examinations shall use personnel competent and knowl-
(3) The number of hours of training and experience
edgeable to the degree specified by NF-5520. When these
services are subcontracted by the Certificate Holder or for nondestructive examination personnel who perform
Quality System Certificate Holder, he shall verify the quali- only one operation of a nondestructive examination method
fication of personnel to the requirements of NF-5520. All that consists of more than one operation, or perform a
nondestructive examinations required by this Subsection nondestructive examination of limited scope, may be less
shall be performed by and the results evaluated by qualified than that recommended in Table 6.3.1 of SNT-TC-1A. The
nondestructive examination personnel. training and experience times shall be described in the
written practice and any limitations or restrictions placed
on the certification shall be described in the written practice
and on the certificate.
NF-5520 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION,
CERTIFICATION, AND (a) The minimum classroom training time identi-
VERIFICATION fied in Table SNT-TC-1A may be reduced from 8 and
16 hr to 4 and 8 hr, respectively, for visual examination
NF-5521 Qualification Procedure
personnel.
07 (a) Personnel performing nondestructive examinations (4) For visual examination, the Jaeger Number 1 let-
shall be qualified in accordance with the recommended ters shall be used in lieu of the Jaeger Number 2 letters
guidelines of SNT-TC-1A. 1,2 The Employer’s 3 written specified in paragraph 8.2(1) of SNT-TC-1A. The use of
practice required by paragraph 5 of SNT-TC-1A shall iden- equivalent type and size letters is permitted.
tify Employer requirements relative to the recommended (5) A Level I individual shall be qualified to perform
guidelines. The recommended guidelines of SNT-TC-1A specific setups, calibrations, and tests, and to record and
evaluate data by comparison with specific acceptance crite-
1
SNT-TC-1A is a Recommended Practice for Nondestructive Testing ria defined in written instructions. The Level I individual
Personnel Qualification and Certification published by the American Soci- shall implement these written NDE instructions under the
ety for Nondestructive Testing, 1711 Arlingate Lane, P.O. Box 28518,
Columbus, Ohio 43228-0518. SNT-TC-1A-1992 is the applicable edition.
guidance of a Level II or III individual. A Level I individual
2
Personnel qualified by examination and certified to previous editions may independently accept the results of nondestructive
of SNT-TC-1A are considered to be qualified to the 1992 edition when examinations when the specific acceptance criteria are
the recertification is based on continuing satisfactory performance. All defined in the written instructions.
reexaminations and new examinations shall be in accordance with the
1992 edition. (b) For nondestructive examination methods not cov-
3
Employer as used in this Article shall include: N type Certificate ered by SNT-TC-1A documents, personnel shall be quali-
Holders; Material Organizations’ Certificate Holders; Material Organiza- fied to comparable levels of competency by subjection to
tions who are qualified in accordance with NCA-3861(a)(1); and organiza-
tions who provide subcontracted nondestructive examination services to comparable examinations on the particular method
organizations described above. involved.
111
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(c) The emphasis shall be on the individual’s ability to (c) When an outside agency is the examining agent for
perform the nondestructive examination in accordance with Level III qualification of the Employer’s personnel, the
the applicable procedure for the intended application. examination results shall be included with the Employer’s
(d) For nondestructive examination methods that consist record.
of more than one operation or type, it is permissible to use
personnel qualified to perform one or more operations. As
NF-5523 Verification of Nondestructive
an example, one person may be used who is qualified to
Examination Personnel Certification
conduct radiographic examination and another may be used
who is qualified to interpret and evaluate the radio- The Certificate Holder has the responsibility to verify
graphic film. the qualification and certification of nondestructive exami-
nation personnel employed by Material Organizations qual-
NF-5522 Certification of Personnel ified by them in accordance with NCA-3820, and
subcontractors who provide nondestructive examination
(a) The Employer retains responsibility for the ade- services to them.
quacy of the program and is responsible for certification
of Level I, II, and III nondestructive examination personnel.
(b) When ASNT is the outside agency administering
NF-5530 RECORDS
the Level III basic and method examinations
[NF-5521(a)(1)(a)], the Employer may use a letter from Personnel qualification records identified in para. 9.4 of
ASNT as evidence on which to base the certification. SNT-TC-1A shall be retained by the Employer.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
112
ARTICLE NF-8000
CERTIFICATES OF ACCREDITATION AND
CERTIFICATION DOCUMENTS
NF-8100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The requirements for Certificates of Accreditation and certification documents (Certificate of Compliance and NS-1
Certificate of Conformance) shall be as specified in NCA-8000 and shall apply only to those items fabricated under an
NCA-4000 Quality Assurance Program. Inspection by an ANI and Code Symbol Stamping are not required for supports.
113
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
114
MANDATORY APPENDICES
MANDATORY APPENDIX NF-I
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(In preparation)
MANDATORY APPENDIX NF-II

DESIGN OF SINGLE ANGLE MEMBERS
ARTICLE NF-II-1000 NF-II-3200 TENSION

INTRODUCTION
The allowable tension stress Ft shall not exceed 0.6 Sy
NF-II-1100 SCOPE on the gross area Ag , nor 0.50 Su on the effective net area Ae .
(a) For members connected by bolting, the net area and
This Mandatory Appendix provides design rules for sin-
effective net area shall be determined from NF-3322.8.
gle angle members that are used in Section III, Division
(b) When the load is transmitted by longitudinal or com-
1 Class 1, 2, 3, and MC linear support construction.
bination of longitudinal and transverse welds through just
one leg of the angle, the effective net area shall be
NF-II-1200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Ae p 0.85 Ag (1)
The requirements of Article NF-3000 shall be met except (c) When the load is transmitted by transverse weld
as modified by this Appendix. through just one leg of the angle, Ae is the area of the
connected leg.
ARTICLE NF-II-2000
NOMENCLATURE NF-II-3300 SHEAR
Nomenclature is given in NF-3313 except as noted in The allowable shear stress due to flexure and torsion
NF-II-3200 to NF-II-3600. shall be
Fv p 0.4Sy (2)
ARTICLE NF-II-3000
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
NF-II-3100 GENERAL NF-II-3400 COMPRESSION
Single angle members are designed in accordance with The allowable compressive stress on the gross area of
NF-II-3200 to NF-II-3600. axially compressed members shall be
115
when K l / r < C c′ where Fe is the elastic buckling strength for the flexural-
torsional mode.
冤冥S
(K l ⁄ r)2 (a) For equal leg angles with w as the axis of symmetry
Q 1− y
2C′c2
冤冪冥
Fa p (3) Few + Fej 4 Few Fej H
冢 C′ 冣
Kl⁄r (K l ⁄ r)3 Fe p 1− 1−
5⁄3 + 3⁄8 − 2H (Few +Fej )2
c 8 C ′c3
when K l / R > C c′ (b) For unequal leg angles, Fe is the lowest root of the
cubic equation
12 ␲2 E
Fa p (4) (Fe − Fez )(Fe − Few )(Fe − Fej ) − Fe2(Fe − Few )(zo / r o )2 −
23 (K l / r)2
where Fe2(Fe − Fez )(wo / r o )2 p 0
K l / r p largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced where

length as defined in NF-3322.2 E p modulus of elasticity, ksi (MPa)
冪
2 ␲2 E G p shear modulus, ksi (MPa)
C c′ p
Q Sy I z, I w p moment of inertia about principal axes, in.4
The reduction factor Q shall be (mm4)
J p torsional constant p 2bt3 / 3 p t2 A / 3, in.4
(U.S. Customary Units) (mm4)
zo , wo p coordinates of the shear center with respect
when b / t ≤ 76 / 冪 Sy
to the centroid, in. (mm)
Qp1 (5) r o2 p zo2 + wo2 + (Iz + Iw) / A, in.2 (mm2); Iz + Iw p
I x + Iy
when 76 / 冪 Sy < b / t < 155 / 冪 Sy H p 1 − (zo2 + wo2) / r o2 p (Iz + Iw) / A r o2
Q p 1.340 − 0.00447 (b / t) 冪 Sy (6) ␲2 E
Fez p , ksi (MPa)
when b / t ≥ 155 / 冪 Sy (Kz l / rz )2
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Q p 15,500 / [Sy (b / t)2] (7) ␲2 E

Few p , ksi (MPa)
(Kw l / rw)2
(SI Units)
GJ Gt2
when b / t ≤ 200 / 冪 Sy Fej p 2 p , ksi (MPa)
Ar o 3 r o2
Qp1 (5)
A p cross-sectional area
Kz ,Kw p effective length factors
when 200 / 冪 Sy < b / t < 407 / 冪 Sy l p unbraced length
Q p 1.340 − 0.00170 (b / t) 冪 Sy (6) rz , rw p radii of gyration about principal axes
For members whose design is based on compressive force,
when b / t ≥ 407 / 冪 Sy
the largest effective slenderness ratio preferably should not
Q p 106 900 / [Sy (b / t)2] (7) exceed 200.
where
b p full width of the longest angle leg NF-II-3500 FLEXURE
Sy p specified minimum yield strength, ksi (MPa)
t p thickness of angle The allowable bending stress limits of NF-II-3510 shall
be used as indicated in NF-II-3520 and NF-II-3530.
For short, thin, or unequal leg angles, flexural-torsional
buckling may produce a significant reduction in strength.
In such cases, the allowable stress shall be determined by NF-II-3510 ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS
the previous equations substituting an equivalent slender-
ness ratio (K l / r)equiv for K l / r The allowable bending stress, Fb, is a function of the
unbraced length to width ratio (l / b ) and the width to thick-
(K l / r)equiv p ␲ 冪 E / Fe ness ration (b / t ) of the single angle member.
116
FIG. NF-II-3510 EQUAL LEG SINGLE ANGLE LIMITS FOR Fb p 0.66Sy

(Reprinted with Permission of AISC)
For equal leg angles fabricated from materials with a An angle leg shall be considered to be in compression if
minimum specified yield strength of 36 ksi (250 MPa) and the tip of the angle leg is in compression, in which case
50 ksi (345 MPa), Fig. NF-II-3510 may be used to deter- the calculated stress fb at the tip of this leg is used.
mine the limiting combination of l / b and b / t for which
Fb is equal to 0.66Sy . For equal leg angles not meeting the NF-II-3512
limits of Fig. NF-II-3510 and for unequal leg angles, the For the tip of an angle leg in tension
bending stress is limited to the minimum allowable value
Fb determined from NF-II-3511, NF-II-3512, and NF-II- Fb p 0.66Sy (11)
3513 as applicable.
NF-II-3513
NF-II-3511 To prevent lateral-torsional buckling, the maximum
compression stress shall not exceed
To prevent local buckling when the tip of an angle leg
when Fob ≤ Sy
is in compression.
Fb p [0.55 − 0.10 Fob / Sy] Fob (12)
when b / t ≤ 65 / 冪Sy (b / t ≤ 171 / 冪Sy) when Fob > Sy
Fb p 0.66Sy (8) Fb p [0.95 − 0.50 冪Sy / Fob] Sy ≤ 0.66 Sy (13)
when 65 / 冪Sy < b / t ≤ 76 / 冪Sy (171 / 冪Sy < b / t ≤ where

200 / 冪Sy) Fb p allowable bending stress at leg tip, ksi (MPa)
Fob p elastic lateral-torsional buckling stress, from NF-
Fb p 0.60Sy (9) II-3520 or NF-II-3530 as applicable, ksi (MPa)
when b / t > 76 / 冪Sy (b / t > 200 / 冪Sy) Sy p yield stress, ksi (MPa)
Fb p 0.60Q Sy (10)
NF-II-3520 BENDING ABOUT GEOMETRIC
where AXES
b p full width of angle leg in compression, in. (mm) NF-II-3521
Q p stress reduction factor per eqs. (5) through (7) (a) Angle bending members with lateral-torsion
with b as defined above restraint along the length may be designed on the basis of
117 --``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

geometric axis bending with stress limited by the provi- NF-II-3531 Equal Leg Angles
sions of NF-II-3511 and NF-II-3512.
(a) Major Axis Bending. The principal bending com-
(b) For equal leg angles if the lateral-torsional restraint
pression stress fbw shall be limited by Fb in NF-II-3513
is only at the point of maximum moment, the stress fb is
calculated on the basis of geometric axis bending limited where
by Fb in NF-II-3522.
28,250
NF-II-3522 Fob p Cb (15)
(l / t )
Equal leg angle members without lateral-torsional (SI Units)
restraint subjected to flexure applied about one of the geo-
metric axes may be designed considering only geometric 194 777
Fob p Cb (15)
axis bending provided (l / t )
(a) The calculated compressive stress fb , using the geo- and by b / t provisions in NF-II-3511.
metric axis section modulus, is increased by 25%. (b) Minor Axis Bending. The principal bending stress
(b) For the angle leg tips in compression, the allowable fbz shall be limited by Fb in NF-II-3511 when the leg tips
bending stress Fb is determined according to NF-II-3513 are in compression, and by NF-II-3512 when the leg tips
are in tension.
where
(U.S. Customary Units) NF-II-3532 Unequal Leg Angles
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
冤冪 1 + 0.78 (l t / b ) − 1冥
85,900 2 2 (a) Major Axis Bending. The principal bending com-
Fob p Cb (14)
(l / b )2 pression stress fbw shall be limited by Fb in NF-II-3513
(SI Units) where
冤冪 1 + 0.78 (l t / b ) − 1冥
592 2 2
Fob p 2
Cb (14)
(l / b )
冤冪 B 冥
143,100Iz 2
Fob p Cb w + 0.052 (l t / rz )2 + Bw (16)
and by b / t provisions in NF-II-3511. When the leg tips S w l2
are in tension, Fb is determined only by NF-II-3512. (SI Units)
Cb p 1.75 + 1.05(M1 / M2 ) + 0.3(M1 / M2 )2 ≤ 1.5, where
冤冪 B 冥
987 000Iz 2
M1 is the smaller and M2 the larger end moment Fob p Cb w + 0.052 (l t / rz )2 + Bw (16)
S w l2
in the unbraced segment of the beam; (M1 / M2)
is positive when the moments cause reverse curva- and by b / t provisions in NF-II-3511 for the compression
ture and negative when bent in single curvature. leg.
C b shall be taken as unity when the bending
冤冕冥
moment at any point within an unbraced length 1
is larger than at both ends of its length. Bw p z (w2 + z2 )dA − 2zo
Iw A
l p unbraced length, in. (mm)
p special section property for unequal leg angles,
positive for short leg in compression and negative
NF-II-3523 for long leg in compression, in. (mm) Table NF-
Unequal leg angle members without lateral-torsional II-3532-1 lists some values for standard angles.
restraint subjected to bending about one of the geometric If the long leg is in compression anywhere along
axes shall be designed using NF-II-3530. the unbraced length of the member, use the nega-
tive value of Bw .
Iw p major principal axis moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
Iz p minor principal axis moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
NF-II-3530 BENDING ABOUT PRINCIPAL AXES
rz p radius of gyration for minor principal axis, in.
Angles without lateral-torsional restraint shall be (mm)
designed considering principal axis bending except for Sw p section modulus to tip of leg in compression, in.3
cases covered by NF-II-3522. Bending about both of the (mm3)
principal axes shall be evaluated using the interaction equa- zo p coordinate along z axis of the shear center with
tions in NF-3322.1(e)(1). respect to centroid, in. (mm)
118
TABLE NF-II-3532-1 NF-II-3612

Bw VALUES FOR ANGLES
Equation (21) of NF-3322.1(e)(1) is to be evaluated at
Angle Size, in. (mm) Bw , in. [(10-3) m] the critical member support cross section and need not be
9 ⴛ 4 (225 ⴛ 100) 6.54 (166) based on the maximum moments along the member length.
8 ⴛ 6 (200 ⴛ 150) 3.31 (84)
8 ⴛ 4 (200 ⴛ 100) 5.48 (139)
7 ⴛ 4 (175 ⴛ 100) 4.37 (111) NF-II-3613
6 ⴛ 4 (150 ⴛ 100) 3.14 (80)
6 ⴛ 3.5 (150 ⴛ 89) 3.69 (94) For members constrained to bend about a geometric axis
5 ⴛ 3.5 (125 ⴛ 89) 2.40 (61) with compressive stress and allowable stress determined
5 ⴛ 3 (125 ⴛ 75) 2.99 (76) per NF-II-3521(a), the radius of gyration rb for Fe′ shall
4 ⴛ 3.5 (100 ⴛ 89) 0.87 (22) be taken as the geometric axis value.
4 ⴛ 3 (100 ⴛ 75) 1.65 (42)
3.5 ⴛ 3 (89 ⴛ 75) 0.87 (22)
3.5 ⴛ 2.5 (89 ⴛ 63) 1.62 (41) NF-II-3614
3 ⴛ 2.5 (75 ⴛ 63) 0.86 (22)
3 ⴛ 2 (75 ⴛ 50) 1.56 (40) For equal leg angles without lateral-torsional restraint
2.5 ⴛ 2 (64 ⴛ 50) 0.85 (22) along the length and with bending applied about one of
Equal legs 0.00 (0.00)
the geometric axes, the provisions of NF-II-3522 shall
apply for the calculated and allowable bending stresses. If
NF-II-3521(b) or NF-II-3522 is used for Fb, the radius of
gyration about the axis of bending rb for Fe′ shall be taken
(b) Minor Axis Bending. The principal bending stress as the geometric axis value of r divided by 1.35 in the
fbz shall be limited by Fb in NF-II-3511 when leg tips are absence of a more detailed analysis.
in compression and by NF-II-3512 when the leg tips are
in tension.
NF-II-3615
For members that do not meet the conditions of NF-
II-3613 or NF-II-3614, the evaluation shall be based on
NF-II-3600 COMBINED STRESSES
principal axis bending according to NF-II-3530, and the
NF-II-3610 AXIAL COMPRESSION AND subscripts x and y in NF-3322.1(e)(1) shall be interpreted
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
FLEXURE as the principal axes, w and z, in this Appendix when
evaluating the length without lateral-torsional restraint.
Members subjected to both axial compression and bend-
ing shall satisfy the requirements of NF-3322.1(e)(1).
NF-II-3620 AXIAL TENSION AND BENDING
NF-II-3611
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending
In evaluating eq. (20) or (22) of NF-3322.1(e)(1) the stresses due to transverse loading shall satisfy the require-
maximum compression bending stresses due to each ments of eq. (22) of NF-3322.1(e)(1). Bending stress evalu-
moment acting alone must be used even though they may ation shall be as directed by NF-II-3613, NF-II-3614, and
occur at different cross sections of the member. NF-II-3615 for compressive stresses.
119
MANDATORY APPENDIX NF-III

ENERGY ABSORBING SUPPORT MATERIAL
ARTICLE NF-III-1000 support parts resulting from all service loadings shall be
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS evaluated as follows:
兺 N + 兺 Nn
Energy absorbing material of linear-type pipe supports nti dj
≤1
designed to Subsection NF which is designed to dissipate ti dj
energy associated with dynamic piping movements by
where
yielding, shall be constructed for services in accordance
with Section III, Division 1, Subsection NF, as modified Ndj p allowable number of cycles read from the design
by this Appendix. fatigue curve, as defined below, corresponding to
the amplitude of the strain induced by the dynamic
load, j
Nti p allowable number of cycles read from the design
ARTICLE NF-III-2000 fatigue curve, as defined below, corresponding to
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS the amplitude of the strain induced by the dynamic
(a) When plate material is used, it shall not exceed 1 load, i
in. nominal thickness. ndj p expected number of cycles associated with
(b) Weld repairs of energy absorbing materials shall not dynamic load, j
be permitted. nti p expected number of cycles associated with the
(c) In lieu of NF-2311(a)(3), impact testing shall be in supported piping system in going from one service
accordance with NF-2300. For SA-516 material, impact temperature to another, i
testing shall be required when the nominal section thick- (b) Design Fatigue Curves. Design fatigue curves based
ness exceed 5/8 in. (16 mm) and the lowest service tempera- on testing of prototypical samples of energy absorbers shall
ture is less than the values listed below be developed and used in the fatigue design. Samples tested
Class Normalized As Rolled shall represent the material used for construction, shapes
used, and methods of fabrication. The fatigue design curves
Class 1, 2, and MC 30°F (−1°C) 70°F (20°C)
Class 3 0°F (−18°C) 50°F (10°C)
shall show a relationship between the amplitude of strain
(⑀) and the allowable number of cycles (N). The ordinate
(d) All other requirements of NF-2000 shall apply. shall show the value of strain, ⑀, and the abscissa shall
show the allowable number of cycles, N, calculated as
follows:
ARTICLE NF-III-3000 Nmean / 1.5 or (Nmean − ␴ ⴛ 2)
DESIGN
whichever is smaller, where
For the design of energy absorbing support material that
perform by sustaining strains beyond elastic limits, the Nmean p mean number of cycles to failure of specimen
following rules shall apply in lieu of those in NF-3140 and tested at strain value, ⑀
NF-3300. ␴ p maximum deviation
(a) Fatigue Design (c) Dead Weight Consideration. Loads induced by the
(1) Energy absorbing support material may be dead weight effect of a supported piping system should
designed by load rating. The load rating of these parts shall not exceed one-fifth of the elastic yield load capacity of
provide for a relationship between imposed strains and the the energy absorbing supports. The elastic yield load shall
allowable number of cycles. be based on the yield strength given in Appendix I (Section
(2) Cumulative fatigue effects associated with all III, Division 1, Appendices) for the material of the energy
strain cyles expected for the life of the energy absorbing absorbing parts.
120
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(d) Steady State Vibration Consideration. Operational ARTICLE NF-III-4000

steady state vibration effects on the energy absorbing sup- FABRICATION
port parts, if present, shall be maintained within the endur-
ance limit from the applicable fatigue design curves of
Appendix I (Section III, Division 1, Appendices). (a) Welding shall not be permitted for fabrication and
installation of energy absorbing support material.
(e) Piping Design Consideration. The inelastic charac-
teristics of energy absorbing support parts shall be (b) All other requirements of NF-4000 shall apply.
considered in satisfying all design and service loadings for
which the supported piping is evaluated.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
121
NONMANDATORY APPENDICES
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-A

STRUCTURAL BOLT PRELOADING
ARTICLE NF-A-1000 It should be noted that AISC (Ninth Edition) does not
INTRODUCTION recommend use of torque wrenches as the preferred method
of bolt tightening. Rather, it recommends turn-of-the-nut
NF-A-1100 SCOPE over the torque wrench method. This is true because of
This Appendix provides general guidance on structural the variations in tension that are expected due to the many
bolt preloading of steel to steel joints. AISC specifications variables that are present in tensioning by use of a torque
should be followed when using A490 or A325 bolts. For wrench. For “turn-of-the-nut” it provides a table for
other bolting materials, detailed specifications are not gen- required turns for various diameters and squareness condi-
erally available and the following discussion is to be used tions of the bolted parts.
in understanding the importance of proper tightening, and AISC also requires that torque wrenches are calibrated
to help select a reliable method to be employed where every day that they are used.
detailed specifications are not available. The following clarifies why such large variations are
expected from bolt tensioning by use of a torque wrench.
The major consideration in any fastening problem is to
NF-A-1200 DISCUSSION determine as accurately as possible the best kind of fastener
which, when properly tightened, will ensure engineering
The American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) reliability of the end product. Reliability of threaded fasten-
provides a rather detailed specification when using A490 ers that will be subjected to cyclic/vibratory loads is based
or A325 bolts. The AISC specification provides guidance largely on the torque-tension relationship in which tension
with regard to (preload as it is commonly called), not torque, is the most
(a) bolt and nut specification critical measurement.
(b) washers Preload induced in a fastener is best set within an opti-
(c) faying surface coatings mum range which is determined from maximum and mini-
(d) surface conditions mum values of the variable joint loading. Too little preload
(e) hole types and tolerances will allow stress fluctuations in the joint which lead to
(f) allowable strengths and working stresses fatigue failure. Too much preload may cause fracture or
(g) bearing force plastic elongation with resulting loss of clamping force.
(h) prying action Several methods are available for measuring preload.
(i) tensile fatigue These are listed below with cost and anticipated accuracy.
(j) definition of “slip critical” joints Preload Measuring Method Accuracy (%) Relative Cost
(k) allowable slip load Feel (operator’s judgment) ±35 1
(l) reuse of bolts Torque wrench ±25 11⁄2
It provides guidance for installation and tightening, Turn-of-the-nut ±15 3
including discussion of what is required for a tension cali- Load-indicating washers ±10 7
brator, joint assembly for bearing loading, joint assembly Fastener elongation ±3 to 5 15
Strain gages ±1 20
for joints requiring full pretensioning, turn-of-the-nut tight-
ening, and calibrated torque wrench tightening. (REF: Industrial Fastener Institute.)
122
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Improved accuracy incurs higher cost in assembly, e.g., FIG. NF-A-1311

the use of strain gages would be approximately 20 times
more expensive than merely relying upon the judgment
and feel of the operator.
Each method possesses certain advantages and disadvan-
tages with ultimate choice based on a compromise of appli-
cation requirements.
NF-A-1300 BOLT TIGHTENING (PRELOAD

METHODS)
NF-A-1310 TORQUE WRENCHES
The use of torque wrenches is the most popular method
of preload measurement because of simplicity. Because of
the many interrelated variables that directly or indirectly
affect friction, such as: surface texture, type of coating or
finish, amount of lubrication, speed of tightening, etc., it
is possible to experience as much as ±25% variation in
preload between similar fasteners receiving identical tor- p 0.15 for plated fasteners1
ques. Closer control of torque wrench calibration can Generally, the above K values are conservative, and the
reduce deviation to ±15%. actual preload induced by a given torque is slightly less
In all cases, hardened washers should be used beneath than calculated.
the bolt head or nut (whichever is rotated during tightening) A more exact value of K is expressed by the following
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
when tightening by torque wrench method. equation, provided there is no thread interference such as
by a locknut or wrench-tight thread fit:
07 NF-A-1311 Empirical Equations for Tension From
冢冣
RB RT UT sec ␤ + tan C
Bolt Torque K p UB + (2)
D D 1 − UT sec ␤ tan C
The following empirical equation is often used to pro-
where
vide an “estimate” of the torque required to induce a given
preload in a bolt: C p helix angle of thread
RB p effective radius of action of frictional forces on
T p KDW (1) bearing face, in. (mm) (see Fig. NF-A-1311)
where RT p effective radius of action of frictional forces on
thread surfaces, in. (mm)
D p nominal bolt size, in. (mm) UB p coefficient of friction at bearing face of nut or bolt
K p torque coefficient (not to be confused with coeffi- UT p coefficient of friction at thread contact surfaces
cient of friction) ␤ p thread half-angle (30 deg for 60 deg basic thread
T p torque, lb-in. (N-mm) form; sec ␤ p 1.15)
W p bolt tension, lb (N)
For threads used for fasteners, the denominator of the
The torque coefficient K is the critical parameter in the bracketed term is unity within ±1⁄2%, so
above formula and can be calculated by various methods,
all of which represent approximations at best. It is primarily RB R R
K p UB + UT T sec ␤ + T tan C p K1 + K2 (3)
influenced by the frictional conditions along the thread D D D
flank and at the bearing surfaces. Relative resiliency of the + K3
fastener and joint material also provide influence. For these The approximate values of K1, K2, and K3 can be calcu-
reasons, it is best to experimentally determine K for critical lated by inserting typical values such as RB /Dp 0.625;
applications using actual joint material and assembly tools. UB p UT p 0.15; RT /D p 0.45; sec ␤ p 1.15; tan
Arbitrary values for K are often assigned in noncritical C p 0.04.
applications as follows:
K p 0.20 for nonplated steel fasteners1 K p 0.094 + 0.078 + 0.018 p 0.190
1
In applications where additional lubricants such as greases, oils, and 100K
p 49.5% + 41% + 9.5% p 100%
waxes are applied to the fasteners, K may be assumed to be as low as 0.12. 0.190
123
So, it is observed that K1 , K2 , and K3 contribute roughly torqued bearing face of the fastener is in contact with
50%, 40%, and 10%, respectively, to the torque coeffi- relatively smooth, unplatted, nonlubricated steel surfaces.
cient K. (b) A more exact theoretical expression of K can be
Coefficient K1 represents the torque resulting from fric- obtained from eq. (3).
tion on the bearing face of the nut or bolt. This is about (c) There is considerable variation in the value of K
50% of the total torque. K1 varies with the coefficient of from bolt to bolt even when conditions are well controlled
bearing face friction (0.12 – 0.20) and also with the effective because of variation in coefficient of friction. Therefore,
radius of the bearing face, RB. The radius RB is approxi- where closer control of tension is required, the value of
mately the average radius of the bearing face if the contact K should be determined experimentally for the particular
pressure is uniform (NOTE: The exact theoretical values application. Even so, K will vary considerably because of
of RB for uniform contact pressure is variations in field conditions.
(d) There is little difference in K between coarse and
冢冣
2 Ro3 − Ri3
RB p fine threads — the value for coarse threads being only
3 Ro2 − Ri2
about 21⁄2% higher than that for fine threads, which is
where Ro and Ri are the outer and inner bearing radii, negligible. This may be surprising to some people who
respectively.). may think that the small helix angle of fine threads should
If the bearing face is not true and flat and the pressure produce tension with considerably less torque. Such is not
uniform, RB may vary from the inner radius of the bearing the case, however, because 90% of the torque effort is
face to the outer radius. consumed by friction regardless of the thread pitch. This
Coefficient K2 represents the torque resulting from fric- high frictional effect also helps prevent loosening of the
tion on the contact flanks of the threads. This represents fastener.
about 40% of the total torque. K2 varies with the coefficient (e) The value of K as estimated does not apply at or near
of thread friction (0.12 – 0.20) and also with the radius of the failure point of the bolt-nut combination, particularly if
action of friction on thread faces, RT. The radius RT is the imminent failure is by stripping of threads. In this
approximately the pitch radius of the screw thread if thread situation, there may be galling of contact surfaces with
contact pressure is uniform. If contact pressure is not uni- greatly increased K. Also, the thread angle, ␤, becomes
form, RT may vary from the inner to the outer radius of greatly distorted, further increasing K. These influences,
contact of threads. The radius RT also will differ between added to the normal variations of K, result in an indetermi-
coarse and fine threads, being larger for fine threads, nate value of K. From this, it is evident that the torque at
resulting in higher torque. K2 is also slightly variable with failure cannot be taken as any reliable measure of the
bolt tension because of increase in angle ␤ due to thread strength of the fastener.
bending under load. The increase in angle may be consider-
able at loads near thread failure by stripping.
Coefficient K3 represents the useful torque producing NF-A-1320 TURN-OF-THE-NUT
bolt tension. This is about 10% of the total applied torque.
K3 varies with RT (see K2 above) and with the helix angle Turn-of-the-nut tightening process encompasses a low
of the thread. The helix angle, C, varies with the bolt size, initial “threshold” torque to achieve “snug tight” condition
being somewhat larger for smaller bolt sizes. It also varies (achieved by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the
between coarse and fine threads, being slightly larger for force of a person using a spud wrench) followed by a
coarse threads. prescribed amount of nut turning to develop the required
preload. This technique has gained acceptance for installa-
tion of high strength structural bolts, and can be reliably
NF-A-1312 Summary of Tensioning by Torque
extrapolated to smaller fasteners as long as assumptions
From the preceding discussion, the following summary upon which the technique is based are considered. For
can be made: example, the ideal snug-tight condition will vary with each
(a) Equation (1), using K p 0.2, gives a reasonable application.
estimate of torque required to produce a given tension Nut rotation through a prescribed amount eliminates the
regardless of bolt size or thread pitch. This applies only influence of all friction variables relative to final accuracies.
to washer faced or double chamfered hex nuts (or bolts if Also, a one-half turn from snug-tight of a coarse thread
bolt is torqued) having a width across flats of about 1.5 nut on a bolt having a grip length (the clamping distance
times the nominal diameter; to threads free of interference between the bolt head and nut) less than 8 in. will induce
such as provided by a locknut or wrench-tight thread fit; preload equal to or slightly over the bolt’s rated proof load.
to steel bolts and nuts as normally produced and without For grip lengths greater than 8 in., two thirds of a turn
added plating or lubrication; and to applications where the beyond snug-tight is recommended.
124
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

NF-A-1330 LOAD-INDICATING WASHERS between resistance change and strain can be determined.
Application of strain gage technology requires highly
Load-indicating washers provide high reliability for ini-
qualified personnel, careful care in application of the gages,
tial indication of fastener tension. The load-indicating
and careful calibration of equipment. Other variables that
washer employs small raised areas on a ductile washer
can affect accurate strain gage readings are: the orientation
face that will deform under compression at the time of
(alignment) of the strain gage element; temperature effects.
tightening. A feeler gage is employed to measure the
If out of squareness in the bolt heads or surfaces exists,
amount of deformation to supply the correct fastener ten-
bolt bending will occur, and this will give an incorrect
sion. Although these devices are accurate within 10% of
indication of actual bolt tension. Strain gages installed 180
expected tension, they cannot be reused if the bolted joint
deg to each other on the bolt shank can be wired to effec-
is disassembled for any reason. In addition, if the preload
tively cancel out the effects of fastener bending.
relaxes over time, there is no way to check the bolt tension
short of installing new load-indicating washers.
Presence or lack of lubrication during installation does
not have an adverse effect on the ability of the load-indicat- NF-A-1350 FASTENER ELONGATION/
ing washer to measure the correct tension in the assembly. EXTENSION
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
In general this simple method of measuring tension can Tightening by fastener elongation is a precise assembly
be considered a reliable, fairly economical way to correctly technique which involves tightening to a predetermined
tension bolted assemblies. value of tensile strain. Greatest accuracy is achieved when
the prestrain value is obtained from load-extension curves
of the fastener being used. However, in most instances,
NF-A-1340 STRAIN GAGES
calculation of the desired extension is made from Hooke’s
Strain gages provide high accuracy in measuring bolt law. This gives an approximate solution subject to variation
tension, but are also, by far, the most expensive way of due to nonuniform cross sections.
accomplishing this task. Using this method one must accurately measure the axial
The strain gage is a small electrical device with a foil elongation of the bolt shank or stud. If both ends of the
or wire element that is mechanically bonded to the bolt fastener are accessible, a micrometer can be used to mea-
shank. When the bolt is tightened the strain gage experi- sure this fastener elongation.
ences the same elongation as the bolt shank. When the foil Tightening by extension is slow and expensive; conse-
or wire element is subjected to this strain, its cross sectional quently, its use is normally confined to special applications,
area changes slightly causing its electrical resistance to such as the assembly of very large-diameter bolts or studs
change. Using sensitive equipment, a direct relationship where torque wrenches or turn-of-the-nut are impractical.
125
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-B

DESIGN ALLOWABLE STRESSES FOR PLATE AND
SHELL AND LINEAR TYPE SUPPORTS
ARTICLE NF-B-1000 for lower limits, A and B, and they allow higher stress and
INTRODUCTION some possible permanent deformation for higher limits, C
and D.
NF-B-1100 OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Appendix is to provide background
on the allowable stresses and design stress intensities used NF-B-2100 RESPONSIBILITY FOR
for the design of supports given in NF-3000. ASSIGNING YIELD AND
ULTIMATE STRENGTH
VALUES
07 NF-B-1200 SCOPE
(a) The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Committee
Included in this Appendix is the background on the evaluates the available data and assigns strength values for
allowable stresses and design stress intensities, which are materials.
a function of material test data, for plate and shell and linear (b) Where suitable test data on a specific material are
type supports. Most of the information herein pertains to not available, the Committee may base strength values on
linear supports while information on allowable stresses the available data for similar materials or on an evaluation
and design stress intensities for plate and shell supports is of known experience with the material.
referenced in Appendix III, Article III-2000 (Section III,
Division 1, Appendices) for Class 1 of this Section. Guid-
ance is also given for special situations which arise in
support design.
NF-B-2200 TENSION MEMBER
ALLOWABLE STRESS
A tension member can fail either by excessive yielding
ARTICLE NF-B-2000 of its gross area or by fracture of the net area at a load
LINEAR SUPPORTS — METHOD FOR smaller than that required to yield the gross area. To prevent
ESTABLISHING ALLOWABLE failure of a tension member (other than a pin-connected
or threaded member), NF-3322.1(a) imposes a factor of
STRESSES
safety of 1.67 against yield of the entire member and 2
Allowable stresses are based on mechanical properties against fracture of its weakest effective net area, which is
of material, including yield and ultimate strength values, computed in NF-3322.8 and accounts for shear lag at the
as well as the particular loads applied to the linear member, connection. For pin-connected and threaded members, the
i.e., tension, bending, compression, shear, or combinations factors of safety are greater.
of these loads. The pertinent mechanical properties of mate-
rials, the material yield and ultimate strength, allowed for
linear supports have been established and these are pre-
NF-B-2300 BEAM BENDING ALLOWABLE
sented in Section II, Part D of this division. The various
STRESS
stress factors given in NF-3300 for linear elastic analysis
are applied in most cases to the yield or ultimate strength Classical beam flexure theory is used to establish bend-
values at temperature. Stress multipliers referred to as stress ing stresses in linear support members. Allowable bending
limit factors applicable to the various Service Limits are stresses are established on the basis of this classical theory,
given in Tables NF-3523(b)-1 and NF-3623(b)-1 for linear utilizing the following assumptions:
supports. In general, these factors maintain elastic response (a) Stresses are elastic.
126
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(b) Deflections are small. buckling is prevented by the allowable bending stresses
(c) Plane sections, normal to the member axis, remain [NF-3322.1(d)].
plane after loading.
For a straight member in flexure, the bending stress is
tensile on one side of the neutral axis and compressive on NF-B-2500 BEAM-COLUMN ALLOWABLE
the other side. The allowable values given in NF-3322.1(d) STRESS
consider whether the stress is tensile or compressive, since Beam-columns are those linear support members which
a compressive stress (limited to two-thirds of the critical are subjected to combined flexure and axial compression.
buckling value) subjects a beam element to possible buck- The interaction formulas of NF-3322.1(e)(1) account for
ling. Hence, the formulas for allowable stresses consider these combined stresses and the resulting amplification of
lateral-torsional buckling, by accounting for the unsup- the bending stress induced by the applied axial load. The
ported length of the compression flange, and they also primary or secondary bending moment is one of the impor-
consider local buckling, by providing maximum values of tant parameters which is used in the interaction formulas.
width-thickness ratios of unstiffened elements of compres- When the moment results in secondary stress, the limit of
sion flanges. the plastic hinge criterion is increased by 50%. However,
to ensure conservatism, the stability limits are not increased
when the moment is shown to result in secondary stress.
NF-B-2400 COMPRESSION MEMBER Limit analysis design methods in NF-3340 provide similar
requirements for linear members loaded in combined axial
ALLOWABLE STRESS
compression and bending.
Allowable stresses for linear support members which
are loaded in axial compression are based on classical
theory of centrally loaded columns. While most columns NF-B-2600 BOLTING ALLOWABLE
have some applied primary or secondary bending moment, STRESS
and hence are beam-columns as described in NF-B-2500,
Bolted connections are subjected to tensile and shear
a column with a load eccentricity up to 1/1000 of its length
loads. Shear connections are designed to be one of the
is considered to be centrally loaded.
two types
Compression members have two failure modes: elastic
(a) bearing connections
buckling for long members; and inelastic buckling for short
(b) friction connections
and intermediate members. These two modes are reflected
Since bearing connections can be subjected to simultane-
in the allowable stress formulas in NF-3322.1(c) which
ous shear and tension, an interaction formula is given in
were originally developed for rolled carbon-steel structural
NF-3324.6 to account for the combined stresses in the bolts.
shapes. End conditions of the column, i.e., whether it is
Friction connections can also be subjected to simultaneous
free, pinned, or fixed, play an important role in the member
shear and tension. However, the bolts will not be subjected
allowable stress. These end conditions determine the value
to shear if the design had provided an adequate clamping
of K, the effective length factor, which is a parameter used
force, Ti.
in the allowable stress formulas. The effective length factor,
The Code does not require specific values of bolt preload
K, is shown for different end conditions in Fig. NF-B-
force for either bearing-type or friction-type connections.
2400-1. The nomograph in Fig. NF-B-2400-2 gives effec-
The design must consider such factors as applied tensile
tive length factors for semi-rigid end conditions in which
load, susceptibility of the bolt material to stress corrosion
beams or girders which frame into the ends of columns
cracking (when preload is excessive) and possible opening
provide partial moment restraint. The nominal safety fac-
of joints under high dynamic loads (when preload is not
tors for Design and Service Level A limits range from 1.67
great enough). These factors as well as the applied shear
for short columns, which exhibit post-buckling strength,
in a friction connection will affect the selection of bolt
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
to 1.92 for long columns, which buckle elastically and

preload and the method of applying that load, i.e., by torque
often without warning. A further limitation on compression
or tensioner.
member stress is given by the requirement that these
stresses be limited to two-thirds of the member capacity
regardless of the service limit.
ARTICLE NF-B-3000
Flexural support members also developed compressive
PLATE AND SHELL SUPPORTS —
stresses in flanges. The two failure modes associated with
these stresses are: local buckling; and lateral torsional buck- ALLOWABLE STRESSES
ling. Local buckling is prevented by limiting the flange Allowable stresses for plate and shell type supports are
width/thickness ratios [NF-3322.2(d)] and lateral-torsional established in accordance with NF-3220 (Class 1),
127
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
FIG. NF-B-2400-1 EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR FOR VARIOUS
END CONDITIONS
128
FIG. NF-B-2400-2 ALIGNMENT CHART FOR TABLE NF-B-4000

EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS IN CONTINUOUS FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR A MATERIAL WITH A LOW
FRAMES VALUE OF Su /Sy RATIO
Service Level Tension Bending Compression
A 2.00 1.78 1.67

B 1.50 1.34 1.50
C 1.43 1.43 1.50
D 1.43 1.43 1.50
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The ratio of tensile to yield strength (Su / Sy) is 1.07 for the factors
of safety shown. This is a lower bound for linear support materials
allowed by the Code.
(b) Materials with higher Su / Sy ratios will have higher factors of safety.
NF-3250 (Class 2 and MC), and NF-3260 (Class 3), respec-

tively. For Class 1 construction allowable stresses are a
function of the material design stress intensity (Sm) and
for Class 2, 3, and MC construction the allowable stresses
are a function of the material allowable (S). The procedures
for establishing allowable stresses (S) and design stress
intensities (Sm) are given in Appendices 1 and 2 of Section
II, Part D. Stress multipliers, i.e., stress limit factors which
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
are applicable to various levels of service limits are given
in Tables NF-3522(b)-1, NF-3552(b)-1, and NF-3652(b)-
1. In general, these factors maintain elastic response for
lower limits, A and B, and they allow higher stresses and
some possible permanent deformation for higher limits, C
and D.
ARTICLE NF-B-4000
MATERIALS WITH LOW RATIOS OF
TENSILE TO YIELD STRENGTH
Allowable stresses for linear support members were orig-
inally developed for materials which exhibit a considerable
amount of strain hardening. The ratio of tensile to yield
strength for these materials (Su/Sy) is as high as 1.61 for
SA-36. However, materials with much lower values of
Su/Sy ratio are now included in the Code, and these are
covered by the NF design rules and allowable stresses in
NF-3000. The lower bound of Su/Sy is 1.07. For certain
allowable stresses the factor of safety against failure is
lower for materials with low Su/Sy ratios than it is for high
strain hardening materials. The allowable tensile stress (see
NF-B-2200) takes into account materials with low strain
hardening by imposing a nominal factor of safety of 2 on
tensile strength on effective net area. Table NF-B-4000
shows that minimum factor of safety is 1.34 for a material
with the lower bound Su/Sy ratio of 1.07. The minimum
factor of safety for a high strain hardening material is
about 1.43.
Designers should use caution when materials with low
Su/Sy ratios are utilized in support design. The material
129
ductility and other material qualities, including Su/Sy ratios, To account for the different characteristics with austen-
should be considered so that the minimum factors of safety itic stainless steel exhibits when it is subjected to compres-
will not be less than those shown in Table NF-B-4000. sive stress, NF-3322.1 provides special rules for stainless
steel columns. These alternate rules provide a minimum
factor-of-safety of 2.15 for Design and Level A Service
ARTICLE NF-B-5000 Limits. The allowable compressive stress is a bilinear func-
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION tion of slenderness ratio, K l/r, rather than a parabolic
function which is used for other materials.
NF-B-5100 COPPER-BASED ALLOYS
Copper-based alloys are not intended for use as main
structural members. However, the Code does provide for
their use in the load path of a support. Use of copper-
NF-B-5300 NONDUCTILE BEHAVIOR AND
based alloys is restricted by NF-2122(b) to bearing-type STRESS CORROSION
applications. This restriction was incorporated because CRACKING
experience with these materials as main members in sup- High strength materials are susceptible to brittleness
ports is lacking and behavior of elements fabricated of and stress corrosion cracking. Conditions which exacerbate
these materials has not been confirmed with test data. these problems include
(a) installation in a corrosive environment such as
damp air
NF-B-5200 STAINLESS STEEL (b) long-term high stress including bolt preload and
Allowable stresses for stainless steel are based on the dead loads
same consideration given to other Code materials. These (c) residual stress caused by fabrication
are discussed in NF-B-1000 and NF-B-2000. However, (d) certain material manufacturing processes which
stainless steel in compression requires special consider- enhance hardness
ation because the compression stress-strain curve is nonlin- The design specification can reduce the susceptibility of
ear rather than bilinear as it is for carbon steels. For linear the support material to brittle fracture by requiring impact
support members this difference in stress-strain relation- testing per NF-2300. Also, designers should exercise cau-
ships results in overestimating the column capacity of tion when using high strength materials when supports are
members fabricated from austenitic stainless steel. subjected to impact loads.
130
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-C

DESIGN BASIS FOR LINEAR-TYPE SUPPORTS
ARTICLE NF-C-1000 of literature on the specific properties of concern and to

INTRODUCTION exercise good engineering judgement.
NF-C-1100 OBJECTIVE
The objective of this Appendix is to provide guidance ARTICLE NF-C-3000
for the acceptable methods of linear design of supports AISC PARAGRAPH SELECTIONS
that meet the design requirements of Appendix XIII Winter
73 edition, Appendix XVII of 1974 through 1980 editions, The Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erec-
and NF-3300 beginning with the Winter 1982 addenda. tion of Structural Steel for Buildings of the American Insti-
tute of Steel Construction was used as a source of design
practice. The paragraphs selected for inclusion cover allow-
able stress, combined stresses, stability and slenderness
NF-C-1200 SCOPE ratios, width-thickness, plate girders and rolled beams, sim-
ple and continuous spans, gross and net areas, connections,
The data included in this Appendix is intended to provide bolts, welds, built-up members, expansion, column bases,
a reference for a uniform design practice in the design of anchor bolts, and slender compression elements.
linear-type supports.
ARTICLE NF-C-4000
ARTICLE NF-C-2000 CROSS-REFERENCE TO AISC
MATERIAL AVAILABILITY AND The paragraph number of the cross-reference is given
REQUIREMENTS DIFFERENCES to correlate the 1998 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
The grades of structural steel contemplated for use Code Subsection NF to the Specification for the Design,
extend to a yield strength of 100,000 psi. It is not possible Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings
to incorporate all factors that might merit consideration in contained in the Ninth Edition of the Manual of American
the selection and specification of materials for a particular Institute of Steel Construction (ASD) June 1, 1989 (see
application. In these cases, users are advised to make use Table NF-C-4000).
131 --``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

TABLE NF-C-4000
DESIGN BASIS FOR LINEAR-TYPE SUPPORTS
NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph
3321.1(a) A5.1 3322.2(b)(1) C2.1 3322.3(b) B10

3321.2 K4 3322.2(b)(2) C2.2 3322.3(c) F6
3322.1(a)(1) D1 3322.2(c)(1) B7 3322.4(a)(1) E4
3322.1(a)(2) D3.1 3322.2(c)(2) B7 3322.4(a)(2) E4
3322.1(b)(1) F4 3322.2(d)(1)(a) B5.1 3322.4(a)(3) E4
3322.1(b)(2) J4 3322.2(d)(1)(b) B5.1 3322.4(a)(3)(a) E4
3322.1(c)(1)(a) E2 3322.2(d)(1)(b)(1) B5.1 3322.4(a)(3)(b) E4
3322.1(c)(1)(b) E2 3322.2(d)(1)(b)(2) B5.1 3322.4(b) E4
3322.1(d)(1)(a) F1.1 3322.2(d)(1)(b)(3) B5.1 3322.4(c) E4
3322.1(d)(1)(a)(1) B5.1 3322.2(d)(2)(a) B5.1 3322.4(d) E4
3322.1(d)(1)(a)(2) B5.1 3322.2(d)(2)(a)(1) B5.1 3322.4(e) E4
3322.1(d)(1)(a)(3) B5.1 3322.2(d)(2)(a)(2) B5.1 3322.4(e)(1) E4
3322.1(d)(1)(a)(4) B5.1 3322.2(d)(2)(a)(3) B5.1 3322.4(e)(2) E4
3322.1(d)(1)(a)(5) F1.1 3322.2(d)(2)(a)(4) B5.1 3322.4(e)(3) E4
3322.1(d)(1)(a)(6) F3.1 3322.2(d)(2)(b) B5.1 3322.4(e)(4) E4
3322.1(d)(1)(a)(7) B5.1 3322.2(d)(2)(b)(1) B5.1 3322.5(a) D2
3322.1(d)(1)(b) F1.1 3322.2(d)(2)(b)(2) B5.1 3322.5(a)(1) D2
3322.1(d)(2) B5.1, F1.2 3322.2(d)(2)(b)(3) B5.1 3322.5(a)(2) D2
3322.1(d)(3) F2, F3.1 3322.2(d)(2)(c) B5.1, 3322.5(b) D2
3322.1(d)(4) F3.2 Appendix B5 3322.6(a) G1
3322.1(d)(5)(a) F1.3 3322.2(e) Appendix B5 3322.6(a)(1) G5
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3322.1(d)(5)(b) F1.3 3322.2(e)(1) Appendix B5 3322.6(a)(2)(a) K1.3
3322.1(d)(5)(c) F1.3 3322.2(e)(2) Appendix B5 3322.6(a)(2)(b) K1.4, K1.5
3322.1(d)(6) F2.2 3322.2(e)(2)(a) Appendix B5 3322.6(b)(1) B5.1
3322.1(e)(1) H1 3322.2(e)(2)(b) Appendix B5 3322.6(b)(2) B10
3322.1(e)(1)(a) H1 3322.2(e)(2)(c) Appendix B5 3322.6(b)(3) B10
3322.1(e)(1)(b) H1 3322.2(e)(2)(d) Appendix B5 3322.6(c)(1) B10
3322.1(e)(1)(c) H1 3322.2(e)(3) Appendix B5 3322.6(c)(2) B10
3322.1(e)(1)(c)(1) H1 3322.2(e)(3)(a) Appendix B5 3322.6(c)(2)(a) B10
3322.1(e)(1)(c)(2) H1 3322.2(e)(3)(a)(1) Appendix B5 3322.6(c)(2)(b) B10
3322.1(e)(2) H2 3322.2(e)(3)(a)(2) Appendix B5 3322.6(c)(2)(c) B10
3322.1(f)(1) J8 3322.2(e)(3)(b) Appendix B5 3322.6(d) G2
3322.1(f)(2) J8 3322.2(e)(3)(c) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(1) K1.8
3322.1(f)(3) J3.7 3322.2(e)(4) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(2) F4, G3
3322.1(f)(4) J9 3322.2(e)(4)(a) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(3)(a) F5
3322.1(f)(4)(a) J9 3322.2(e)(4)(b) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(3)(b) F5
3322.1(f)(4)(b) J9 3322.2(e)(5) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(3)(c) G4
3322.1(g) Specification for 3322.2(e)(5)(a) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(a) G4
ASD of Single 3322.2(e)(5)(b) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(b) G4
Angle Members 3322.2(e)(5)(c) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(c) G4
3322.2(a)(1) B4 3322.2(e)(6) Appendix B5 3322.6(e)(4)(d) G4
3322.2(a)(2) E1 3322.3(a) B10 3322.6(e)(4)(e) G4
132
TABLE NF-C-4000
DESIGN BASIS FOR LINEAR-TYPE SUPPORTS (CONT’D)
NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph NF Paragraph AISC Paragraph
3322.6(e)(4)(f) G4 3324.3(b)(2) J6 3324.6(a)(5) J3.7

3322.6(f) J7 3324.4(a) J2.5 3324.6(b)(1) J3.9
3322.6(g) B6 3324.4(b) J1.10 3324.6(b)(1)(a) J3.9, J3.7
3322.7(a)(1) B8 3324.5(b) J2.4 3324.6(b)(1)(b) J3.9
3322.7(a)(2) B8 3324.5(b)(1) J2.4 3324.6(c) J3.10
3322.7(a)(3) L2 3324.5(b)(2) J2.4 3324.6(d) J3.8
3322.8(a) B1, B2 3324.5(b)(2)(a) J2.4 3324.6(e) J3.3
3322.8(c) B2 3324.5(b)(2)(b) J2.4 3324.6(f) J3.11
3322.8(c)(1) B2 3324.5(b)(3) J2.4 3324.6(g) J10
3322.8(c)(1)(a) B2 3324.5(d)(1) J2.2.b 3324.7 J9
3322.8(c)(1)(b) B2 3324.5(d)(2) J2.2.b 3331.1 K4, Appendix K
3322.8(c)(1)(c) B2 3324.5(d)(2)(a) J2.2.b 3331.2 Appendix K4
3322.8(c)(1)(d) B3 3324.5(d)(2)(b) J2.2.b 3332.1 K4.1
3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1) B3 3324.5(d)(3)(a) J2.2.a 3332.2 K4.1
3322.8(c)(1)(d)(2) B3 3324.5(d)(3)(b) J2.2.b 3332.3 K4.1
3322.8(c)(1)(d)(3) B3 3324.5(d)(3)(c) J2.2.b 3332.4 K4.2
3322.8(c)(1)(e) B3 3324.5(d)(4) J2.2.a 3332.5 K4.3
3322.8(c)(2) B2 3324.5(d)(5) J2.2.a 3332.5(a) K4.3
3322.8(c)(3) B1 3324.5(d)(6) J2.2.a 3332.5(b) K4.3
3322.8(c)(4)(a) D3.3 3324.5(d)(7) J2.2.b 3341.1(a) N1
3322.8(c)(4)(b) D3.1, D3.2 3324.5(d)(8) J2.2.b 3341.1(b) N1
3322.8(c)(4)(c) D3.2 3324.5(d)(9) J2.2.b 3341.1(c) N1
3322.8(c)(4)(d) D3.2 3324.5(e)(1) J2.3.b 3342.1(a) N5
3322.8(c)(4)(e) D3.3 3324.5(e)(2) J2.3.b 3342.1(b) N4
3323.1 A3.2 3324.5(e)(3) J2.3.b 3342.1(c) N7
3324.1(a) E4 3324.5(e)(4) J2.3.b 3342.1(d) N6
3324.1(b) J5.1 3324.5(e)(5) J2.3.b 3342.1(e)(1) N7
3324.1(c) J1.9 3324.5(e)(6) J2.3.b 3342.1(e)(2) N7
3324.2(a)(1) J1.2 3324.5(e)(7) J2.3.a 3342.2(b)(1) N4
3324.2(a)(2) J1.2 3324.5(f) J2.1.a 3342.2(b)(2) N4
3324.2(b)(1) J1.3 3324.5(f)(1) J2.1.a 3342.2(b)(3) N4
3324.2(b)(2) K1.8 3324.5(f)(2) J2.1.a 3342.2(b)(4) N4
3324.2(b)(3) K1.6, K1.2 3324.5(f)(3)(a) J2.1.a 3342.2(b)(5) N4
3324.2(b)(4)(a) K1.8 3324.5(f)(3)(b) J2.1.a 3342.2(c) N3
3324.2(b)(4)(b) K1.8 3324.5(f)(3)(c) J2.1.a 3342.2(c)(1) N3
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3324.2(b)(4)(c) K1.8 3324.5(f)(3)(f) J2.1.a 3342.2(c)(2) N3
3324.2(b)(4)(d) K1.8 3324.5(f)(3)(g) J2.1.a 3342.2(d)(1) N9
3324.2(b)(5) E6 3324.6(a) J3.4 3342.2(d)(2) N9
3324.2(c) J1.5 3324.6(a)(1) J3.4 3342.2(d)(3) N9
3324.2(d)(1) J1.4 3324.6(a)(2)(a)(1) J3.4 3342.2(e)(1) N8
3324.2(d)(2) J1.4 3324.6(a)(2)(a)(2) J3.4 3342.2(e)(2) N8
3324.2(d)(3) J1.4 3324.6(a)(3)(a) J3.5 3342.2(e)(3) N8
3324.3(a) J2.2.b 3324.6(a)(3)(b) J3.6 3342.2(e)(4) N8
3324.3(b)(1) J6 3324.6(a)(4) J3.6 3342.2(e)(5) N8
133
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX NF-D

TOLERANCES
ARTICLE NF-D-1000 hot wound springs, and cold wound springs shall be in
INTRODUCTION accordance with recognized standards or specifications for
this raw material.
NF-D-1100 OBJECTIVE (b) Tolerances for castings, forgings, and extrusions
It is recognized that design of supports is based on the shall be in accordance with the individual manufacturer’s
use of nominal dimensions. This is not different from the standard.
design of piping or equipment which also is based on (c) Cut to length — linear
nominal dimensions. Good design practice dictates that the (1) Hanger rods ± 1⁄2 in. (13 mm).
designer consider the degree of deviation from nominal (2) Structural shapes, pipe, and tubing for critical 07
design which can be tolerated when supports are manufac- assembly make-up dimensions ± 1⁄8 in. (3 mm). Squareness
tured as well as when they are installed. It is the intent of of cut 1 deg, not to exceed 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) offset.
this Appendix to provide guidance to the designer as to (3) Plates and bars for critical dimensions (as defined
the need for establishing such tolerances and dimensional by the designer) ± 1⁄8 (3 mm). Squareness of cut 1 deg, not
inspection requirements. to exceed 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) offset.
(4) Tolerances for noncritical dimensions shall be to
the individual manufacturer’s standard.
(d) Clamps for pipe and tubing, formed and fabricated,
NF-D-1200 SCOPE are shown in Table NF-D-1320-1.
Tolerances referred to in this Appendix apply only to (e) Angularity — all forming operations ± 4 deg.
such values that may affect Code compliance of a support (f) Punched holes
and are not already addressed in the body of the Code. (1) Location — center to edge, or center to center
Any other dimensions and tolerances associated with a ±1⁄8 in. (3 mm).
support are not addressed. (2) Diameter — plus 0.2 times metal thickness or
minus 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm).
(g) Drilled holes — as specified on manufacturer’s
drawings.
NF-D-1300 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (h) Machined parts — as specified on manufacturer’s
NF-D-1310 Material drawings.
Material supplied to an SA, SB, SFA Specification, or NF-D-1330 Installation Tolerances

Table NF-3132-1, Dimensional Standards, need not have
(a) Installation tolerances of supports need to be estab-
material dimensional tolerances specified by the support
lished. There are two categories of installation tolerances
designer. Material provided to those specifications and
associated with a support. The first is a local installation
standards have their own tolerances and the use of nominal
tolerance affecting only the load capacity of the support
dimension design is adequate. However, tolerance(s) on
itself. The second is a global installation tolerance which
any manufacturing operation(s) affecting the support load
may affect the conclusions of the component or piping
capacity needs to be considered.
qualification.
(b) Table NF-D-1330-1 provides acceptable local instal-
lation tolerances for supports. When support installation
NF-D-1320 Fabrication Tolerances
meets these tolerances, any change in the established sup-
The recommended fabrication tolerances are listed in port load capacity is considered minor to the point that
(a) through (h). existing load capacity calculations are adequate. Global
(a) Tolerances for raw material such as strip, sheet, bar, installation tolerances should be addressed in the piping
plate, pipe, tubing, structural and bar size shapes, bolting, or component Design Specification or Design Report.
134
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE NF-D-1320-1
CLAMP TOLERANCES
Pipe Centerline
Clamp, I.D. Diameter to Load Bolt Hole
1 1
Up to 2 in. (50 mm) ± ⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) ± ⁄8 in. (3 mm)
1 1
Over 2 in. to 4 in. (50 to 100 mm) ± ⁄8 in. (3 mm) ± ⁄8 in. (3 mm)
3 1
1 3
3 1
1 1
Over 30 in. (760 mm) ± ⁄2 in. (13 mm) ± ⁄2 in. (13 mm)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Clamp I.D. equals pipe or tubing O.D. plus suitable clearance as established by the clamp manufacturer.
(b) Clamp I.D. measured at one half of the clamp width.
135
TABLE NF-D-1330-1
LOCAL INSTALLATION TOLERANCES FOR SUPPORTS
Item Total Tolerance Configuration
I. Tolerances for General Measurement/Installation
A) Deviations in the location of the centerline of any attachment to ±1⁄4 in. (6 mm) C
the flange centerline of building steel member(s) or support steel 1/ in.
4
member(s); if the support drawing specifies an offset, the attach- (6 mm)
ment may be relocated to any distance towards the centerline of
the member to facilitate installation.
B) Deviation of back-to-back distance for channels with rod type sup- ±1⁄4 in. (6 mm)
port.
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
1/ in.
4
( 6 mm)
C) Deviation in the centerline angular orientation of support steel mem- ±2 deg

bers in the horizontal or vertical planes.
D) Deviation in the centerline location of attachments between flanges ±1⁄4 in. (6 mm)
of building steel members.
1/ in. 1/ in.
4 4
(6 mm) (6 mm)
Between Between
C
136
TABLE NF-D-1330-1
LOCAL INSTALLATION TOLERANCES FOR SUPPORTS (CONT’D)
II. Tolerances for Attachment Installation
A) Deviations in the location of attachments to support steel member ±6 in. (150 mm)
with two ends attached to the building structure (ends may be
pinned or fixed).
6 in.
(150 mm)
6 in.
(150 mm)
B) Deviations in the centerline location of attachments along building ±6 in. (150 mm)
steel member length.
6 in. 6 in.
(150 mm) (150 mm)
Along Along
C) Deviation in conical angularity of snubber or strut attachments to ±5 deg

support steel member or building steel member.
*± 1 deg need not be justified
± 5 deg is more reasonable and should be considered in the
designer’s calculations to allow ± 5 deg in practice.
** Subject to limitations defined by hardware manufacturer.
D) Deviation in angularity of rod type attachments to back-to-back ±5 deg
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
channels.
* ± 2 deg need not be justified
± 5 deg is more reasonable and should be considered in the
designer’s calculations to allow ± 5 deg in practice.
137
TABLE NF-D-1330-1
III. Tolerances for Support Steel Member Installation
A) Deviation in the length of steel member with two ends attached to +3 in. (75 mm)
the building structure (ends may be pinned or fixed). −6 in. (150 mm)
6 in.
(150 mm) 3 in.
(75 mm)
B) Deviation of attachment centerline for a single steel cantilever mem- +3 in. (75 mm)
No limit
ber attached to the building structure.
Note: A cantilever with a kneebrace connection has the same instal-

lation tolerances as a single cantilever. See items D) and E) for
(75 mm)
kneebrace tolerances.
3 in.
C
Attachment
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C) Deviation of connection centerline for double (or more) cantilevers. +1⁄4 in. (6 mm) C
No limit
See figure. Attachment
Note: Any cantilever member (single, both members of a double,
(75 mm)
3 in.
etc.) can be shortened any distance required to complete installa- 1/ in.
4 No limit
tion. (6 mm)
D) Deviation in kneebrace angle with respect to cantilever. +5 deg, −3 deg
( + 5 deg
- 3 deg )
E) Deviation in brace work point with respect to cantilever. ±1 in. (25 mm)
Work
point
1 in. 1 in.
(25 mm) (25 mm)
138
TABLE NF-D-1330-1
IV. Tolerances for Concrete Expansion Anchor (CEA)/Plate Installation
A) Deviation in conical angularity of CEA. ±21⁄2 deg
21/2 deg
B) Deviation of centerline of attachment with respect to specified ±1⁄2 in. (±13 mm) 1/ in.
2
attachment point. C (13 mm)
C
C
1/ in.
2
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(13 mm)
C) Deviation of CEA location with respect to design location.* ±1⁄4 in. (6 mm)
* Minimum edge distance must be maintained.
1/ in.
4 S
(6 mm)
S
1/ in.
4
(6 mm)
V. Tolerances for Embedment Plate Attachment Installation

Deviation in attachment centerline with respect to embedment plate
design location.
A) Individual embedment plate. ±1⁄4 in. (6 mm)

[Note (1)]
B) Strip embedment plate: ±1⁄4 in. (6 mm)

1) perpendicular to longitudinal axis [Note (1)]
2) along longitudinal axis ±6 in. (150 mm)
6 in. 6 in.
(150 mm) (150 mm)
NOTE:
(1) The designer shall determine the appropriate distances to be maintained between centerline or edge of attachments and edge of embedment plates.
139
07 TABLE NF-D-1330-1
Total
Item Tolerance Configuration
VI. Tolerances for Standard Support Setting
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A) Deviation in variable spring load settings. ±10% of specified loads ...
1
B) Deviation in constant spring settings. ⁄4 in. (6 mm) of specified position ...
1
C) Deviation in cold setting of snubber. ⁄4 in. (6 mm) of specified setting ...
VII. Miscellaneous Tolerances
A) Deviation in gap between pipe and supporting steel Gap (G) Size
member (in nonsupport direction). ±1⁄8 in. (3 mm) G < 1⁄8 in. (<3 mm)
+1⁄2 in. (+13 mm), −0 1
⁄8 in. (3 mm) < G < 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
+1⁄2 in. (13 mm), −1⁄8 in. (3 mm) G > 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
B) Deviation in dimensions of piping support lugs ± applicable measurement tolerance. ...
C) Deviation in weld size. specified size minimum, no max.
Deviation in weld length.
For welds <3 in. (<75 mm) long −1⁄8 in. (3 mm), no max.
For welds ≥3 in. (≥75 mm) long −1⁄4 in. (6 mm), no max.
140
--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---


AWS Welding Inspection Handbook

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

AWS Welding Inspection Handbook

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

--``,`,,,,`,`,`,`,,````,`,,,`,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright ASME International

Copyright ASME International

ASME collective membership mark

“ASME” is the trademark of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934

Adopted by the Council of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914.

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Copyright ASME International

Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2

Article NF-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Article NF-2000 Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Copyright ASME International

Article NF-3000 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Article NF-4000 Fabrication and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

NF-4330 General Requirements for Welding Procedure Qualification Tests. . . . . . . . . . . 93

Article NF-5000 Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Article NF-8000 Certificates of Accreditation and Certification Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

NF-I (In Preparation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

NF-II Design of Single Angle Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

NF-III Energy Absorbing Support Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

NF-A Structural Bolt Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

NF-C Design Basis for Linear-Type Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

NF-D Tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Copyright ASME International

Copyright ASME International

MAIN COMMITTEE HONORS AND AWARDS COMMITTEE

G. G. Karcher, Chair U. R. Miller J. R. MacKay, Chair W. L. Haag, Jr.

D. A. Douin — Illinois (Chair) D. C. Cook — California

Copyright ASME International

R. D. Mile — Ontario, Canada R. S. Pucek — Wisconsin

T. Joseph D. R. Frikken, Corresponding R. E. McLaughlin, Chair T. C. McGough

SUBCOMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (SC I) T. E. Hansen, Chair F. Massi

Subgroup on International Material Specifications (SC II)

D. W. Rahoi, Chair A. G. Kireta, Jr. G. M. Foster B. B. Scott

R. J. Masterson, Chair I. Saito Working Group on Valves (SG-D) (SC III)

P. A. Molvie, Chair K. M. McTague

S. V. Voorhees, Chair K. M. McTague

R. W. Barnes, Chair M. F. Hessheimer Subgroup on Cast Iron Boilers (SC IV)

P. A. Larkin, Chair W. D. Lemos

R. F. Reedy, Chair R. P. Deubler Subgroup on Water Heaters (SC IV)

T. C. Inman, Chair J. Gutierrez S. J. Akrin Member

Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (SC V)

J. Cameron, Chair W. M. Lundy

S. Malone, Chair M. R. Minick Subgroup on Procedure Qualification (SC IX)

R. E. Nickell, Chair J. E. Didlake, Jr.

Subgroup on Brazing (SC IX) SUBCOMMITTEE ON

R. W. Swayne, Chair O. F. Hedden D. A. Scarth, Chair K. Hasegawa

Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SC XI)

W. H. Bamford, Jr., Chair K. Koyama J. C. Spanner, Jr., Chair D. O. Henry

D. N. Hopkins Y.-S. Chang, Delegate M. E. Gothard

Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface,

R. C. Cipolla, Chair J. G. Merkle D. R. Cordes, Secretary D. R. Quattlebaum, Jr.

Working Group on ISI Optimization (SG-WCS) (SC XI)

M. D. Rana, Chair T. A. Rogers R. J. Basile, Chair D. P. Jones

R. I. Jetter, Chair T. E. McGreevy

Copyright ASME International

1 GENERAL Article Number Title

Copyright ASME International

NF-1130 BOUNDARIES OF JURISDICTION NF-1200 TYPES OF SUPPORTS AND

Copyright ASME International

FIG. NF-1132-2 TYPICAL EXAMPLE OF JURISDICTIONAL BOUNDARY BETWEEN COMPONENT SUPPORT

FIG. NF-1214-1 TYPICAL STANDARD SUPPORT UNITS 07

Riser Clamp Sliding U-Bolt